Full text of "The Chinese Government: A Manual of Chinese Titles, Categorically Arranged ..."

See other formats

Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on Hbrary shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we liave taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http : //books . google . com/| 



/^i 




i '^ 




.<i if 






\ ■•' 



/<^ 



THE- 



CHINESE GOVERNMENT. 



A MANUAL OF CHINESE TITLES, 
CATEGORICALLY ARRANGED AND EXPLAINED, 

WITH AN APPENDIX. 



BY 



WILLIAM FREDERICK MAYERS, 

CHINESE SECRETARY TO HER BRITANNIC M AJESTy's 

LEGATION AT PEKING; AUTHOR OF 

" THE CHINESE READER'S MANUAL," 

etc., etc. 



SECOND EDITION. 

With additions by 
G. M. H. PLAYFAIR, H.B.M. Acting Vice-Consul, Shanghai. 



SHANGHAI, HONGKONG, & YOKOHAMA: 

KELLY & \A/'ALSH, LIMITED. 

LONDON: TRUBNEB & CO., 57 & 59, LuDOATi HiLL. 

1886. 



d:l 12* I, a. 



^ 



/^HARVARD 
UNIVERSITY 
1 LIBRARY 
V MAY 3 1961 






SHANOHAI : 

KELLT & WALSB, LIMITED, PBHTTEBS, 

THK BUND & NAUKINa BOAD, 



PREFACE TO THE ORIGINAL EDITION. 



The object with which the present work has been undertaken 
is sufficiently expressed in its Title to leave little to be said in 
explanation of its intended scope. A happily increasing interest 
in Chinese studies, and the necessity which is becoming more and 
more widely felt for an enlarged appreciation of the modes of 
action adhered to by the Chinese government, justify the belief 
that every new contribution to the means of reference will meet 
with welcome; whilst, in the present instance, the labour of which 
the results are embodied in the ensuing pages has been stimulated 
by an obvious requirement of the public service. The urgent 
need of a key to the designations in use, in both Chinese and 
English, for the titles of public functionaries, which might be 
accepted by translators as a common rule, was represented several 
years ago by Sir Walter Medhurst, at that time Her Britannic 
Majesty's Consul at Shanghai, in an official communication 
addressed to Her Majesty's Minister; and the writer, who had 
long contemplated the preparation of some such work, owes to 
this circumstance the immediate inducement which has hastened 
the fulfilment of his design. As in many other tasks of a like 
description, however, the plan originally conceived soon betrayed 
the necessity of development in a degree unloolced for at the 
outset; and a variety of circumstances, besides, have intervened 
to delay its execution for a considerable length of time. A period 
of comparative leisure having allowed the design to be once more 
taken in hand, it has now been carried to a conclusion on a scale 
the tendency of which has been continually toward enlargement. 

A cursory inspection of the ensuing pages will suffice to shew 
that two main objects have been held in view in the course of 
their preparation. Whilst it has been sought, in the first place. 



IV PREFACE. 

to meet the requirements of the translator from Chinese texts, 
the attenfpt Jias iiiso been made to furnish explanations, with due 
regard for conciseness, which may bedf service in -fhroWkig Tight 
upon the varied details of the Chinese administrative fabric, for 
the benefit of the more general enquirer. The materials which 
have been arranged, with a view to facility of reference, in the 
twelve Parts of which the main body of the work consists, have 
been drawn from the immense stores of information offered by 
the Ta TsHng Hioei Tien, or Collected Institutes of the dynasty 
now occupying the throne of China. In the successive categories 
of ordinances and supplementary enactments which constitute this 
enormous work, occupying, when bound in European fashion, no 
less than seventy-six volumes of folio size, every detail of 'the 
Chinese polity is anticipated and prescribed for. The regulations 
they set forth, extending in date from the middle of seventeenth 
to the first decades of the present century, form in reality 'a code 
of law by which every act of the imperisd government, from the 
daily movements of the sovereign to the conduct of the lowest 
official functionary, is strictly bound to be guided. The student 
to whom this repertory is accessible will have little difficulty in 
recognizing the fact, which to others may perhaps, though in a 'less 
marked degree, be made clear by the present woi*k, that the found- 
ations of the Chinese State repose upon an all-pervading officifdism, 
a bureaucracy trained through the national system of education to 
apply the maxims of government enunciated centuries before the 
dawn of the Christian era, and impelled by motives of self-interest 
to reject the introduction of all principles at variance with these 
venerable dogmas. An appreciation of this condition of ai&irs 
may possibly tend to correct the too sanguine views whieh have 
been entertained of a speedy entrance of the Chinese, as a. govern- 
ment and people, upon the path of European progress. In order 
that such a result should be accomplished to any tangible exteilt, 
it would be necessary that the most cherished principles of the 
national religion should be abandoned, the ideals of literary wor^hfip 
dethroned, and the recognized fountain of all honour deseiHied^n 



PRXITAtlS. 'V 

favour of pursuits and doctrines which are now contemptuously 
ignored. A change such as this may, and perhaps will, be pro- 
duced under the pressure of imperious necessity if not as the 
consequence of revolution ; but it would be a delusion to anticipate 
it as'brougltt about by voluntary development. 

The dvnastic Institutes beinc^ thus reooornized as the livins: 
constitutional law of China, they have naturally been taken as the 
basis for the present work ; but, on the other hand, the divisions 
under which the subject-matter has been arranged have been 
decided upon with reference exclusively toHhe. convenience of the 
'European reader. For the explanatory matter, a number of 
authorities have been relied upon, the most important of which are 
acknowledged in their respective places. The most detailed 
attempts at explanation have been devoted to those branches of the 
subject which are comparatively remote from the beaten track of 
study, and upon which, consequently, a new source of information 
is likely to be the more useful. This has been especially the case 
with reference to the Chinese system of literary examination and 
titular distinctions, as also in connection with the distribution of 
authority in Mongolia, Turkestan, and Tibet In those portions of 
the work which deal more directly with the Chinese governing 
body, it has been the writer's endeavour to supply a want, only too 
familiar to students of the language, in the shape of a systematic 
grouping of the synonyms and epithets of courtsey which are con- 
tinually met with as the substitutes for official titles. A radical 
Index, at the end of the work, provides a ready means of identify- 
ing any one of these combinations by reference to the numbered 
paragraphs. The Appendix will be found to include explanatory 
notices with regard to the constitution and mode of working of the 
Chinese administrative organization, and also to certain peculiarities 
of the written style in relation to official matters which are invested, 
to an appreciable extent, with political as well as literary import- 
ance. A concluding section of the Appendix completes the task 
undertaken with a special eye to the requirements of a translator, 
in the list of renderings afforded for such European titles as are 



VI PBEFAOE. 

most generally in use. Many of these renderings are already 
current, and are established by long usage; others, principally 
those relating to the superior offices of government abroad, have 
been devised by the writer in consultation with scholars to whose 
judgment he has in more than one instance deferred; and others 
again are suggested by an obvious analogy. 

In conclusion the writer feels bound to express an acknow- 
ledgment of the services rendered to him, in the course of compil- 
ing the materials for the present work, by his two Chinese assistants 
Liu Yxih-ts^ai ^^^ and Yiih How-ngan 3i J^ ^, to whom 
he has repeatedly been indebted for the elucidation of difficult 
questions and who have materially co-operated in the execution of 
his task. 

Peking, November Isty 1877. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



Review of the First Edition ... 
Introduction to the Second Edition 
Further Addenda'and Corrigenda 
Alphabetical Index to the Chinese IStles 



••• ... ••• 



... ..• 



. .• •*. ... 



. • •. • • • 



••• 



. .. 



... ••• 



... ••• 



• • . 



Part I. — ^The Imperial Court 

IL— Metropolitan Administration 

IIL — Provincial Administration 

IV. — Government of Peking • . . 

V. — The Three Manchurian Provinces 

VI. — The Manchu Military Organization 

VII. — The Chinese Army 

VIII. — Hereditary Ranks, Titles of Honour, and 
Decorations 

IX. — Examinations and Official Degrees 

X. — Buddhism and Taoism 

XI. — Mongolia and Turkestan . 

XII. — Tibet and the Lamaist Hierarchy 



... ... ... 



... ... ... ... 



.*• 



... ... 



... 



•«. 



. 


Page. 


«•• 


• • 

vu 


...xxvii 


... xxix 


... 


xU 


.*• 


1 


••• 


12 


... 


31 


.•• 


44 


••• 


48 


.•• 


51 


... 


59 


*•* 


62 


••• 


69 


••• 


77 


••• 


80 


.*• 


97 



APPENDIX. 
Section L — Chinese Official Ranks 115 

„ II. — The Chinese System of Distinctive Colloca- 
tion of Characters 121 

jy IIL — Chinese Renderings of European Titles 129 

Index of Chinese Characters 187 



(From the China Rmew.) 

Ik the year 1876, Her Majesty the Queen of Qreat 
Britain and Ireland decided to add to that title the words 
^' and Empress of India." What dwell most in the memory in 
connection with this event are^ perhaps, the immense excitement 
which ensned on that decision being made known to her subjects, 
and the fierce discussions, both in the Houses of Parliament and 
among the general public, as to the advisability and fitness of that 
addition to the style of the Sovereign. Once, however, the st^ 
was finally resolved upon, another question arose, viz., how the 
title should be rendered so as to convey exactly the desired 
significance to Her Majesty's Indian subjects. Simple as the 
problem may seem, men whose judgment may be relied on 
considered that the gravest interests were concerned in its proper 
solution, and the philological result in the shape of KaUer-i-Hmd 
was not arrived at without nearly as much deliberation as had been 
brought to bear on the political potentiality of the new title. 

Difiering in much, Qri^ital nations are found to agree in 
attaching an exaggerated importance to ceremony and etiquette ; a 
name has something in it to ihe native of India or Ohina, and, in 
intercourse with them, much often depends on a nice appreciation 
of the significance a name or title is intended to convey. In 
China, especially, it is well known that ignorance of etiquette and 
of ceremonial observances on the part of a foreigner may easily be 
construed by the punctilious official class into either intentional 
rudeness or barbariaii want of culture, a still less acceptable 
alternative. It follows that, for the foreign official, an intimate 
acquaintance with Chinese ceremony and its technical terms is, if 
not absolutely indispensable, at least highly desirable, not only for 
use in his intercourse with the native authorities, but to enable 
him to understand the full significance of passing events. To 
illustrate this latter point by an example : The bestowal on Li 



I 

• •• 

VIU 



Hung-chang, the Governor-General of Chih-li, of the title Win- 
Hwa^Tien Ta-Hioh-She (see page 13, No. 135) is a signal proof 
that the political influence ascribed to that official is fully 
appreciated by the Court of Peking, but all the importance of this 
step could only be appreciated by those who know that the bearer 
of that title is ex officio the first civilian in the Empire ; while the 
fact that such a distinction was granted to one of the subject race, 
in preference to a Manchu, still further enhances the significance 
of the act.* 

It is, as Mr, Mayers states in his Preface, chiefly to meet 
the wants of the foreign official class that' the work under 
review has been written. " The labour of which the results are 
embodied in the ensuing pages has been stimulated by an obvious 
requirement of the public service. The urgent need of a key to 
the designations in use, in both Chinese and English, for the titles 
of public functionaries, which might be accepted by translators as 
a common rule, was represented several years ago by Sir Walter 
Medhurst, at that time Her Britannic Misyesty's Consul at 
Shanghai, in an official communication addressed to Her Majesty's 
Minister; and the writer, who had long contemplated the 
preparation of some such work, owes to this circumstance the 
immediate inducement which has hastened the fulfilment of his 
design."! 

Had Mr. Mayers merely given a list of Chinese titles side by 
side with authorised equivalents in English, he would even then 
have conferred a boon on the official classy of foreigners, for " a 

key fWhich might be accepted by translators as a common 

rule," would of itself shorten the toil of the translator and obviate 
many of those explanatory notes which have hitherto been so often 
necessary ; such a key would play in fact mdch the same labour- 
saving r6le as logarithmic tables do in Mathematics. 

* See Decree of January 9th, 1875, in "Translations of the PeUng Gazette^' 
for that year. 

t PrefacCi iii. 



IZ 



The author has not, however, confined himself to such a 
perfunctory accomplishment of his task. Beyond the mere 
translation of titles and terms, Mr. Mayers has supplied many 
details of customs and usag^es, besides notes of a geographical and 
historical description, which make the volume of inLst and 
value for reference to those who may have no use for it as a 
translator's companion. So much less is promised to the reader 
by the title-page than the work really contains, that it is to be 
feared many may forego acquiring it, misled by a title which 
seems to herald a course of exclusively dry reading, to be 
undergone only by those to whom a knowledge of technical details 
happens to be necessary. This is far from being the case ; the 
latter half of the work, especially, has more of the character of an 
Encyclopaedia than of a dictionary, and contains in a convenient 
form much information only to be gleaned elsewhere from many 
not always accessible sources. 

In his Preface Mr. Mayers has set forth the raison d^Stre and 
the object of his new Manual, as well as the sources of his informa- 
tion. With a few exceptions the latter is drawn entirely from 
the Ta TsHng Hwei Tierij or " Collected Institutes " of the 
Dynasty now occupying the throne of China. These '* form in 
reality a code of law by which every act of the Imperial 
Government, from the daily movements of the sovereign to the 
conduct of the lowest official functionary, is strictly bound to be 
guided."* Moreover, any one acquainted with the Collected 

Institutes "will have little difficulty in recognizing that the 

foundations of the Chinese State repose upon an all pervading 
officialism." In these passages of the Preface lies the secret of 
the mysterious first title of the work. The Chinese Government 
reposes on the foundations of an all pervading officialism; the 
rules by which the official class is guided are set forth in the Ta 
Taking Hwei Tien ; the work under review is to a great extent a 
digest of part of the Ta TsHng Hwei Tien; ergo, Mr. Mayers 

♦ Profece, iv. 



foels bound to name it in tlie first place ^^The CSiinese Gbvernment/' 
leaving an alternative designation '^ A Manual of Chinese Titles '' 
for those who prefer a simpler and more obviously appropriate 
title. It is doubtless hard on an author that he should be denied 
the privilege of naming his own work as he pleases, but in this 
case it requires little prophetic power to predict that of the two 
titles one will be taken and the other left, and that the preference 
will not be accorded to the ^* Chinese Government." 

For convenience of reference the book is subdivided into 
twelve parts, viz. : 

I.— The Imperial Court, 
II. — Metropolitan Administration, 
III. — Provincial Administration, 
rV. — Government of Peking, 

V. — The Three Manchurian Provinces, 
VL — The Manchu Military Organization, 
VII. — ^The Chinese Army, 
VIII. — Hereditary Ranks, Ac, 
IX. — ^Examinations and official degrees, 
X.— Buddhism and Taoism, 
XI. — Mongolia and Turkestan, 
XII. — ^Tibet and the Lamaist Hierarchy, 

followed by an appendix in three Sections, treating of | 

j 
1. — Chinese Official Banks, 

2. — Chinese System of distinctive Collocation of Characters, | 

3. — Chinese renderings of European Titles. I 

Hm subdivision does away with the necessity for an Index 
in English, and any Chinese character standing first in a title, 
can be traced to the page on which it occurs by reference to the 
Badical Index at the end of the work. The twelve parts above 
may be classed in a general way into two divisions, the first 
extending to the end of Part VII, and more strictly devoted to 
the consideration of the titles of public functionaries in China ; the 
Second division has to do with Titles of Honour, and with those 



XL 



partfi of the Chinese Empire ontside the Eighteen Provinees. It 
is to the former, as the more practically useful, that it is proposed 
to accord most attention in this notice. 

Part I deals with the Emperor and the Imperial Family, the 
Imperial Nobility, and the OfBces and Departments connected 
with the Court, ending with an enumeration of the Imperial 
Mausolea, or ^^ Eastern and Western Tombs," as they are 
generally called by foreigners. 

The first personage presented is, of course, the Emperor, and 
a transcription in full will give a good idea of the manner in 
which Mr. Mayers arranges his material : 

HwAl^G-Ti ^ *^ — The Emperor. Ordinary designation 
Hwang Shang § JL; Shang Jl- Title of respect T^ien-tsze 
yZ jy the Son of Heaven. Popular appellation Tang-kin Foh- 
yeU S* -^ ^ ^? the Buddha of the present day. Also Chu 
Tsze i "X* ^^'9 ^^^ Master, or Lord; and, in adulatory addresses. 
Wan Sui Yeh ^ ^ ^, t.^.. Lord of Ten Thousand Years. 

This is sufficiently concise; perhaps too brief a notice to give of 
the head and front of the Government of China. A list of the Im- 
perial expressions for 7, (or rather, as usage in the West requires, toe^) 
such as chin j^v? chSn-kung ^\^j &c., would have been most useful. 
Again, if Hwang Shang is the ordinary designation of the Emperor, 
what species of designation is Hwang Ti f It is commonly known 
that Hwang Ti is the term employed in Treaties and in reference to 
deceased Sovereigns, and presents some analogy with the '^ Caesar" 
of the Boman Emperors, while Hwang Shang is a colloquial 
expression, used also of the reigning Emperor in the Court 
Circular, Memorials, &c. But, in such contexts, each of these 
designations is ordinary^ and Mr. Mayers would have conferred a 
favour in drawing the requisite distinction between the two usages 
at the cost of a few extra lines. Lastly, Tang-kin Foh-yeh and 
Wan Sui Yeh are by no means the only expressions metaphorically 
applied to the Emperor. He is occasionally alluded to as the 
^^ One that looks towards the South," and is flattered by being 



Zll 



likened to dragons of various kinds and descriptions. The word 
Shing 1^; holy, appears in many locutions designating his person 
and his acts, and though he apparently arrogates to himself 
neither cousinship with the sun nor brotherhood with the moon, 
he can fairly claim many more appellations than Mr. Mayers has 
enumerated. 

The Empress and other denizens of the Harem, the Princes, 
Princesses and Hereditary Imperial Nobility are next noticed. It 
may be remarked that many of the titles of the last named are 
compounded partly, some entirely, of Manchu words of which the 
signification is of a martial nature. Thus Ho-sheh (No. 17)* and 
Ku-shan (No. 20) each represent Manchu words meaning a banner 
(analogous to the word chH ]^ still used to denote the divisions of 
the modern Manchu and Mongol soldiery), while hei-Uh (No. 19) 
is said to have the signification of a leader. The same idea is 
found in those of the titles of nobility which are in Chinese ; as in 
the epithets Chen-kwoh ^ ^ and Fu-kwoh ^ ^ (No. 21 to 
28) the " Defenders and Supporters of the State," and in the very 
title I'siang-kiln 3^ ^j a more literal equivalent of our Duke, or 
dux, than ^ hung. For further information respecting the titles 
and designations of the Emperors and their kindred, the reader 
is referred by Mr. Mayers to his article on the " Chinese Imperial 
Family" appended to " Translations of the Peking Gazette for 1875." 
He will there find that Gioro (No. 30) f is equivalent to the Chinese 
word Shih ^j a family, and it is there incidental allusion is made 
to the common practice in Peking of styling the Imperial uncles 
of the present and late Emperors the ^^ seventh Prince " " sixth 
Prince," and so on, accordingly as they are the seventh, sixth, &c., 
sons of Hien Feng. 



* The Chinese Manchu Dictionary ^ffia ^t ^^ ^^ translates Uo-sheh by 

jj a square, -to a corner, &c. 

t The Dictionary referred to in the previous note translates GiOTO by 
i< forehead.** 



ZIU 



The remainder of Part I is taken up with a list of the various 
Courts and Establishments connected with the Imperial Family, 
and of the officials belonging to them, winding up with the names 
of the Imperial Mausolea. 

Part II. elaborates, in a satisfactory and exhaustive manner? 
the Metropolitan Administration (or, as more generally called, the 
Central Government), and its members. The term " Metropolitan 
Administration" must be carefully distinguished from the 
" Government of Peking " which is subsequently treated in 
Part IV. 

The Central Government is administered by the Councils of 
State, viz., the Grand Council (^ ^ ;^)j and the Grand 
Secretariat (^ y^j generally translated heretofore "Inner 
Council ") ; the Six Boards ; the Gensorate ; the Five Courts ; the 
Han-lin College, and the Imperial Academy. The work of these 
various Councils, Boards and Departments necessitates an 
enormous staff of officials of various ranks. The titles and duties 
of these are translated and explained categorically, with the 
addition of much information about many of them which throws 
still farther light on their ftinctions and attributes. 

Another trace of the military basis on which the government 
of the Manchu dynasty is organised is found in the title of the 
Council of State, which is, literally interpreted, "the Place of 
Plans for the Army.'' Mr. Mayers states that "this institution 
derives its origin from the practice instituted by the earlier 
Emperors of the present dynasty of treating public affairs on the 
footing of a military council, whence the title adopted in about 
the year 1730, for the council as it at present exists." The date 
given is that of the 8th year of the Emperor Yung ChSng, a 
sovereign whose renown depends less on feats of arms than on the 
excellent Chinese in which his Decrees are written. His sole 
campaigns seem to have been two expeditions against the Kal- 
mucks or Eleuths, but perhaps it was at this epoch that the 
Council of State obtained its new title, and superseded in 



xiv 



importance the former Supreme Council, the Grand Secretariat. 
The latter stiU retains, however, a nominal prestige which has not 
been eclipsed by the Council of State, for ^^ admission to one of 
the six posts which constitute its superior ranks confers the highest 
distinction attainable by Chinese of&cials." The superior ranks 
here alluded to are those of Grand Secretary and Assistant Grand 
Secretary, the former four, and the latter two, in number. Of 
these six, half in each rank a^e always Manchus and half Chinese* 
Since the death of Wfin-hsiang, the second of the Grand 
Secretaryships has remained vacant, but the three others are enjoyed 
by Li Hung-chang, Governor-General of Chihli, Tso Tsung-t'ang, 
Governor-General of Shensi and Kansuh, and Pao-yun, a 
prominent member of the Tsungli YamSn and a holHer of several 
important offices, both military and civil, at the capital. Attention 
has already been called in this article to the important fact that 
Li Hung-chang, a Chinese, is the Senior Grand Secretary. Tlie 
title of Tung Kohy is, in the Chinese " Red Book," ranked as No. 3 
and T^i Jin Koh as No. 4, not in the order Mr. Mayers has 
given. If this rearrangement be correct, the Chinese Tso Tsung- 
t^ang is Senior to the Manchu Pao-yiin. 

Of the Honorary Titles (Nos. 137 to 142), Grand Preceptor, 
Grand Tutor, and so on, it may safely be asserted that they are 
obsolete. Mr. Mayers seems to have imagined that there is no 
distinction to be drawn between the above Preceptorships, Tutor- 
ships, &c., of the Emperor, and the same offices in relation to the 
Heir Apparents. They are, however, to all intents and purposes, 
nominal though the appointments be, essentially distinct. To the 
titles given in Nos. 137 to 142 he should have added 

vii* jSi^/Si 0i6 Grand Preceptor of the Heir Apparent, 16. 
viiL 3^ "^ ^ J# Grand Tutor of the Heir Apparent,.... 16. 
ix. ]^ ^F* ^fc ^ Grand Guardian of the Heir Apparent, 16. 
X. ^HC "^ d^ 6i6 Junior Preceptor of the Heir Apparent, 2a. 
xL ^ "5^ ^ 1§ Junior Tutor of the Heir Apparent, ... 2a. 
xiL 3J|C '^^^Jomor Guardian of &e Hair Appareiut, 2a. 



XV 

The author says, ^^ These titles are now seldom conferred with 
the exception of No. VI," i.e., ^ ^, Junior Quardian. As a 
matter of fact at the present day this title is never conferred, nor 
can it be said that this title is ever bestowed ^^ <m the (nominal) 
Guardianship of the Heir Apparent." Mr. Mayers would seem 
further to imply that yS^ "jr* ^ 0jjl, Junior Guardianship of the 

Heir Apparent, is the sole relic of these ^^ palace honours " J^ "0$ 
(as they are commonly called). But there are actually four 
eminent officials (viz., Tso Tsung-t^ang, Li Hung-chang, Ch^ong- 
^hou and Pao-yiin), who all hold the title of Grcmd Guardian of 
the Heir ApparenL As this title was held by the late Grand 
Secretary, Wen-hsiang, and as it is also held by the three existent 
Grand Secretaries, it may fairly be inferred that Grand Guardian- 
ship of the Heir Apparent is essentially part of a Grand Secretary's 
roll of honours. 

Under the head of the "Tsungli Yamte" (No. 152) will be 
found an interesting sketch of the institution of that Chinese 
Foreign Office. ^^This department, like the Kon^ki-^^u or 
Grand Council, is considered not so much a separate organization 
with ranks and promotion specially appertaining to itself, as a 
species of cabinet formed by the admission of members of other 
depai'tments of state." Brought into existence by a Decree of 
January 19th, 1861, and comprising among its members all those 
of the Council of State, and six other officials of the highest rank, 
this Yaniin has been a living fact for seventeen years, and yet the 
Chinese ^^Bed Book" continues unconscious of its existence. 
This department superintends not merely the affairs incidental to 
foreign diplomatic intercourse, but also those institutions in which 
foreigners form part of the working staff, such as the Maritime 
Customs, the " Peking University," &c. The Departmental work 
of this office is conducted by Secretaries, of which the senior are 
styled Taung^pan m&i^j and the Junior Cliang^king ^^ ; these 
two last-named characters reproduce the sound of a Manchu word 



XVI 



meaning an " assistant," and which is properly spelled CJiang-chin^ 
but vulgarly pronounced Chan-yin (see page 13),* 

With regard to the Six Boards, it should be remarked that 
the order in which they are enumerated is not arbitrary. As in 
England where the Treasury is more aristocratic than the India 
Office, and the Home Department than the Colonial Office, so in 
China the Board of Civil Office ranks first, as would be expected 
in this land of officialdom. The literary designation of the Board 
of War, viz. {Hsi Pu j^np) is a curious one at first sight, if the 
character Hd be taken in the sense of a rhinoceros! It more 
probably means, of course, what K^ang-hi calls -^ ^t ^ B^ 
"strength of martial weapons." 

Each of the Six Boards has an almost similar staff of Pre- 
sidents, Vice-presidents, Secretaries and clerks, and many of their 
titles are held as honorary or purchased distinctions. Thus every 
Governor-General is ex officio President of the Board of War, while 
Governors of Provinces, and the Directors-General of the Yellow 
River, and of the Grain Transport, are similarly Vice-presidents of 
same Board. The Secretaryships (Nos. 163 to 166) "are very 
largely obtained by purchase or conferred as distinctions without 
entailing more than a nominal connection with the Boards to which 
they relate." Under these circumstances the title has generally 
prefixed to it the characters ^^P Nff4-wai, '* Supernumerary." 

This part of the book is remarkable for the conciseness and, 
at the same time, the comprehensiveness of its details. Though of 
less than twenty pages, it constitutes an excellent epitome of all 
the information that can be required to form a very complete idea 
of the machinery of the Central Government, but its contents will 
not be retained at the student's finger-ends without considerable 
study and exercise of memory. 

Part III has to do with the Provincial Administration and 

* Pih'fieh-she (No. 181) represents the sound of a Manchu word, not hit he shi^ 
but bit'hS'Shit literally shu-pan j^jfe, from bit-M "a book." 



xvii 



as such will have a nearer interest for residents at the Ports. The 
highest civilian in the provinces is the Tsung^iuh^ or Grovernor- 
General ;* he is not necessarily the highest ofEcial in his own pro- 
vince, for where there is a Tartar General that officer ranks with 
but before him (see No. 426); the Governor ranks with but after 
him, so that these three officials are sufficiently close in rank to 
make it impossible for any one of them to overbalance the other 
two; they form a triangle of which the sides are very nearly equal, 
any two sides being necessarily greater than the third. The career 
of Ying Han, who was Governor- General at Canton in 1875, 
illustrates this point, which is the most pronounced characteristic 
of the provincial policy of the present Dynasty. Ying Han, being 
a Manchu, might naturally have looked for the support of his 
fellow-countryman the Tartar General, Ch*ang Shan, in his pro- 
jects, but, as it turned out, the latter sided with the Governor, and 
Ying Han found himself overpowered. So strong was this coali- 
tion felt to be, that, though the Governor-General had powerful 
friends at Court, it was deemed necessary to dismiss him from his 
post. 

This Chinese system of equipoise (which will be found equally 
in force throughout the Central Administration, where every Board 
has two Presidents, four Vice-Presidents, and so on), finds a 
counterpart in Japan where each post has two incumbents, one of I O 
whom acts as a check on the other. To complete the system of '\ • 
control over the provinces, the Censors have the power of pronoun- 
cing abuses which may come to their knowledge. 

♦ Mr. Mayers ignores the title of Viceroy so commonly applied to these 
officials. They cannot be held to represent the Sovereign as do our Viceroy of 
India and Lord Lieutenants of Ireland, but are more comparable to Our 
Governors of Colonies ; while the Siin-fu resemble, in most provinces, what we 
call Lieutenant-Governors. Observe, however, that a Tsung-tuh is not a mere 
Siin-fu of higher rank. Their functions are essentially different, and it is 
expressly stated, with regard to the Governors-General of Ssii-ch*uan, Ean-suh 
and Chih-li, that they exercise the duties of Governor, in addition to those of 
Governor-General, 



• •• 

xvm 



Of the Financial and Judicial Oommissioners, commonly 
called Provincial Treasurer and Judge, each province has one, 
excepting Kiang-su, which has two Treasurers, and Fuh-kien, 
which may be said to have two Judges, as the Intendant of 
Formosa (Taotai of Taiwan) has the rank and powers of a Judicial 
Commissioner. The privilege of addressing memorials directly to 
the Throne ends with the two Commissioners. 

The Taotai, or Intendant of Circuit, forms the link between 
the high officials of the province and those who come under the 
general designation of ^^ Local Authorities." He is the last of 
those who are addressed as Ta-jSuj y^ ^j and the first whose 
jurisdiction is limited to a certain defined portion of a province. 
To style him ^^ a functionary placed in administrative control over 
two or more Prefectures " is too restrictive. A circuit mav, and 
often does, comprise not only Prefectures, but also Independent 
Pepartments, Independent Sub- Prefectures and even towns which 
cannot be classed under any of these designations, such as Urumtsi 
and Murui, included in the ChSn-Ti (s|f| ^) circuit, Kansuh; 
or Shan-hai-kuan {\1J }$ 9^)^ which is under the control of the 
only Taotai in Shingking. There are seveniy-seven territorial 
circuits in China, Shensi coming first with eight, and Shingking 
last with one. Circuits are variously named ; generally the first 
characters of the subordinate cities are strung together, as in the 
Chi-Tung-T'ai-Wu-Lin ^M^^}^ circuit in Shantung; 
occasionally, however, they adopt the ancient name of the region, 
as the Ho-tung fSf j^ circuit, Shansi, and Liug-hsi '^ Q 
circuit, Kuangtung ; or their designation implies their orientcUiony 
as in the case of the Ch^uan-pei )\\ Hf^ (North Sstich^uan), and 
Kuei-hsi ]^ @§ (West Kueicbou) circuits. 

It being by Treaty stipulated that Consuls shall rank with 
Taotais, it is with the latter that the foreign authorities at the 
ports have most to do. Canton forms an exception, for there 
being no territorial Taotai resident there, Consuls communicate 
directly with the Gk)vemor-GI«neral and Gbvemor. At Tientsin 



there is a special post of ^^ Customs Taotai," with whom interna- 
tional business is transacted. The exceptional position of the 
Taotai of Formosa has already been alluded to. 

The "Prefects and Magistrates of different classes constitute 
the general administrative body of the provincial civil service." 
They are the officials who come most nearly in relation with the 
general population, and as such are called the "Father and 
Mother* of the people." They are commonly known as the 
** local authorities." 

In the Eighteen Provinces there are 182 Prefectures; of these 
Shensi, as Mr. Mayers remarks, contains the smallest number, viz. , 
seven, but Kiangsi has not the honour of containing the largest, 
for Yiinnan comes in first with 14. There are besides two Prefec- 
tures in Shingking. Shun-t'ien Fu (Peking) and FSng-t^en Fu 
(Moukden) are exceptional Prefectures, and are administered by 
Governors called Fuyin )\^ ^ (See Parts IV and V). The 
latest addition to the Prefectures of China is T'ai-pei Fu (§ ^K) 
in the North of Formosa, a few miles from Tamsui. 

Next in rank to the Fu, is the T^ing or Sub-prefecture, which 
is of two kinds, either independent of, or subject to, a Prefecture. 
Both kinds are found to be established in positions where the 
administration of the laws is a matter of difficulty. There are 25 
Independent Sub-prefectures in China, Ssu-chuan having the 
greatest number, 6, while many provinces have none. Sub- 
prefectures, as a rule, are to be found on the outskirts of the 
Empire Proper, especially where the Imperial authority is not 
very firmly established; others have been founded to control the 
aboriginal tribes in the interior of Kuangsi, Kueichou, Yiinnan, &c. 
There are a few 'Pings outside the Eighteen Provinces; that of 
Hu'-lan in Tsitsihar may be instanced (See No. 374). A new 

I 

* It may not be so generally known that Assistant Magistrates are, at Peking, 
jokingly called 'JM Wh 1^ yi nai-nai the "Aunts and Orand-mothers " 
[of the people]. 



Sub-prefeotare has lately been established in Kansuh (to the South 
of Ling Chou ^) with the name Ning-ling ^ ^• 

The Independent Departments, or Chih-li chow, correspond in 
rank to Sub-prefectures, and are a grade higher than the San-chow 
wL /H' ^^ Subordinate Departments. Of the two kinds there are 
altogether 243 in China, of which number 45 are in Kuangsi. 
This estimate includes, however, 29 native Departments (referred 
to under No. 328) which find place in the Chinese '* Red Book." 

Of the Sieuj or Districts, there are 1,299 in the Eighteen 
Provinces and 7 in Shingking. Chihli comes first with 124 and 
Kueichou last with 34. The average for each province is about 70. 
Every prefectural city, with the exception of two in Kueichou, 
is also a District city, and in some cases, as at Peking for instance, 
comprises two District cities within its limits. In one solitary 
instance, that of T^ai-ts^ang Chou in Kiangsu, a District city is 
coincident with the Chef-lieu of a department. The Hien as a 
division of a province, seems to have existed with little or no 
variation from very early times. The word itself is explained by 
its derivative Bsiian :}§[? thus meaning ^^ dependent [on a Pre- 
fecture]." While the ChUn ^ has been superseded by the Fu 
)3*> while the Chou tH has dwindled from a province to a de- 
partment, the Hien has persisted unchanged. 

Prefectures, Departments and Districts, as well as the offices 
of the high provincial authorities, are provided with a stafi^ of 
assistants, secretaries, clerks, &c., known by the common name of 
Tao Tsa ^ ^« With these is concluded the enumeration of the 
members of the provincial administration. The Literary Chancellor- 
ship (No. 323) is "a special appointment, usually filled by officials 
of high literary degrees who leave Peking for three years to serve 
in this capacity. They preside at the prefectural examinations and 
give the degree of Siu-ts^aV The collection of Customs at Canton 
and Hwai-ngan, and the manufactures of silks, &c., at Nanking, 
Soochow and Hangchow, are superintended by officials specially 
appointed from the Imperial Household. The supervision of the 



XXI 



Yellow River embankments, and the control of the Transport of 
Grain,* are invested in Directors-General, the headquarters in the 
former case being in Shantung and in the latter in Kiangsu. 
Each of these officials ranks as a Vice-president of the Board of 
War and as Junior Vice-president of the Censorate, thus being on 
the same footing as Governors of Provinces. 

Among the mountain ranges of Kuangtung, Kuangsi, Yiin- 
nan, Kueichou and Ssiichu'an there remain to the present day 
tracts of country inhabited by aboriginal tribes which the Chinese 
have never been able to reduce to complete subjection. The 
government of these semi-independent tribes " in general is left in 
the hands of their hereditary chieftains, upon whom high sounding 
titles of various degrees are bestowed in accordance with a system 
introduced originally by the Mongol conquerors of China," The 
independence of the aborigines in Formosa is even more complete, 
though the island is perhaps on the eve of a change in that respect. 
The Japanese expedition awoke the Chinese Government rather 
roughly to a sense of its short-comings, and the establishment of a 
District (called HSng-ch*un fS ^); at the south of the island, 
was the first step in the required direction. Even now (or at 
least until very lately) the Magistrate at Heng-ch*un continues to 
pay black-mail quarterly to the chief of the neighbouring tribe. 

» 

The establishment of a second city at Pilam, on the South-east 
coast, is now contemplated, and the Formosans may be induced in 
process of time to hai t'u wei liu 3sC it ^ im " accept the 
rights of citizenship." 

Part IV treats of the Government of the City of Peking. 
Though nominally a Fuj or Prefecture^ the importance it derives 
from being the residence of the Court, necessitates a particular 
organisation in its government. Its head is not a Prefect, 
Chih'/uy but a Fu-yin ^ ^j which the author translates 

* The Director-General of the Grain Transport is, in the Ta Tiding Skei Tien, 
stated to be of the higher grade of the seoond rank, not of the lower grade, as 
classed by Mr. Mayers. 



^^ (Governor," and which has been frequently rendered Mayor, He 
has a colleague called ^' Governor Adjoint " and, as subordinates, 
a Vice-Grovernor and a Sub-prefect {^/g Pp)j besides the usual 
staff of a prefecture. The other officials of the municipal govern- 
ment are connected in one way or another with the police of the 
metropolis, excepting a few who superintend the Peking Octroi^ 
Granaries and Mints. This Part contains the only humorous 
remark detectable throughout the book; as such it is worth 
quoting, and will at once recommend itself to any one who 
has visited Peking. '^The Boadway Office. The repair and 
maintenance of the streets of the outer (Chinese) City of Peking 
are — nominally — cared for by this department.^' Mr. Mayers is 
not responsible for the italics. 

From the wording of the final paragraph (No. 364), it might 
be inferred that all the cash current in China are coined at Peking. 
This is not so ; though fewer in number than during the early 
reigns of the dynasty, there are still mints in several provinces 
which continue to issue copper coin. It is difficult to state any- 
thing with certainty with regard to the present reign, but under 
T^ung-chih there were mints open in Fuhkien, Shantung, Shansi, 
Kiangsu, Hupei, Hunan, Chekiang, Kuangsi, Tiinnan, Sstich^uan, 
Taiwan and Chihli (at Paoting Fu). In the Peking Gazette of a 
few months ago there appeared a memorial from the Governor- 
General of Kansuh, asking to be excused from obeying a decree 
ordering him to reopen the Kansuh mint (formerly located at 
Kung-ch^ang Fu ^ |§ . ) 

A brief sketch, in Part Y, of the system of Government 
adopted in the three Manchurian provinces, is followed by a very 
complete r&nim4 of the Manchu Military organization in Part VL 

It is scarcely necessary to point out that herein lies all that is 
most characteristic of, and peculiar to, the reigning dynasty. The 
civil administration of the Ming Sovereigns suffered little change 
by the accession of the Manchu rulers; it is even surprising, as was 
pointed out in note in the China Review (Vol. YI, No. 2, page 
137), to how small an extent the dominant race participates in the 



XXlll 



direct Government of the people. The sole tangible precaution 
adopted against revolts of the Chinese has been the stationing of 
Manehii troops at certain places in the Eighteen Provinces and 
Mongolia, to which must be added the (nominally) large garrisons 
in and around Peking. The balancing of authority in the pro- 
vincial Governments, by which no one official has a dangerous 
excess of power in his own hands, has already been adverted to, 
and acts as a safeguard against attempted treason among the 
official dass; while, finally, the exaggerated reverence for parental 
authority, which is so univereal in the Chinese people that the 
promises of the Fifth Commandment are by some considered to 
have been fulfilled towards this race, is transmuted into a species 
of loyalty to the office, if not to the person, of the Emperor. 

The Eight Banners, *' under one or another of which all 
living Manchus and all descendants of the Mongolian and Chinese 
Soldiery of the Conquest, are enrolled," together with the Chinese 
provincial troops, or " Army of the Green Standard " (see Part 
VII), constitute the standing forces of the Empire. In actual 
warfare, however, more practical use is made of the '^ so-called 
Yunff ^ braves, or irregulars, enlisted or discharged according 
to circumstance*." The regulars of each province are ranged 
under three conunands, v£2r.,that of the General-in-Chief (^2^^i-<wA), 
of the Governor- General, and of the Governor. The latter 
division forms the garrison of the provincial capital, and like that 
of the Governor- General, has a commandant with the title of 
Chimff-kuriy who fills the post of Adjutant or Military Secretary, 
At Canton the Governor-General's Adjutant is known as the 
Kuang-hip ^ ^^\ and the Governor's as the Chung-hip ^ fjjj. 

There are separate military organisations under the command 
of the Directors- General of the Yellow River and of the Grain 
Transport, and there is a special squadron to whom is allotted the 
duty of patrolling .the Yang-tsze. 

Mr. Mayers omits all mention of the marine forces of China. 
In many cases, certainly, the designations of the officers are 



XXIV 



identical with those for the corresponding ranks of the land army, 
but their titles would demand a different translation, and should 
therefore have been given. There are, besides, some few titles 
peculiar to the naval service, of which Kuan Chia Kuan ^ ^ Jg 7 
Commander of a gunboat, may, be instanced as one. As it is, if a 
naval officer has the title of Yeo-Jci (No. 444), as he very well may, 
he must still be styled a *' Major," however incongruous the 
rendering may seem to Western ideas. 

With Part VII ends that portion of Mr. Mayers' work which 
has to do with the titles of public functionaries in China. As re- 
gards the rest of the book, it is set forth in the Preface that " the 
most detailed attempts at explanation have been devoted to those 
branches of the subject which are comparatively remote from the 
beaten track of study, and upon which, consequently, a new 
source of information is likely to be more useful. This has been 
especially the case with reference to the Chinese system of literary 
examination and titular distinctions, as also in connection with the 
distribution of authority in Mongolia, Turkestan and Tibet." 

On these points the reader is referred to the book itself, as 
no notice which did not deal largely in quotation could do justice 
to the chapters which Mr. Mayers has devoted to them^ and which 
are copious enough in details to form treatises by themselves. In 
Parts XI and XII, especially, there is packed away a vast store 
of information in a marvellously small space. 

The Sections of the Appendix are as useful in their way as the 
foregoing portion of the book. Section I., on the "Chinese 
Official Eanks," may be held to throw ^ general light over the 
rest of the work. It is also to some extent supplementary to 
Part IX on '^ Examinations and Official Degrees." 

The " practice of vacating office by the junior of two relatives 
who may be brought into contact with each other, within certain 
prescribed limits, in the same provincial areaf" which "is de- 
signated hwei pi or ' respectful withdrawal in the presence of a 
superior'" (page 119) was well illustrafced on^ th^. appoiatment 



XXV 

of Liu K^nn-yi in 1875 to the Governor-Generalship of Canton. 
Up to that time Liu Ch*ang-yu, of the same familj^ as Liu K^un- 
yi, and said to be his unele, was Governor of Kuangsi. The 
impossibility of the latter remaining as subordinate to his own 
nephew was so obvious that tlie decree appointing Lin Oh^ang-yu 
to the Governor-Generalship of Yunnan and Kueiehou appeared 
side by side with the announcement of his nephew's appointment 
to Canton. This case, it is true, cannot be considered as exactly 
fulfilling Mr. Mayers' definition of hwei pi, but shows how the 
same desired result can be effected by different means. 

Sections II and III will chiefly be interesting and useful to 
translators. The system of distinctive collocation of characters is 
indeed one " which cannot safely be ignored by any student of the 
language," especially if he be at any time engaged in official 
correspondence with the Chinese authorities. 

The list of Chinese renderings of European titles is, however, 
the most welcome addition of all to the body of the work. Its 
usefulness can be best expressed by saying that to have omitted it 
would have detracted seriously from the completeness of the book. 
It is not too much to say that Mr. Mayers is the one man whose 
dictum on such a subject is likely to be universally accepted, and 
all must be grateful to him that he has published his dicta for the 
general benefit. That the renderings Mr. Mayers has sanctioned 
will be so accepted is hardly questionable. No list of the sort has 
been hitherto in general use, except the few titles employed at 
Hongkong, and translators have been reduced to rendering 
European titles into Chinese in a rather haphazard way. Among 
the Diplomatic titles it will be noticed that Mr. Mayers has lately 
adopted a new rendering for the office he himself fills; this is 
presumably in consequence of his promotion to the local rank of a 
Second Secretary in the Diplomatic Service. 

Among the* naval titles, " Commander," was formerly 
translated Chu-tsiang 3E W' ^^^ perhaps the reason for the 
substitution of Ts^ an-tsiang should have been given, or at least 



some notice have been taken of the change. As a whole, however, 
the renderings appear to be fairly well selected and adapted. 

That the subject selected, and the treatment it has received 
combine to make a book which will add to Mr. Mayers' reputation, 
and which can be cordially recommended to the student and the 
general reader, it is hoped the foregoing pages have made suffi- 
ciently plain. 



a. M. H. PLAYFAIR. 



INTRODUCTION TO THE SECOND EDITION. 



The present edition of Mayers' Chinese Government bein^ 
merely a reprint of the original publication and not a revision, the 
publishers have entrtistdicl to me the task of embodying in an 
Introduction such information reorardinsj administrative changes 
during the past eight years as shall compensate to some extent 
for the emendations which would have more fittingly found a 
place in the body of the work. Some alterations were suggested 
by me in the China Review when criticising the book shortfv afler 
its apj^earance, and need not here be further alluded to, as the 
critique in question is appended to this re-issue. Sundry further 
corrections of the original text have occurred to me since and 
others have become necessary o\ying to the reorganisation of 
certain provinces by Imjierial Decree. I propose to add a few 
notes, which I consider likely to be of general interest, on what 
may be called Curiosities of Chinese Officialdom. The addition, 
finally, of an index to the Chinese titles, arranged alphabetically 
according to the author's own system of orthography, will prove, 
I trust, a means of speedier reference than the original Radical 
Index. 

G. M. H. PLAYFAIR. 



Shanghai, June 14th, 1886. 



1 ! 



FURTHER ADDENDA AND CORBIGBNDA. 



.<•♦►- 



During the minority of the Emperor T^ung Chih, in 1862, 
the Prince of Kung was appointed Regent of the Empire. The 
style adopted to designate his position gives us a useful phrase, viz. : 

I ChSng Wang H |j; 2*— Priw<^ Regent. 

Another phrase, necessitated by the minority of the present 
Emperor, is — 

Hwang T'ai How Lin Ch^ao S iC JS^ tt 4B :— -Empress 
Dowager Regent. Her Majesty's act of regency is also described 
by the expresssion Ch^ui Lien T^ing Ch4ng £ H M( iSfc> literally, 
*' To drop the curtain and administer the CJovernment," as the 
ministers' eyes may not gaze on the Empress's face. 

No. 143. — Of the ten 8ttbchancellors, six are bannermen 

and four Chinese. 

< 

No. 144, — Of the iew Readers, six are . banaermen and 
four Chinese. 

No. 145. — ^The Assistant Readers are sixteen in numl^er^ 
not nine ; fourteen of these are Bannermen and two Chinese. 

No. 146. — Of the six Archivists, four are bannermen and 
two Chinese. 



XXX 



FUKTHER ADDENDA AND COKBIOENDA. 



No. 200, — Weighty affairs of State are often entrusted to 
the deliberations of the ^^Six Boards and Nine Ministries/' but 
there is likewise a more select assemblage which has similar 
functions, in criminal affairs, viz. : 

San Fah Sze H & '9* — Kie Commission of Revision, 
consisting of the President bf the Board of Pbnishmbhts, the 
President of the Censorate and the Director of the Grand Court of 
Revision. 

No. 282. — The Epistolary style of a Subprefect isalso Fen 

The following is a list of the denominations of Second Cl^ss 
Subprefects, indicating the special functions they exercise; the 
title l^ung Che @ ^ is to be understood after each ; 



mm' 
mm 



Specially apiKiintefd 
tii'coatBol various 
classes of evildoers. 



^ w ! In charge of water 
j> ^&t I communications. 



rtKf 

mm 
mm 



~\ 



> 



With control ovei' coast 
and river defence. 



y 



With 'military 

jurisdiction. 



ASfC 

4^ iSt I" charge of naval 
construction. ' 



He & 

JT ^^ ^ With jurisdiction ov^r 
,^ /^turbulent populations 



1$^ 



and s^ypge tribes. 



Some of these hav6 entrusted to them a combination of duties 
as indicated by their titles. For instance a H jf T'ung Ch6 has 



FUBTHBR ABDENDA AND CORRIGENDA. XXXI 

to attend to the Salt Revenue as well as to keep in order turbulent 
characters. 

No, 283. — Assistant Subprefects enjoy a similar variety of 
denominations, as the following list shows (the title j|[ fj being 
understood) : — 



mm 


i! m 


^ Ty 


mm 


m 19 


mm. 


mtm^m 


mR 


m^ 


mm 


^m 


jSR 9RH 


IB M 


»w 


mm 


isnr 



No. 284. — The Personal Designation in the recital of titles 
Cheng T^ang JE ^ is used of a Department Magistrate as well 
as of a Prefect and District Magistrate. 

No. 326. — The characters Ho-tung fij ^ in the title of the 
Director-General of the Yellow River are said to be a contraction 
for -ffo-nan and Shan-^ww^, the two provinces with which he is 
chiefly concerned. 

No. 329. — There are in the provinces of Kuangsi and 
Yunnan certain native Departments {t^u-clum i ffl) and Districts 
{t'u'hsien, ;j^ J|^), and one instance in Ssiich^uan of a Township 
{t^u-asU, i ^)j <^f which the administration is confided to 
hereditary rulers. In about one half of these the official is a 
native of the place, but in the remainder the rulers are from 
remote provinces of the Empire, notably from Yi-tu Hsien, which 
is the head District of Ch^ing-chou Fu, Shantung. It is an 
interesting subject of enquiry how these extra-provincials came to 
acquire hereditary rule over the native tribes of the southern 
frontiers. 

Subjoined is a Table of hereditary jurisdictions in Yunnan, 
Kuangsi and Ssiich^uan. 



xxxii 



FUBTHBR ADDENDA AND COBRI0IN3>A. 



T.C.== t'u-clwu ± %i T.H.= i'u^hsien ± IK; 

T.S,= t^U-88U i -g. 



District. 



Chieh-an ^ ^ 
Chi'lun ^ jSi 
Ssia-lei "f ^ 
Hsiang-wu |^J jSf 
Lo-yang ^ ^ 

Ming-ying ^ || 
SsU-ling g §| 

Chiu'hsing j\j ^ 

Kuo-hua ^ ^ 
An-pHng ^ ^ 
Chiang f£ 
Chung Jfe 

PHng-hsiang ^ jp| 
Shanq^lin Jl ^ 

&« is 



Rank. 



T.C. 



T.C. 

55 

T.S. 
T.H. 

T.C. 



55 
55 
55 

T.H. 
T.C. 

J3 



Province. 



Kuangsi 



5> 
55 
55 
55 
55 
55 
55 



Ssuch^uan 
Kuangsi 
Yunnan 

Kuangsi 

55 
55 
55 
55 
99 
55 
55 
55 
55 
55 



Native Place of Magistrate. 



Department 



55 
55 



55 

District 
Department 



55 

55 

55 

.^5 



Li-yang Hsien, Kiangsu 
T'ai-ts'ang Chou, Kiangsu 

Shao-hsing Fu, 

Cheh-kiang 

Chehkiang 

ofaantnng 



55 



Yi-tu Hsien, Shantung 



55 

55 
55 
55 

55 
>5 
55 



Nos. 383-384. — It may be noted in connection with the titles 
of these two mints that the word Ts^Han j^ here is equivalent to 
Tauten @| "money." The latter character is of comparatively recent 
introduction into the language and replaced the ancient j^ which 
was the original word for money. The character }g has a similar 
meaning. 



No. 455-ii. The character H is a misprint for f|. 



FURTHER ADDENDA AlTD CORRIGENDA. XXXlii 

Appendix^ Section I. To his remarks on ranks^ Mr. Mayers 
might have added that, besides the nine buttons in common use, 
there is a tenth, called 'Pow pHn ting tax S^ iip IK IS ^^ highest 
of all, bestowed on eminent officials. The possessor, it is said, 
wears a red button of the 1st rank without the usual silk loop. 

Appendix, Section III. The following is a list of titles in use 
for officials of the Imperial Maritime Customs : — 

Inspector-General H % i[f ^ Tsung Shui Wu Sze. 

Chief Secretary « S X « «» ^ { ^^Jhf i wTSe''^ 

Chinese Secretary mnmitimm^ { ^^gl'^k^r^^te. 

Commissioner ^ IBf ^ ^h.m Wu Sze. 

Deputy Commissoner §lj ^ fSSr ^ Fu Shui Wu Sze. 

Assistant ^ |j| Pang Pan. 

Divisional Inspector jgj X ^ Siin Kung Sze. 

Harbour Master H j|B[ fi Li Ch'wan T4ng. 

Tide Surveyor i^ ^ Tsung Siin. 

Examiner H g Yen Hwo. 

Tidewaiter ^ ^ ^ K'ien Tze Show. 

Berthing Officer ^ fg ^ Che Po So. 

Recent Administrativb Reorganisation. 

Of recent administrative changes the first in chronological 
order was the assimilation of the Government of Manchuria to 
that of China Proper. 

Previous to 1876 the government of the provinces of Kirin 
and Hehlungkiang was, as stated in Part V., on a purely military 
basis; while that of Shingking, though approximating to the 
model of the Eighteen Provinces, was still essentially military. 
Since 1876 a gradual- change has been effected. In Shingking 
the Military Governor has been invested with the powers of a 
Governor-General, the Civil Governor with those of a SUn Fu ; a 
new Intendancy, that of the Marches or Eastern Border ^ j{} JJ, 



XXXIV FURTHER ADDENDA AUD CORRIGENDA. 

has been established, and a prefect rules at Gh^ang-t^u ^ |, 
(instead of a Siibprefect) with several recently established Districts 
under him. 

In 1882 the reorganisation of Kirin commenced. The High 
Authorities remain for the present military, but an Intendancy 
has been established at Kirin, comprising one prefecture, several 
departments and districts and four independent subprefectures (at 
Pedne, Ch'ang-ch^un, Pin-chou and Wu-ch'ang). 

The remodelling of Hehlungkiang is under consideration but 
the details have not yet been published in the Peking Gazette. 

The recovery to Chinese rule of the New Dominion by the 
late Tso Tsung-t*ang has been followed, after an interval of several 
years, by a change in the mode of government, similar to the 
modifications in the Manchurian regime. In 1884 the Administrator 
of the New Dominion, Liu Chin-t^ang gij ^ ^, was gazetted 
Governor of Kansuh (a province which previously had been under 
the direct control of a Governor- General) and the New Dominion. 
At the same time a Provincial Treasurer was appointed and the 
Commander-in-Chief at Urumtsi was transferred to a similar post 
in the new province. Up to the present no Provincial Judge has 
been appointed. The other high provincial officials are a Brigade- 
General at Aksu ; a Taotai at the same town with jurisdiction over 
three independent Subprefectures and one independent Department 
with several new Districts ; and a Taotai at Kashgar with 
jurisdiction over two independent Subprefectures, three in- 
dependent Departments and sundry Districts. 

Lately steps in the direction of reorganisation have been 
taken in Formosa. Up till now a simple Intendancy dependent 
on Fuhkien, it is now proposed to change the status of the island 
to that of a separate province. The post of Govenor of Fuhkien 
will be abolished, the duties of Governorship devolving on the 
Governor-General of Min-cheh, who will be thus assimilated to 
the Viceroys of Ssuch'uan and Chihli. The present Governor of 
Fuhkien will be Governor of T^aiwan, and will reside in Formosa 



FURTHER ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA. XXXV 

for six months in each year. Such at least is the present 
arrangement, but it is probable he will be required eventually to 
pass his whole time there. His provincial capital is yet to be 
built, at a point midway between Chia-yi and Chang-hua ; in the 
meanwhile T'ai-pei Fu (Bangka) will serve temporarily as the 
seat of government. His provincial staff will consist of a 
Treasurer (a new post), a Taotai at T^ai-pei, who will also be 
Superintendent of Customs, a Taotai at T'ai-wan Fu, who will be 
at the same time Provincial Judge and Director of Postal 
Communications, Brigade- Generals at the Pescadores, T^ai-wan 
and T'ai-pei, Prefects at T*ai-wan, T'ai-pei, Chang-hua and 
Pilam and several Department Magistrates, Subprefects and 
District Magistrates besides those already existing. 

The opening of the southern borders of Kuangsi to French 
trade is likely to require the introduction of certain administrative 
changes, but so far these have only been hinted at. The British 
conquest of Burma cannot fail to entail similar consequences in 
the immediate future. 

Another important result of the late Franco-Chinese war was 
the institution in 1885 of a new Board at Peking styled the 
Hai Pu f^ fig, or Admiralty, with the Emperor's father, the Prince 
of Chun, as chief. The staff will probably be on much the same 
model as that offered by the original Six Boards, but full details 
are still wanting. 

It is no doubt in connection with the general scheme of naval 
reorganisation that the Brigade-General hitherto stationed at 
Yang-chiang T'ing in Kwangtung has been transferred [June, 
1886] to the port of Pakhoi. This official's command, as that of 
his colleague at Kao-chou Fu, in the same province, is now naval 
instead of military. 



XXXVl FURTHER ADDEin)A AND CORRIGENDA. 



NOTES ON SUNDRY OFFICIAL POSTS. 



The Central Government. 

Thongh not mentioned in the " Chinese Government," each 
of the Six Boards and several of the minor departments (such 
as the Mongolian Superintendency, the College of Imperial 
Physicians, the Courts of Sacrificial Worship, Banqueting and 
State Ceremonial) would appear to be normally provided with a 
Supervisor [||| 3 ^ ^ -i^ Hf]* Practically these posts are 
seldom all filled. For instance, in 1885 there were such 
Supervisors over the Boards of Civil Office, Revenue and Works, 
while the Boards of Ceremonies, War and Punishments had none. 

Precedence amono Metropolitan Officials. 

There appears to be no written law regulating precedence 
among the higher posts at Peking, but by observing the course of 
promotion in the pages of the Gazette, the following scale has 
been elaborated and may be, considered fairly accurate. 

1. Comptroller-General, Civil Office. 

2. do. do. Works. 

3. do. do. Mongolian Superintendency. 

4. President, Civil Office. 

5. do. Revenue. 

6. do. Rites. 

7. do. War. 

8. do. Punishments. 

9. do. Works. 

10. do. Mongolian Superintendency. 

11. do. Censorate. 

12. Senior Vice-president, Civil Office. 

13. Junior do. do. 

14. Senior do. Revenue. 



15. Senior Yice-preftident^ Bites. 

16. do. do. War. 

17. do. do. Punishments. 

18. Junior do. Bevenoe. 
19« do. do. mtes. 

20. do. do. Punishments. 

21. Senior do. Works. 

22. Supervisor, Instruction. 

23. Senior Vice-president, Mongolian Superintendency. 

24. Junior do. Works. 

25. Senior do. Censorate. 

26. President, Imperial Clan Court. 

27. Junior Vice-president, War. 

28. do. do. Mongolian Superintendency. 

29. Junior Vice-president, Censorate. 

30. Director, Office of Transmission. 

31. do. Court of Revision. 

32. do. Court of Sacrificial Worship. 

33. . do. Court of the Imperial Stud* 

34. do. Banqueting Court. 

35. do. Court of State Ceremonial. 

36. Deputy Supervisor, Instruction. 

37-42. Subdirectors in the same order o^ tlie Directors 

given above. 

Duplication of Posts. 

The posts of President, Vice-presidents Senior and Junior, 
and (^ Senior and Junior Censors in the Six Boards, are held in 
duplicate, one incumbent being Manchu or Mongol and the other 
a Chinese or Chinese Bannerman; such posts are consequently 
distinguished as Manchu appointments m ^ and Chinese 
appointments ^ jj^. 

As a rule Chinese Bannermen are eligible for the Chinese ap- 
pointments only, but'tbey are sometimes found occupying aMonohu 



XXXVlll FURTfiBR ADDENDA AND CORRIGfiNDA. 

post It appears to be in such cases essential that the Bannerman's 
name should be on the Manchu pattern. Thus ^ fb, a Chinese 
Banuerman who in the Manchu style uses only his ming ig? 
would be eligible where ^ jg, also a Bannermen but called by 
both his orignial hsing fj^j Haily and his mingy T^ung^ would be 
debarred. 

The same duplication of posts prevails in the other departments 
of government with two exceptions, viz., the Mongolian Super- 
intendency, officered exclusively by Manchus and Mongols, and 
the College of Imperial Physicians, in which the officials are all 
Chinese, and almost invariably natives of Peking. 

Supernumerary Vice-president. 

There is attached to the Mongolian Superintendency a 
Supernumerary Vice-president [ (K ^ f^ J^ ] not mentioned by 
Mayers. He is always a Mongol prince. 

Mongolia, Turkestan and Thibet. 

Previous to the recent reorganisation of the new Dominion 
and its partial incorporation in Kansuh, the administration of the 
government in Mongolia and Turkestan was reserved for members 
of the eight Banners. The only exceptions were the Administrator 
of the new Dominion, the Commander-in-Chief at Urumtsi, and 
the Brigade-General at Hi. 

The Eight Banners. 

There is no published information, accessible to the public, 
on the personnel of the Banner Corps, except that the Red 
Book notes the fact whenever a high Peking official happens 
to be Captain-General, Lieutenant-General, or Deputy Lieutenant- 
General of a Banner. 

Appointments to these commands are, however, usually 
notified in the Gazette, and by diligent study of this periodical from 



FUUTHER ADDENDA AND COKBIGBNDA. XXXIX 

(lay to day, it is possible after a few years to form a tolerably 
accurate table of the incumbents of Banner commands* The 
following rules seem to hold good for posts in the Banner 
organisation : 

1. — Bannermen only are eligible. 

2. — Any Bannerman is eligible for any post; that is to say, 
a Manchu may be in command of a Mongol or Chinese Banner or 
vice versa, 

3. — But a Bannerman is seemingly never appointed to 
command the Banner to which he himself belongs. For instance, 
a Manchu of the Plain white Banner might command the Yellow 
or the Bordered white, but never the Plain white corps. 

In this connection a curious fact may be chronicled. 
Ch'ung-yi^3|^ (distinguished as the only Bannerman who ever 
attained the distinction of Chuang Yuan ^ %) whose daughter 
was selected to be T^ung-Chih's Empress, was by birth a Mongol, 
but on becoming the father-in-law of the Emperor, was trans- 
ferred to a Manchu Banner. It is not impossible that this 
expedient was adopted in order that T^ung-chih's consort might be 
nominally of his own race. 

A peculiarity in connection with Chinese Bannermen is noticed 
above under the head of '' Duplication of Posts." 

Provincial Authorities. 

With three exceptions all such official posts as are properly 
speaking provincial (as opposed to certain special appointments 
held directly under the Crown) are open to Chinese and Bannermen 
alike. The three exceptions are the position of Commander-in- 
Chief J§ '^j whether naval or military, always filled by a Chinese, 
and of Tartar General and Deputy Lieutenant-General, invariably 
held by Bannermen. 

As regards Brigade-Qenerals |t ^ it is the rule that they 
should be Chinese, but the rule is not hard and fast. For instance, 
in 1879 the Chao-t^ung (Yunnan) and Chungking (Ssuch'uan) 



3^1 V^fa^rS&fi ADDENDA AND OORBIGSNDA. 

60iiimaiids were in the hands of Manchus. The Brigade-Generals 
at Yung-p*ing 'Fu (Ma-lan Ch6n) and Yi Ohou, in Chihli, seem to 
be invariably Bannermen ; and such was also the ease, at least 
until lately, at Kashgar in Turkestan. 

In the matter of the special appointments held directly under 
the Crown, viz., the Superintendents of the Hunting-Grounds 
lit Jehol ; of Silk Manufactures in Kiangsu and Chehkiang ; of 
Customs at Kalgan (Chihli), Huai-an (Kiangsu), Sha-hu-k^ou 
(Shan^si), and Canton, the incumbents always belong to a Banner 
Corps and are generally Chinese Bannermen. 

• 
Memorialising the Throne. 

In the old days the privilege of directly addressing the 
Throne extended even to Prefects. At the present time it has 
been much curtiiiled. In the provinces it ceases among civilians 
with the Judicial Commissioner, and among military officials with 
the Brigade- General. There is an apparent exception in the case of 
theTaotai of Taiwan, but he owes the privilege to the circumstance 
that he holds brevet rank as Judge, and is moreover ex officio 
Literary Chancellor for Formosa. The only cases in which he may 
avail himself of the right appear to be when announcing his 
assumption of office or reporting on the provincial examinations. 

Similarly Brigade-Generals memorialise only when notifying 
arrival at a new post. 

When addressing the Throne, Chinese speak of themselves as 
"ministers" g, Bannermen as "slaves" jj[ ;^. But there are 
exceptions to both these rules. Military officials of whatever race 
now use the term jjjf ;J^, though formerly the same distinction 
existed among military men as among civilians. Among Manchus, 
Princes of the Blood use E not jJK ^ • 



ALPHABimCAL INDEX. 






AO 



mm^ 



CHA 
CH'A 

CHAN 



CH'AN 



No. 

563 
11 



39a 



537, 604 
320 



72 
312 
189 
595 



221 
220 



563 



CHANG 






CH'ANG 



:g£ 



CHAO 

Mm 

ffilJf 



No, 

585 

598 

602 

189 
75 

202 
88 

598 
133, 152, 
517, 541 



9 

439 

338 

338 

32 

40 



296 
296 
827 
333 



xlii 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



CH^AO 



CHE 

mm 

Via 

CH«E 

CHf: 
CH'f; 

■ 

GflftN 



No. 

454 
473 
456 



341 
114 
343 
330 
273 
273 
284 
281 
289 
484 
300 
506 
507 



456 



596 



182 



25 

439 
441 



CinfcNG 



mm 






pa 



IE- 



CH'ENG 

mfm 



CHIH 



mm 

fd^tkrb 111 



m-^m^n 



CHO 



No. 

479 

305 

281, 289 

App. 1 

App. 1 

504 

115 

163 



272 

456 
288 
456 
506 
357 
359 
371 



73 
325 

284 

272 

379 

App. 1 

182 



4^W 



577, 594 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



xliii 



CHOW 


No. 


CH'UNG 


No. 


mn 


286 


M&mm 


472 


mmm 


286 






MrIII 


285 


CH'WAN 




i^l^l 


285 










«» 


477 


CHU 








ili?9m:k^ 


172 


CHWANG 




±igk 


166 






lESI 


227, 292 


»§ 


452 


±* 


65, 166 


tKiC 


474 


±^ 


1 






mi^mm 


597 


FAR 




f&i^.mm 


182 






&w 


417 


ai 


587 


^'■^mm 


182 




• 


^m:k^ 


565 


FAN 




CH'UH 




#J^ 


565 


ffi# 


477, App. 1 




583 
477 


CH'UN 




ff^ffi t^ 


276 




225 
223 




275 
275 

182 


CHUNG 


• 






'¥m 


147 


FANG 




'¥B:k^ 


456 


» ^ tn Aju 


^ ^ ^^ 


'i'm 


472 




150 


+S 


2 


*f6 


2V5 


4>«II4*« 


273, 453 
148 
149 
272 




481 
344 
372 
423, 430 


+«« 


272 






+» 


576 


FEI 




+»*^ 


456 






+^ 


135 


% 


6 



xliv 



ALPHABSnCAI. IKDEX. 



Ff:N 

FfiNG 

Mm 



FU 

mmmm 



MB 

giJIB 

giJH 

gii^ 

glllPiMl 
gij!l 



No. 

387 

280 



456 

456 

233 

88 

456 

456 

27 

21 

22 

28 



542 
603 
338 
344 
480 
187 
442 
480 
471 
340 
384 
164- 
58 
536 
472 
334 
606 
370,381,427 
306 
442 



F\J—eont 
g!l^^ 

mmm 



FUH 



HA 



^mti% 



HAI 



No. 

336 
480 
448 
353, 378 
15 
56,340,369 
339, 368 
471 

469 
26 
274 
439 
274 
274 
290 



m^ 


16 


tSSM 


306 


numm 


306 


tmrnk 


305 


msL 


305 


3a 


473 



563 



282 
324 
327 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



xl 



HAN 


No. 


HIEN 


1 No. 


WtpK 


201 


mm 


395, 544 




379 


NlMWi 


607 






m 


App. 1 






^mm 


182 


HIA 




fi$)^ 


291 






^k^ 


42 


TSit 


379 


mk^ 


44 


« 


« 


HING 




HIANG 










45 
467 
412 


ffm 


157 

458 
259 


till IE 


411 


HIOH 




HIAO 


f 


mm 


323 






miE 


258, 304 


mmm 


389,431,545 


mm 


257 


mm^m 


383 


m-k 


323 


mm 


456 


mu 


323 


mm 


472 






mm:biE 


478 


HO 

• 








%%S»JE 


173 


HIEH 




ft«t«3^ 


174 






ftjiai 


14 


I^^.IH 


266 


mtms. 


17 


raft 


439 


m\m 


318 


l&m 


136 


\iid( 


318 


l&m-^^ 


540 


nu 


326, 439 


i&m 


428 


mim^mt 


326 


i&»&^ 


175, 245 






^m^^ 


561 


HOW 




i&m:km± 


136 






ts-^ 


442 


m 


455 


1S1»« 


573 


^W9t 


App. 1 


nsi 


352 


nLm:k^ 


106 



J VI 



ALPHABETICAL IIUD&X. 



HU 



HUN 

HUNG 
t«tt# 



HWA 



4bm 



HWAN 



tfi;$^ 



HWANG 



Im9 









No. 

391* 
397 
398 
396 
34 
413 
154 
564 
589 



387 
467 



231 

564 

30 



564 



597 



458 

29 

61 

2 

10 
4 
1 
3 
1 
11 



HWO 
HWUI 

MR 



1 



JEN 



«B 



JU 



A 



JUH 



M« 



JUNG 



No. 
407 



78 
467, 473 

182 

557 . 
App. 1 



198 
71 
456 
563 
565 



App. 1 



580 
456 
456 



484 



456 



ALPHABETIOAL QfSKC. 



xJtii 



EA 



K'A 



•^m 



KAI 



K'AN 






KAO 



K'AO 
WW 

TffiS, 

mm 



No. 

567 
567 
583 
600 



517 



328 



550 

588 



456 
470 



182 
467 



609 
45a 
610 
425 
135 
143 



EI 

mnmf 
irns 



Ka 



9m» 



KIAH 



¥«l 



KIANG 



98 



KIAO 






EIEI 






No. 

188 
418 
164 



455 
456 



547 
383 
581 



4'98 



472 
303 
305 



346 
472 



xlviii 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



KIEN 






£^ 



Itftii 



K'lEN 



^m 



KIN 






K'lN 

fifths 



KING 



8M 



No. 

321 
209 
262 
251 
263, 264 
484 
247, App. 1 
280 
455 
339 
411 



334 



589 
585 



260 



K'ING 

m 



KIOH 



ftll 

ftH 



KIU 






K'O 



m^ 



K'OW 
KU 



339 
232 
59, 194, 295 
295 
472 



No. 

77 

196, 232 

455 



30 
499 



200 
348 
456 
517 



467, App. 1 



549 



mist^i. 


379 
20 
13 


K'U 




Mm 


297 
297 



ALFHABETIOAL INDEX. 



xlix 



Ktr 



MA 



kOan 



SUt 



Kt^N 



KUNG 



s± 



mA 

'SB 



No. 

472, App, 1 
473 



App. 1 



133 
133 

440 
282 
457 
182 
279 
550 
281 
41 
43 
281 



471, App. 1 

473 

158 

21-24, 455 

12, 13 

387 

466 

456 

221 

223 

226 

142 

225 



K'UNG 






KWAN 



tin 



mm 



KWANG 






KWBI 



JIA 



KWOH 



a £11 
a# 



No. 

214 

460 
60 



84 

App. 

347 

82 
541 
261 
248 
280 
317 
324 
112 



230 

456 

67 



5 

8 



75 

215 

2 

247 



I 



LA 



LAN 
LANG 



LAO 



«9 



LI 






at 

LIANG 

mm 



AX*rKAKRI0AL IHOSZ. 




No. 


TiTFiN 


No. 


58i 


ftltt 


276 




mm 


294 




liH 


452 


464 


LIN 




98 


mm& 


470 




mm 


470 


168 


LING 




572 


^ 


289 




f[^iK»*e 


92 




fRW:k^ 


559 




mm 


391,494,546 


329 


mm 


439 




mm 


459 




mSttBlif 


419 




saiiK 


267 


282 


an 


585 


183 






548 


LIU 




57 






548 


:^m 


188 


282 


5?;» 


247 


App. 1 


ets 


210 


287, 345 






153 


LO 




155 
App. 1 


mm 

LUH 


329 
329 


274 






278 


9Ln& 


393 


283 


mm 


47t 


566 


m» 


439 


278 


m9 


439 



LUN 



«« 



LUNG 
LWAN 



MA 



i^X 



MfJN 

m6ng 



MI 



MIAO 



ar^ 



MIN 






ALPHABBXriCAL INDfiX. 



No. 



387 



472 



111 
110 



392, 544 



358 



535 



563 

488 



329 



MING 






MD 



(tk 



MUH 



^W 



NA 



NAN 

HI 



154 

599 






NGAN 



li 



No. 

587 
289 
236 



264 



548 



538 



455, App. 1 
455 
247 
329 
152 
259 

152 

88 



557 
334 
456 
267 
469 
468 



lii 



ALPHABETIOAL INDEX. 



NG^H 



mm 



y 



NGfiN 






NIEH 



9k^ 



NO 
NUI 



No. 

451 

588 

15 



455 

471 
App. 1 

467 

455 
App. 1 



276 
276 



564, 587 



151 
83 
83 
379 
482 
134 
147 
143 
145 
144 
146 



NUNG 



9k^ 



o 






PA 






PAH 

AM 



PAI 



fill 



PAN 






PANG 



No. 
154 



517 
547 



587 
465 
448 



456 

23 (note) 

379 

471 



329 



388 
560 
611 
585 



561, 565 
351 
475 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



liii 



PAO 






PEH 



i&ft 



I 

fd3S 



p6n 



PI 

mm 

p'l 



PIEH 



SdiK 



PIEN 



nil 



No. 

457 

363 

364 

108 

182 

App. 1 

36, 379 

37 

38 



595 
337 
455 
563 



182 



157 
247 



312 



283, 285 



208 



PIH 



mm 


181 
181 


P'lN 




m 
& 


7 
App. 1 


PING 






343 
280 
156 



FING 



nm 



POH 



1f± 



PU 



No. 



^m^ 


275 


^#3ge. 


564 


i$#Mj$ 


167 


urn 


160, 273 


^u 


161, 274 


%^Bik 


169 


u^^^ 


162 


n^^n 


283 


us 


294 


^mm^ 


348 


^mm 


347 


^•sm 


354 



199 



240, 252 



Uv 



ALPHABBTIOAIi INDXX. 



PUH 



SA 






SAN 



EM 

mil 



s6n 
sMg 

ftJE 



No. 

23 

24 



564 
517 



283 
472 

79 
143 
182 
142 
App. 2 
461 
292 

85 
284 

94 
210 



593 



494 
495 
493 
492 



SHA 



SHAN 
Ill:g 

ttli 

mm 

SHANG 
± 

SHAO 



No. 

590 
612 
589 



491 
279 
496 
497 



160 
1 
379 
86 
414 
458 
457 
570 
563 
568 



222 
294 
141 
197, 233 
142 
140 
250 
162 
162 
162 



AXiPHABBSCICAL IMDKK. 



Iv 



SBAO—cont. 


No. 


*pmm 


162 


^m 


162 


Pmi6 


162 


iP^ 


222, 294 


^m 


294 


vs 


439 



mm 

SfilB 

nmm± 
nmm± 

mm 
mmM»M 



583 
387 
454 
28, 454 
455 
10,39 
App. 1 
App. 1 
9 
206 
204 
161 
206 
203 

97 

90 

95 

96 
189 
574 



76 
415 
236 
239 

81 



SHfeNG 



jnB«T« 



SHIH 



ii'& 



SHOU 



1km 

fit 

tff 



SHU 



mm 

Wot 



MfS,mJSi 



SHUEI 



No. 

469, App. 1 
466 



96, 547 



150 
456 
446 
446 
439 
289 



181 
181 
491 
210 
210 
237 
101 



282 
158 
439 
435 
314 
316 



Ivi 



«■ 



SIAO 






SIEN 



mm 



SIH 



«fd 



SIN 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



SHWANG 


No. 


SIU 1 


No. 


1 
1 

1 
1 


App. 2 
462 


Htm 


469 
456 
456 
207 


SI 




so 


V 




2 
157 
166 

I 

1 


J3f 

su 


327, 439 
557 


STANG 




illiii=^'iit 


564 



135 



• • 

SU 



^IBE 



SUAN 



235 



585 






418 


ma^m 


332 


200 


&^n:km 


315 


133 


sa^ 


456 




Jtttftil 


331 




i 

] 


456 




SUI 




329 








^R^^r ^RlW^ 


592 




IRX^ 


471 




StTN 




557 








mm 


272, 274 




mm 


293 




)i«e« 


348 




mm 


306 


358 


^ 


1 439 



ALPHABETICAL INDBX. 



Ivii 



SZE 


No. 


TA— con*. 


No 


\sRmm 


256 


:km 


441 


mwt 


548 


^mm 


479 


IS^tiill^lBE 


180 


*F 


289 


i>9§$tl^fll:^1il 


179 


:k^ 


396 


m 


439 


^%ik 


426 


m» 


305 


^m± 


135 


nB^stB^ 


224 


iziim 


200 


m-^ 


152,166,343 


:kmi& 


162 


mjM 


422 


m3$ 


575 


mm 


306 


^li^JlM 


585 


mm 


171 


^^MH 


605 


m« 


168, 182 


n^ 


375 


mm 


250 






mm^ 


33 


T'AH 




mm 

mm&^ 


246 
176 


m^m 


539 


mm 


170, 302 


TAI 




mm 


152 


■rffc^k^h JiU 








«* 


579 






Mn 


579 


TA 




#a 


213 


*a 


585 


T'AI 




*i* 


479 


V .■■&. m 




*ffA 


232 


*«# 


228 


*A 


280 


±n 


138 


^m^n 


188 


±m 


247 


:kMn 


290 


±ni^ 


268 


:km^ 


195 


*« 


139 


:kmm 


232 


*«# 


229 


^mm 


232 


*A 


208 


*^« 


249 


±m 


137 


^mm 


162 


±'^ 


281 


*«^ 


162 


ik^ 


162 


:km^ 


162 


*^ 


10 


ikmm 


162 


ia^^p^ 


142 


:km 


472 


^« 


538 


:k0 


443 


^Ht 


550 



hiH 



ALPEULBXnOiU:. INDXX. 



TAN 



T'AN 



mm 

TANG 

fUMSt 

T'ANG 






TAO 






T]6h 

TfeNG 

SfHB 



No. 
App. 2 



476 



1 

182 
182 



165 
162 

64 



189, 280 
502 
503 
501 
5G0 
280 



608 
608 



456 
456 



T6NG 



IVMlle 



Tl 






T'l 



TIAO 



ISM 



TIEH 



m^ 



T'lEH 



No. 
48» 



App. 1 

564,578 

11 



m^ 


190 


%m 


182 


HM 


150,216,485 


vbW 


309 


iSkm 


439 


m-k 


440 


m^ 


440 


&nmm 


323 


H^^PI 


347 


llt:^ 


135 



464 



564, 578 



28, 46-54 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



\ix 



TIEN 


No. 


TU— cow/. 


1 No. 




212, 253 
35 


miSL { 


1 
380, 548. 
549, 551' 


#(& 


294 


m^% 


74 


JIH 


241, 254 


^m 


274 


ITS 


467, 473 


irii^m 


279 




J 


«i^«# 


323 






«flm 


278 ■ 


T'lEN 




«M 


439 


5^^ 


1 


T'U 


182 


TING 








* - • - 




±w 


328 


^J* 


582 


jLw^ 


328 


T 


547 


±jfif 


328 


T« ' 


App. 1 




328 


^ 




±SI 


329 


T'ING 








( 




TUR 




mm 


196 










MtmiT 


242 


TO : 




TUI 




$ll^£ 


18 






l^HM^ 


19 


»»t 


490 






Hn 


439, 557 


TU 










- 


TUNG 




M^^ 


184 






mm 


277 


^*^TrW 


583 


mm 


445 


$@ 


135 


m^M 


189 


«» 


2, 10 


m* 


298 


«Hig 


365 


mmm 


298 


ncim 


116 


mm 


445 


ft^ 


468 


mma 


200 


d^i^Ht 


601 



Ix 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



T'UNG 


No. 


TSANG 


JNo. 


jitt^ 


190 


m^ 


587 


^^mn 


191 






mmf^mm 


192 






m$:^^ 


456 


TS'ANG 




mm:k^ 


456 


J» K^ ▲A^i*^ V^ 


• 


mm 


283 


t^ 


362 


»isr:A:e 


152 




301 


i&^lftJS 


279 


ASl ^ ^ V^ 




m^t 


481 






M^ 


282, 334 






mm±\iik 


477 


TS'AO 








}f^ 


439 


TSAI 




\%mmm 


327 


ffJ» 


569 






^49 


135 


TSf:NG 




mm 


538 






USE A 


589 


«^ 


469 






II 


455-6 


TSAN 




TSI 




«1 


244 
226 


mm 


591 
601 






mi^w^ 


424 


TS'AN 




^IS 


249 


«« 


295 






0^}^ 


443 


TSIANG 




^P 


App. 1 




( 367, 426, 


0Vk 


193 


mm. 


] 456, 552, • 


«m 


543 


- 


(557 


?&# 


564 






*«*E 


f 553-4-5 
t 558 


TSIEH 




^31 


443 


^ii« 


182 



ALPHABETICAL INDfiX. 



Ixi 



TS'IEN 

^^ 

TSIN 
ll± 

m±mk 

TS'IN 



TSING 



TSIOH 



ftiS 



TSO 



2EW 



No, 

433 
405 
403 
402 
401 
107 
335 
447 
447 
182 



473, App. 
477 
476 



100 
91 
11, 537 



411 



454 



223 
225 

187 
197 



TS'0AN 



ms 



TStTN 



^n 



TSUNG 



TSO— oon<. 


No. 


ifrMM 


264 


/lrM1t9 


361 


&Mn»mm 


402 


&mmfk 


349 


&^^ 


199 


&w&i 


161 


&^m 


198 


&m 


291 


&»mA 


185 


&m 


322 


£« 


288 


mm 


387,429,544 


^H/k 


585, 588 


£«tt 


362 


TSOU 




^9r« 


109 


TSU 




&ik 


255 



mm 


185 


mm^ 


601 


«ff:X:S 


63, 420 


IB^ 


441 


msftn 


152 



153 



468 



Ixii 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



TSUNG— oon^ 

ma 
mm 
mm 

m 



TS'UNG 






TSWAN 

m& 

TSZE 
TS'ZE 

MA 



No. 

562 
150 
341», 441 
272-3 
408 
218 
447 

55 

55 
564 
45a 
232 

29 
99 



360 
App. 1 



150, 216 



455 
456 



284 
155 
243 
458 



URH 

r,a*A 

WAI 
WAN 



WANG 



^M 



£ffi 



WEI 






No. 

477 
456 

282 
291 



508 
379 
486 
483 
516 
487 
450 
449 



31 

152 

11 



sjtasitt 



App. 1 

518 
327, 439 
436, 548 

438 

437 
66 
390, 432 



AlFRABETIOAL INDKZ. 



Ixm 



WEI— cone. 

mmmwst 






wu 



i^-X* 



Bmn± 



YANG 
YEH 



No. 

4G0 
355 
404 
102 
38(> 
App. 1 



135 

182 
456 
273 
323 



584 
178 
87 
135 
182 
182 
273 
189 
342 
211 

265 
200, 231 



394 



571 



YEN 
YEO 



mm 

YIH 



%H^ 



-a* A 



No. 

505 
182 
313 
280 
311 
312 
277 



225 
223 
187 
264 
361 
99 
164 
198 
294 
186 
402 
349 
376 
377 
378 
444 
444 
471 



289 
319 
409,421,438 
350 
476 
456 



hdv 



ALPEABKTIOAL INDEX. 



YIN 
liliJEllS 

YING 



YOH 






YtJ 






No. 

506 
App. 1 
App. 1 
68 

190 

491 

385 

382 



439 
80 
410, 452 
273 



159 
177 



89 
271 
247 
189 
184 
105 
104 
103 



YtTAN 
Y0EH 



YtTH 



m,n 



YtTN 



YUNG 



No. 

88, 416 
585 
164 
491 
270 
269 



mm 


308 


mm 


327 


mm 


310 


mm 


277 


^1^ 


307 


mmm 


455 


mmm 


113 



^ 



324 
329 
473 



55 



439 



MANUAL 



OF 



CHINESE TITLES. 



PART I.-THE IMPERIAL COURT 

«^ 1 . — Hwang Ti ^ ^. — The Emperor. Ordinary designation, 

Hwang Shang ^ Jl ; Shang J^, Title of respect, T'ien Tsze 55 •?, 
the Son of Heaven. Popular appellation, Tang-kin Fo Yeh § ^ 
^1^, the Buddha of the present day. Also Chu Tsze ^ •^, Le. 
the Master, or Lord; and, in adulatory addresses, Wan Sui Yeh 
M 31 Mi ^'*^* Lord of Ten Thousand years. 

2. — Hwang How ^ jg. — The Empress. Lit designation, 
^ Chung Kung tf" §; or when two consorts of equal rank exia^t 
together, as in recent times, Tung Kung }|[ flf and Si Kung |f § 
with reference to the *' Eastern" and "Western" divisions of the 
Palace allotted to their use. Title of respect, Kwoh Mu 3 ^^ ^^ 
"Mother of the State." 

3. — Hwang T^ai How ^ Jjj jg. — ^An Empress Dowager. 

4. — Hwang Kwei Fei ^ Jf jfi. — Secondary Consort (Con- 
cubine) of the first rank. Concubines of the second rank may 
from time to time be advanced, by imperial favour, to this grade, 
and from the first rank a secondary consort may be raised to the 
degree of Hwang How or Empress Consort. 

5. — KwBi Fei ;ft jfi. — Concubine of the second rank. 

6. — Fei ^. — Concubine of the third rank. 

7. — P*iN jK* — Concubine of the fourth rank. (This character 
is also read pin). 

8. — Kwei Jen j|; A« — Concubine of the fifth rank. 



2 PART I.— THE IMPERIAL COURT. 

9.— Ta Ying fg m and Chiang Tsai ^ ;gg.— Female atten- 
dants of the Emperor. These may be elevated to the rank of 
Kwei JSn. Beneath them, again, is a class of Serving Women, or 
She Nu m 35c> ^^^ *r® recruited by annual drafts from the families 
appertaining to the Imperial Household, and who serve for a term 
of years within the Palace. 

10.— T^Ai TszB :fe ^.— The Heir Apparent. Also called 
Slie Tsze f^ -J. Lit. des. Hwang ch'u fi^, and Tung Kung ^^^ 

1 1 . — Hwang Tsze ^ ^. — Princes. The sons of an Emperor 
of the present dynasty are known simply as A^-ho P9 9^ ^ render- 
ing of the Manchu word ag^h^ unless when designated by the 
princely rank bestowed upon them, such as TbHu Wang ^ J, or 
lower dignities. Lit. des. Wang Ti 1 1^, or simply TL 

12. — Kung Chu^^. — Princess Imperial; daughter of an 
Emperor. — See the following ranks: 

13. — Ku-LUN Kung-Chu @ iH ^ ^. — Princess Imperial of 
the first rank (daughter of an Empress consort). From the 
Manchu word jrwrun, =the Chinese Kwoh or State. 

14.— Ho-SHBH Kung Chu ft ^ ^ i. — Princess Imperial of 
the second rank (daughter of an inferior consort). 

1 5. — Ngeh Fu )^ 1^. — Husband of an Imperial princess. In 
former dynasties, this position was designated Fu Ma H^ j^. 

1 6. — Fu TsiN ^ ^. — Princess Consort (wife of an Imperial 
Prince). 

Hereditary Imperial Nobility: 

The titles conferred on members of the Imperial House of the 
present dynasty are of twelve degrees. Imperial princes usually 
receive patents of the first or second order on arriving at manhood, 
and their sons are invested with the third degree of ranL Titles 
of the same degrees are also conferred. on the princes and chieftains 
of the various Mongol tribes. They are as follows : 

1 7.— i. Ho-SHEH Ts'm Wang ft ^ ^ I.— Prince of the 
1st order. 

18.— ii. To-LO KuN Wang $ J| IB I-— Prince of the 
2nd order. 



PART I, — THE niPEBUL COUBT. 8 

■ 

1 9.— 111. To-LO Pbi-lbh $M R Hf.— 5et-teA, or Prince of 
the 3rd order. 

20.— iv. Ku-SHAN* Pei-Tszb S |I| K ^^—Bei-tsze, or 
Prince of the 4th order. 

21. — V. Fbng-ngen Chbn Kwoh Kunq $ ^S* i| B &* — 
Imperial Duke of the first degree. 

22.— vi. Fbng-ngen Fu Kwoh Kung |1 ,B M H &•— 
Imperial Duke of the second degree. 

23. — vii. Pu-JUH Pah FENf Chen Kwoh Kung /p A A ^ 
^ B &• — Imperial Duke of the third degree. 

24.— viii. Pu-JUH Pah Fen Fu Kwoh Kung ^ A A ^ 
jm B &' — Imperial Duke of the fourth decrree. 

25.— ix. Chen Kwoh Tstang Kun H B ^ 'J[.— Noble of 
the Imperial lineafje, ninth in line of descent. 

26.— X. Fu Kwoh Tsiang Kun H B W 3?.— Noble of the 
Imperial lineage, tenth in line of descent. 

27.— xi. Feng Kwoh Tsiang Kun $ B SV 5?.— Noble of 
the Imperial lineage, eleventh in line of descent 

28.— xii. Feng-ngen Tsiang KtJN $ ,f, ^ gt.— Noble of 
the Imperial lineage, twelfth in line of descent. 

The titles given according to the above list are to some extent 
compounded of Manchu words. Thus, ho-shSh (originally signifying 
a banner) denotes one of the four divisions of the army or State ; 
and bd-Uh has the signification of commander or leader. The 
titles conferred in any rank are transmitted in a diminuendo 
scale, a bei~l4li*8 son becoming a bei^taze^ and so on, until the 

* Ku-shan represents the Manchu word Ku-9ai^ gignif jing Banner. 

t The A ^ Pfih F^/h or Eight privileged ranks date from the reign T'ien 
Ming (A.D. 1616-1626), when, before the entry of the Manchus into China, 
eight princes, entitled Ho-shgh Bei-16h, were formed into a military Council 
of State. They were invested with an equality of rank and dignity, and 
they hence received the designation of the *' eight parti tioners." When 
the order of precedence among the princes and nobility of t^e Imperial 
lineage came subsequently to be determined, a line of distinction was drawn 
at the sixth rank as above mentioned. The princes and nobles who were 
classed as on a par with the ** eight partitioners ** had the right of access to 
the Court on all State occasions. Those below the sixth rank simply took rank 
in their respective banners. (See Ta T^ing Swei Tien,) 



^pn ofja .ijioble of ^el^h degree ^^pif IS ©o lopger te the 
inheritor of a title. 

An es^oeptio.n to this rule f^^!^ ho^srev^r in the ,cafie of such 
titles as are conferred " with the right of i^l\er;^nce fpr e\;er "-r- 
She H wang tH ^ 11:^^^ ^^d particularly in t^e case of the 
Eight Chief Princely Houses, the descendants of the Princes who 
served in effecting the co^qi;^Sit of Northern China. These are 
familiarly designated The Iro^-cappe^ Princps — Pieh Mao-Uze 
^^nff ^ ♦! ^ J. {See Nqs. 46 to 54.) 

29. — TsuNG Spi^ ^ ^, — Iif^pef'ial Cfapsmian ; a descendant 
of tlj^e acknowledged foj^nder of jlie reignjng Manqhu dynasty, Hien 
Tsu, A.D. 1583-1615. The Taung^aliih ^re entitled to the dis- 
tinction of wearing a yellow girdle, or Hwp.iig Tai-taze 3t 'Sf "?» 
whence this epithet has come to be used as a synonym of the rank 
itself Individuals who have been degraded for misconduct from 
the rank of Tsung-shih ^ear a red girdle, and are consequently 
styled Hung Tai-tsze {see behw,) 

30. — KiOH Lo H JK* — Gioro, or collat^al relative of the 
Imperial house, claiming descent from its early ancestry.* The 
Gioro wear a red girdle, and are consequently designated, in fami- 
liar parlance, as Hung Tai-tsze ^^ ^. 

31. — Wang Fd J jgf. — Establishment (Palace) of Princes 

OF THE ImPEEIAL LiNEAGE. 

32. — Chang She ^ £. — Kecorder, or Bemembraneer; 3 af . 

33. — 8zE I-chaNg % fl ^. — Major-domo ; 4 a. 

34.— Hu Wei g| ^.—Officer of the Body Guard ; of four 
degrees of rank, from 3 b to 5 b. 

35.— Tien I Jf^ ^. — Assistant Major-domo; of four degrees 
of rank, from 4 b to 8 b. . 

• For fuller particulars relating to the titles and designations of the Chinese 
Emperors and their kindred, see the writer's article on the *' Chinese Imperial 
Family" appended to *< Translations of the PeUng Gazette for 1875." 
Shanghai, 1876. 

t Here and elsewhere throaghout the following pages an officiaVs rank is in- 
dicated by an Arabic numeral, followed by " a " or " b," according as he is of the 
higher or lower grade of the said rank. Thus, 3 a implies that a Remembrancer 
is of the higher grade of the third rank. 



PAET I.— THB IMPBRUL COUBT. 6 

36— Pao I Q^.— (Bo-i*) Bondservant; Serf.. 

37.— Pao I Ts'an-ling ^ ifS ^ ^.—Colonel of the 
Bo-i; 5 b. 

38.— Pao I Tso-ling ^ti 1£ §[•— Captain of the Bo-i; 4 b. 

39.— She Tszb ft ^.— Son of an. Imperial Prince of the 
first degree (before receiving distinctive rank.) 

40. — Chang Tsze ^ '^.'— Son of an Imperial Prince of the 
second degree (as above). 

41 . — 'KuS Chu 15 i* — Daughter of an Imperial Prince of the 
first degree. 

42. — HiEN Chu jj^ ^. — Do. of the second degree. 

43.— KtJN KuN JU S.— Do. of the third degree. 

44. — HiEN KijN |gg ^. — Do. of the fourth degree. 

45. — HiABTG Ktjn Hi ^. — Daughter of an Imperial noble of 
the first or second degrees. 

45a. — Keh K4h 4Sf Ijr- — Daughter of an Imperial Prince or 
noble (colloquial usage^ from the Manchu). This designation is 
confined to^ the five degrees above enumerated. The daughters of 
Imperial nobles in the lower ranks are designated Tsung Nii ^ jfc. 

The Eight Chief Princely Families: 

The following are the titles borne by the princely families to 
whom the right of perpetual inheritance is secured:- 

46.— Li Ts'm Wang JX §i 3E.— Prince of Li. 

47.— Jul Ts<iK Wang 'Sg ^ 2-— Prince of Jui. 

48.— Ytj Ts'm Wang ^H % BE-— Prince of Yii. 

49.— SuH Ts'iN Wang Jt jRI .—Prince of Snh. 

50 Cheng Ts'm Wang 95 ]|| I.— Prince of ChSng. 

♦ The Pao-i or bo-i are members of the Eight Banners (see No. 379) who are 
hereditary bondservants of either the Imperial or of one or other of the 
Princely households. They are formed into a separate organization within 
each banner. Some among them, designated the ** Corean pao-i" are deseen- 
dantB of Corean prisoners taken during the wars of the 17th oentury. 



6 PART I.— THS IMPERUL COUBT. 

51.— Chwang Ts*m Wang |K H I.— Prince of Chwang.* 

52.— SHUN-CH^EfTG KxjN Wakg Jg ij^ fl^ 3E — Pnnce of Shun 
Ch^eng. 

53.— K^BH K^iN KvS Wang ]£ ft flS I.— Prince of 
K^Sh-k^in (K^6h.ch4n).t 

54.— I Ts^iN Wang fg H I.— The Prince of I. 

» 

This tide, although not one of the Eight, is also held in per- 
petuity. The holder descends from the Prince of I Hien, thirteenth 
son of the EmperoV K^ang Hi. 

• 55.— Tbung Jen Pu ^ A JJSf.— The Ihperial CiABf Court. 

This department regulates all affairs relating to the Imperial 
Eondred, preserves the Family Roll or Genealogical Becord, 
Yc Tieh ^ J9| etc. The Prince of the Imperial family who holds 
the presidentship of the Court is distinguished by the lit. des. 
Tmng K'ing ^ J^. 

56. — Fu Ch^eng Jff ^.— Vice Director; 3a. 

57. — Li She Kwan 3| V 1|f.— Commissary; 5a. 

58.— Fu Li She Ewan g] 3 9 '^•—Assistant Commissary; 
5b. 

59.— King Lih jg S.— Registrar; 6a. 

60.— The K*uNG Fang g ^.—Prison of the Imperial Clan 
Court. 

61 .—The Hwang Tang Fang H jH g.— Begistry office of the 
Imperial Clan Court. 

62;— Nui Wu Fu p^ gf /gp.— The Impeeial Household. 

63.— TsuNG Kwan Ta Ch^en MHilS ^ g.— Comptroller of 
the Household. 

* All the above are princes of the first degree, and derive their descent in the 
direct line from sons of the two earlier founders of the reigning dynasty, 
T^ai Tsu and T'ai Tsung. 

t The above are princes of the second degree, descending from grandsons of 
T'ai Tsu and T<ai Tsung. 



PABT I.— THB IMPBEUL COUBT, 7 

64. — T^ANG Lang CeuiTg jj J^ rft.— Secretary. 
65. — Chu She ^ y.— Assistant Secretary. 

66.— Wei Shu Chu She S K £ <f.— Deputy Assistant 
Secretary. 

Departmenta of the Hottsehold: 

67.— Kwang Ch^u Szb H ^ 3.— Treasury of the Privy 
Purse. 

68.— Yin K*u |K JIJ.- Bullion and Jewellery Vaults. 
69.— Ts^ZB K<u iK J|t.— Porcelain Store. 

70.— TwAN K^u IS m.— Silk Store. 

71 . — I K^u jj; Jjjt. — Imperial Wardrobe. 

72.— Ch^a K'u :^ Ht.— Tea Store. 

73. — Chih Jan Kuh H fkM' — Manufacturing and Dyeing 
Department. 

74.— Tu Yij Szb tf ft Sf.— Pay and Commission Office for 
the Household Brigade. 

75. — Chang I Szb ^ §| 3. — Office of Worship, Ceremonial^ 
and Control of Eunuchs. Controls the sacrificial observances of 
the Court Has under it a large sta£P of secretaries and under- 
secretaries {lang-chung^ etc. etc). A sub-department is the Ewoh 
Fang % S^ or Fruit Office, which supplies the fruit and other 
offerings presented in sacrifice. 

76.— Shbn Fang jjff ;^.— The Directorship of Worship (under 
the preceding). Has a number of grades of employes. 

77. — K^iNG FbUg Szb J| Jf 3. — Pasturage Department. 
Manages the flocks and herds maintained for Palace use. 

78. — HwEi Ki Szb. — ^ ff "3.— CoUectorate of rents for 
Banner property. 

79.— San K*i Chwang T^ow Ch^u H ft Jffi ® i(t.— Steward's 
Office for Property of the Three Household Banners. 

80.— Ting Tsao Sze flf |g ^.—Office of Works; with 
numerous sub-departments. 



8: PABT I.— THE nCPBBIAL COUBT. 

81 .—Seen Hing Szb <Q| jf| fj.— Judicial Department. This 
department takes cognizance of all cases relating to the three 
superior Banners. 

82.— KwAN-HiAH Fan Yih Ch*u ^ ft # S *— Police 
department (with special control over eunuchs of the Court.) 

83.— Nui San K^i ^ H Jft.— The Household Division of the 
Three Superior Banners {see the Eight Banners, infrd). In each 
of the superior Banners a certain number o{ pao-i or bondservants 
of the Imperial Household {see ante No. 38) are separately con- 
stituted for duty in this department. They furnish the force of 
three brigades entitled Nui Hiao £}i Ting ^ Jg Jg 5, Nui Eu 
Kan ring ^WtW^S, and Nui Te'ien FSng Ying H^9t^y 
corresponding to the corps under these designations formed from 
the general mass of the Banner population (see infrd). 

84.— KwAN Fang Ch*u ^ g S-— The Antechamber Office. 
(Controls the personal attendance upon His Majesty). 

85.— San Yuan H Bu*— The Three Courts (under the Imperial 
Household). These are as follows : 

86.— Shang* Szb Yuan ± JU K.— The Palace Stud. 

87.— Wu Pei Yuan % fl| ^.— The Imperial Armoury. 

88.— Feng Chen Yuan ^ % ^.— The Parks and Hunting 
Grounds. His department has the control of the Imperial Parks 
such as the Nan Yuan ^ ^, commonly called the Hai Uze ^ ^j 
Yuan Ming YUan [g ^ H, Ch'ang C¥un Yuan fi $ ■, etc., 
etc. 

89.— Ytj Ch^a Shan Ch^u ft| 3? Ji ft.— The Buttery of the 
Household. 

90. — She Wei Ch^u f^ ^ ft. — The Department of the 
Imperial Body Guard. 

This department controls the affairs of the three superior 
Banners, which furnish the body guard of the Sovereign. 

91.— Ts'iN KtjN Ying ^5gg.— The Imperial Guard. 
92,— Ling She-Wbi Nui Ta Ch^en fiS ^ |B ^ :^ E-— 
Chamberlain of the Guards ; la. Six in all. 



PART I. — THE IMPERIAL COURT. 9 

93.— Nui Ta Ch'en ft ^ g.— Chamberlain; lb. Six in all. 
Selected from among the San chili Ta ch^in (see below), or Captain- 
Generals of Banners. 

94.— San Chih Ta Ch^en fj ^ :^ g— Assistant Cham- 
berlain ; 2b. No fixed number. These officers take the duty by 
turns of commanding the Palace Guard. 

95.— She Wei Pan Ling f# ® |t M-— Captain of the 
Guards. 

96.— She Wei Shih-chang f^ flS ff* ;g.— Lieutenant of the 
Guards. 

97. — She Wei f^ %. — Officer of the Guards, distinguished as 
of the first, second, third or fourth rank, being respectively of the 
superior grades of the 3rd, 4th, and 5th, and inferior grade of the 
5th rank. Of the 1st rank there are 60, of the second 150, of the 
third 270. 

98. — Lan-ling She-wei ^ ^ ^ %- — Subaltern of the 
Guards, wearing the blue feather; 6 a. Ninety in all. 

99. — Tsung-shih Shih-wei ^ ^ ^ $£. — Tmng-ahih Guards 
(consisting of Imperial clansmen). 

100.— Ts'iN KuN HiAO % gt ;gc-— Sergeant of the Palace 
Guards ; 6 a- Seventy-seven in all. 

101.— Shu Ts'in Kun Hiao ^ ^ S^.— Deputy Sergeant 
of the Palace Guards ; 8 b. Seventy in all. 

102.— Wei Shu Ts'in Kun Hiao ^ ^ WL % :R.— Vice 
Deputy Sergeant of the Palace Guards. Seven in all. 

1 03.— Yu Ts^iEN Ta Ch'en ^^ It :Jc B— Minister of Presence, 
or Grand Chamberlain; selected from among the Princes and 
Ministers of the Court. 

104.— Yu Ts'ien She Wei ^ It fj^ |g.— Guards of the 
Antechamber. 

1 05.— YiJ Ts^ieN Hing Tsow ^ ItfJ jg.- Mongolian Princes 
having the right of entree. 

106.— How Ht Ta Ch^en ^ Jg ^ E-— Chamberlains of the 
rear-guard (two). 



10 PART I. — ^THB IMPBBIAL COURT. 

107.— Ts^iEN Yin Ta Ch^en "Uf 5|^ E-— Chamberlains of 
the vanguard (ten). 

108.— Pao-Wbi-Pan She Wei |5 Jl |t ^ ^g.— Guard 
famishing the Imperial Escort. 

109.— T^ow She Ch<u Hl^ ift.— Privy Cabinet Office. 
This department, supervised by the Ministers of the Presence, takes 
charge of the communications between the Sovereign and the 
Grand Council, when the Council is not in personal attendance upon 
His Majesty. It is divided into two branches, the one for 
documents in Manchu and Chinese, the other for Mongolian. 

110.— LwAN I Wei H f| |ij5.— The Imperial Equipage 
Department* With numerous subdivisions. 

111. — LwAN I She || m ^. — Commissioner of the 
Equipage Department ; 2 a. 

112.— KwAN KuN She SE H ft-— Marshal of the Equipage 
Department; 3 a. 

113. — YuN Hwei She ^ gjl ft. — Assistant Marshal do.; 4a. 

114. — Che I Cheng jj§§|J£. — Controller do. do.; 5a. 

115. — Cheng I Yi^ SE fli ®- — Assistant do. do.; 6a. 

Imperial Mausolea. 

116.— Tung Si Ling yn "S K- — The following are the names 
of the Imperial Mausolea, situated at the " Eastern " and " Western" 
Hills, hence known as the Tung Si Ling: 

117. — Chad Si Ling BS W I^ (East).— Mausoleum of the 
Consort of the Manchu sovereign T^ai Tsung (A.D. 1627-1643). 

118. — HiAO Ling ^ gH (East). — Mausoleum of Emperor 
Shun Che (1644-1661). 

119. — HiAO Tung Ling ^ % 1^ (East). — Mausoleum of 
Empress of Shun Che. 

120. — King Ling Jj^ B| (East). — Mausoleum of Emperor 
K^ang Hi (1662-1722). 

121. — T'Ai Ling ^ gj (West).— Mausoleum of Emperor 
Yung Cheng (1723-1735). 



PART I. — THE IMPERIAL COURT. 11 

122.— T'ai Tung Ling H Ht IS (East).— Mausoleum of 
Empress of Yung ChSng. 

1 23.— YtJ Ling ^ ^ (West).— Mausoleum of Emperor K'len 
Lung (1736-1795). 

1 24. — Chiang Ling g ^ (West). — Mausoleum of Emperor 
Kia K^ing (1796-1820). 

125.— Chiang Si Ling g ® K (West). — Mausoleum of 
Empress of Kia K*ing. 

1 26. — Mu Ling H |g|{ (West). — Mausoleum of Emperor Tao 
Kwang (1821-1850). 

127.— Mu Tung Ling JE )K SI (West).— Mausoleum of 
* Empress of Tao Kwang. 

128.— Ting Ling 5g ^ (East).— Mausoleum of Emperor 
r en Fgng (1851-1861). 

1 29.— T^Ai TszE Ling Jc "? 18 (East).— Mausoleum of Heir 
Apparent Twan Hwei, eldest son of Emperor K*ien Lung. 

130. — Hwei Ling ^ ^ (East).— Mausoleum of Emperor 
T^ung Che (1862-1874). 

131.— FuT^o YtjH Jg^PEllgf (East).— Mausoleum in course 
of preparation for senior Empress Regent (Empress Dowager of 
Hien Feng). 

1 32.— P^u SiANG YiJH ^Mt& (East).— Mausoleum in course 
of preparation for junior Empress Regent (Empress Mother of 
T^ung Che). 

Noife. — The two mausolea which are in course of preparation 
for the two Empresses Regent, at a cost of six millions of taels, are 
known, euphemistically, by the designation Wan Nkn Ki Ti 
H ^ "o )fe — ^h® Happy Land for a Myriad Years. 



12 PART II. — ^MBTROPOUTAN ADMINISTRATION. 



PART II.-METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 

The central government of China, so far as a system of this 
nature is recognized in the existing institutions, is arranged with 
the object rather of registering and checking the action of the 
various provincial administrations, than with that of assuming a 
> direct initiative in the conduct of affairs. The empire proper is 
divided into eighteen provincial governments, to which are to 
be added the three eastern provinces, constituting the territory 
of Manchuria, and organized on a more or less military basis. 
Beyond the limits of China proper are the subject territories of 
Mongolia and Tibet, and the tribute-paying nations of Corea, 
Anam, Burmah, and Nepal. Among these, Siam was formerly also 
included. On various parts of the frontier and scattered over all 
the southern and western provinces are, furthermore, numerous 
tribes of aborigines, either partly or wholly uncivilized, for whose 
government special regulations are in force. Regulations, indeed, 
of the most minute and comprehensive character, are on record 
for the guidance of every conceivable act of administration ; and 
the principal function, of the central government consists in watch- 
ing over the execution of this system of rules. The bestowal of 
the higher appointments of the civil and military services, and 
the distribution of the superior literary degrees as reVards for 
proficiency in the studies upon which the entire polity of the 
Empire is based, comprise the remainder of the attributes reserved 
to the government established at Peking. The Central Govern- 
ment may be said to criticize rather than to control the action of 
the twenty-one provincial administrations, wielding, however, at 
all times, the power of immediate removal from his post of any 
official whose conduct may be found irregular or considered 
dangerous to the stability of the State. The following are the 
departments of the Central administration : 

133.— The KuN Ki Ch^u g| :fi8 ft.— Council of State, or 



PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION^. 13 

Grand Council (literally, Place of Plans for the Army). This 
department is the actual privy council of the sovereign, in whose 
presence its members daily transact the business of the State, at a 
meeting: held between the hours of 4 and 6 a.m. It is a Cabinet 
composed of Ministers holding other substantive offices, and who 
are known as Kiln Ki Ta Ch'in % ^ ^ S* Their number is 
undetermined ; but for many years past it has not exceeded five. 
A body of sixty secretaries, Chang King ^t j^, also called 
Siouo Kan Ki h\\ |^ IS? attends to the clerical work of the Council. 
The institution derives its origin from the practice instituted by the 
earlier emperors of the present dynasty of treating public affairs 
on the footing of a military council, whence the title adopted, in 
about the year 1730, for the council as it at present exists. The 
title c/iang-king (see above) corresponds to the Manchu word 
chan-yin^ or chan-h/in, signifying an "assistant," in either civil 
or military employ. 

134. — The Nui Koh ^ ^. — Grand Secretariat or Imperial 
Chancery (literally. Inner Cabinet or Hall). This department, 
which, under the preceding dynasty, was the Supreme Council of 
the Empire, has within the last century and a half, become super- 
seded in active importance by the Grrand Council. It now forms 
the Imperial Chancery or Court of Archives, and admission to one 
of the six posts which constitute its superior ranks confers the 
highest distinction attainable by Chinese officials, although with 
fdncftions that a.re almost purely nominal. The most distinguished 
Governors-General are usually advanced to the dignity of Grand 
Secretary while continuing to occupy their posts away from the 
capital. The constitution of the office is as follows : 

135. — Ta Hioh She :fc Jp j;. — Grand Secretary; la. Coll. 
des. Chung Pang 4» ^ ; Epist. style, Tsai Siang ^ ;fB, and Siang 
Kwoh ^ H. Of the four Grand Secretaries, two are Manchus 
and two Chinese. Each of the four is designated as Ta Hioh She 
of one or other of the "throne-halls" or pavilions of the Imperial 
palace. The names of these are as follows: Win Hwa Tien 
%m n-> W» Ying r«n JC 3^ 18; Ti Jin Koh « fc ®; 
Tung Koh % H^. 



14 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMTi^ISTRATION. 

Under the Ming dynasty, the Grand Secretaries were familiarly 
designated Koh Lao ^^^ or Elders of the Nui Kohj whence the 
title rendered by the Jesuit missionaries as Colao. 

136.— HiEH-PAN Ta Hioh She -g; |jf i^ J|t i.— Assistant 
Grand Secretary; lb. Coll. des. Chung T'ang (as above); Epist. 
style, Hieh K'weiy jj JK- Of this office there are two incumbents, 
one Manchu and one Chinese. — Honorary Titles: 

137.— i. T'ai She is: ffl.— Grand Preceptor; 1 a. 

1 38.— ii. T^Ai Fu ± fl|f.— Grand Tutor ; 1 a. 

1 39.— iii. T'AI Pag :Jfc fi^.— Grand Guardian ; 1 a. 

140. — iv Shag She aJ^ g(. — Junior Preceptor; 1 1*. 

141. — V. Shag Fu >J> %. — Junior Tutor; 1 b. 

142. — vi. Shag PAG.#J?flJ.— Junior Guardian; 1 l\ 

The above six honorary titles correspond to tbo titl(3^ oli'. 
six highest Ministers of State of antiquity, desi^iiated t}>' 
San Kung 3 & ^^^ '^^^ -^** H S51- These titles arc now seldom 
conferred, with the exception of No. vi. The last is especially 
bestowed as the (nominal) ^'Guardianship of the Heir Apparent" 
l^ai Tsze Shao Poo jfc •? 4^ fis* ^^ entitles the bearer to be 
addressed as Kung Pao § flj. 

143.— Nui Kgh High She ft gg J|t J:-— Sub-Chancellor of 
the Grand Secretariat; 2b. Ten in all, acting as registrars of the 
seals of State and of certain departments of the archives; Lit. des., 
Koli Hio ^ %. 

144.— Nui Kgh She-tuh High She ft ^ f# K il ±.— 
Readers of the Grand Secretariat; 4b. Six in all. They compare 
the texts of State papers in the Manchu and Chinese language. 

145.— Nui Kgh She-tuh ft ^ ^ IS* — Assistant-Readers of 
the Grand Secretariat; 6 a. Nine in all. 

146.— Nui Kgh Tien Tsi ft ^ JR jg.— Archivists of the 
Grand Secretariat ; 7a. Six in all. 

1 47.— Nui Kgh Chung Shu ft ^ 4* S-— Secretary of the 
Grand Secretariat; 7 b; Lit. des. Chung Han ^ t|. 



PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 15 

148 Chung Shu K^o ^ ff 5^.— The Imperial Patent Office; 

a sub-department of the J!f^u% Koh. 

1 49.— Chung Shu K^o Chung Shu tp^^t\t ff.— Secretary 
of the Imperial Patent Office ; 7 b. 

150.— Fang Lio Kwan jjf ^ f|.— The Military Archive 
Office. This department has the special duty of drawing up the 
records of military undertakings and achievements. It is under 
the supervision and control of the Grand Council (No. 133), of 
whom one or more of the members may hold the position of 
President — Tmng Ts'ai ^ ^. The other superior officers are two 
Manchu and two Chinese Proctors — TH THao ^ fSJ, and an equal 
number of Archivists — Show Chang l(j[ j|t. There are in addition 
three Manchu and six Chinese Compilers — Tsuan Siu ^ j^. 

151.— Nui Fan Shu Fang j^ ^ tf g.— Manchu-Chinese 
Translation Office. 

Conducts the translation of State papers from Chinese into 
Manchu, Subject, like the Fang Lio Kwan (see above), to the 
Grand Council. 

1 52.— TsuNG-Li KoH KwoH She Wu TamIjn HiM^M^ 
Igjf ^ P^. — The Yamen of Foreign Affairs. 

This department, like the Kiln Ki Ch'u or Grand Council, is 
considered not so much a separate organization, with ranks and 
promotion specially appertaining to itself, as a species of Cabinet 
formed by the admission of members of other departments of 
State. It owes its institution to proposals laid before the Throne 
by a special Council convened after the conclusion of peace in 
1860, to decide upon the manner in which foreign affairs should 
thenceforward be conducted. In reply to the memorial presented 
by this Council, headed by the Prince of Hwei, a Decree was 
issued on the 19th January 1861, commanding the formation of 
a new department under the title given above. In the same 
decree, the Prince of Kung (brother of the Emperor Hien Feng, 
at that time on the throne), Kwei Liang, a senior Grand Secre- 
tary, and Wen Siang, a Vice-President of the Board of War, 

CLli^ ^^ ^^ f^f^J^) Sue "? ^ICd. Q^JC: 



/ 



16 PART II.— METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 

were named as the constituent members of the Tamen. In the 
following year four additional Ministers were added to the list, 
and by the year 1869, successive additions had brought the 
number up to ten, at which it remained for a number of years, the 
various members consisting of Presidents and Vice-Presidents of 
the different Boards {see infrdj No. 153), including a majority 
of the members of the Grand Council. The death of Wen Siang, 
in May, 1876, left the Prince of Kung as the sole original member 
still connected with the Yamen; and in December, 1876, the 
YamSn became more closely than ever identified with the Grand 
Council, by the admission into its ranks of the two members of 
that body who had not previously been introduced to it Their 
admission raised the number of Ministers of the Yamen to eleven. 
They are spoken of collectively as Wang Ta Ch^in ^ ^ g — 
the Prince and Ministers. The departmental work of the Yamen 
is conducted by secretaries, Clmng King ^ Jff , who were in the 

first instance drafted from the staff of the Grand Council. Their 
ordinary official designation is sze yUan ^ ^ or sze kwan ^ ^. 
The six chief Secretaries, all of whom hold either substantive or 
expectant rank, are usually designated tsung pan ^ K|. In 
accordance with the scheme proposed in 1861, the office of Minis- 
ter Superintendent of Trade, T^ung Shang Ta Ch^en ji£ "^ ^ S^ 
is held at Nanking and Tientsin respectively by the Governor 
General of the Two Kiang provinces and the Governor General of 
Chihli. As Superintendents of Trade for the Northern ports 
(Tientsin, Newchwang, and Chefoo) and the Southern ports 
(including the remainder of those open to trade) respectively, these 
functionaries are commonly referred to as the Nan and Peh Yang 
Ta Ch'in ^ 4t # * E- 

The Six Boards. 

153.— i. Li Pu Jg ^.— Board of Civil Office. Lit. des. 
Ta'nan Ts'ao ^ 1g. 

154.-rii. Hu Pu JS ^. — Board of Eevenue. Lit. des. 
Nung Pu Jl gp and Min Pu Jg -gp. 

155. — iii. Li Pu Jjj^ UJ* — Board of Ceremonies. Lit. des. 
Ts'ze Pu PI ft. 



PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATIOIT. 17 

156.— iv. Ping Pu ^ 1^.— Board of War. Lit. des. 

157.— V. HiNG Pu }lj ^— Board of Punishments. Lit. 
des. PiPu^^ and Si Ts'ao W W- 

1 58.— vi. KuNG Pu X IJ5.— Board of Works. Lit. des. 
Shuei Pu'Hii ^, 

159.— YoH Pu ^ {p.— The Board of State Music, a 
dependency of the Board of Ceremonies. See in/rdy No. 173, etc. 

^^*^^ The official constitution of each of the Six Boards 
{Liu Pu ^ fl5) is, with few exceptions, the same throughout. 
They control, each in its allotted department, the execution of that 
system of minute regulation for the conduct of all public affairs 
which has been mentioned above as the principal attribute of the 
Central Government The Presidents and Vice-Presidents of the 
Boards, in fact, with the heads of the Censorate and the Hanlin 
College, may be said to constitute the central administration. The 
following is the staif common to all the Boards : 

160. — Shang Shu fj ^.—President of a Board; 1 b. 
Official des. Pu Pang ^ ^. Each Board has two presidents, 
respectively Manchu and Chinese. 

161. — She Lang f^ ^. — Vice-President of a Board; 2 a. 
Official des. Pu YOan $5 f^. Each Board has two Manchu and 
two Chinese Vice-Presidents, distinguished respectively, in each 
class, as Senior, Tso She Lang £ ^ SS? and Junior Vice-President, 
Yeo She Lang 7^ ^ ^. 

1 62,— Pu YtJAN Ta Ch'Sn U5 K :fc g.— Heads of Depart- 
ments. This generic designation embraces the Presidents of the 
Six Boards and of the Superior Courts. Presidents and Vice- 
Presidents are further described as T}ang Kwan ^ ^ or heads of 
departments. 

The following are the literary equivalents for the titles of the 
Presidents and Vice-Presidents of the Boards : 

Board of Civil Office: President, Tai Tsai ±^ ^ Vice- 
President, Shoo Tsai ijf ^. 



18 ' PART II. — ^METEOPOLITAN ADMIKISTRATION. 

Board of Eevenue : President, Ta Sze T^u ;^ 'S ^- Vice- 
President, Shao Sze Tu >J? ^ ^. 

Board of Ceremonies: President, Ta Tsung Peh •Kj ^ fjQ. 
Vice-President, Shao Tmng Peh iJ? ^ {&• 

Board of War: President, Ta Sze Ma ^ % Jg§. Vice- 
President, Shao Sze Ma )J^ % ^. 

Board of Punishments: President, Ta Sze K'ow ^ Q ^. 
Vice-President, Shao Sze K^ow fj^ % ^. 

Board of Works: President, Ta Sze K^ung >^ "3 S- Vice- 
President, Shao Sze K'ung jj? "^ ^. 

163. — Lang Chung $^ if». — Senior Secretary of a Board; 
5 a. Lit. des- Cheng Lang ^ J^. 

164. — Yuan Wai Lang Q ^ %. — Second-class Secretary 
of a Board; 5 b. Lit. des. Fa Lang glj J|^; Ki Lang ff ^. 

165. — T^ANG Chu She ^ ^ :^. — Assistant Secretary of a 
Board; 6 a. 

166. — Chu She ;J y. — Second-class Assistant Secretary 
of a Board. Lit. des. Chu Clieng ^ BSt? 6 a. 

N,B. — The four preceding ranks are very largely obtained 
by purchase or conferred as distinctions, without entailing more 
than a nominal connection with the Boards to which they relate. 
The Secretaries in active employment at a Board are generically 
described as Sze Kwan 3 '1^« 

167. — Pu Sze Sze-K'u ^ ^ "^ J$.— Treasury Supervisor 
of a Board or Court ; 7 a. 

1 68. — Sze Wu % fj.— Steward of a Board; 8 a. 

1 69.— Pu Yuan K'u She $|5 ^ j$ ^.—Treasury Keeper 
of a Board; unclassed. 

1 70. — Sze Yu % ^. — Keeper of the Prison of the Board of 
Punishments; 9 b. 

1 71 . — Sze Tsiang "^ |S. — Overseer of Works, in the Board 
of Works ; 9 b. 

172.— Chu Yin Kuh Ta She H pfl ^ :fc ft,— Superin- 



PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 19 

tendent of the seal-casting department (under the Board of 
Ceremonies) ; unclassed. 

Officers of the Board of Music : 

173. — Ho SnfeNG Shu Shu Chbng ft S I^ I^ jE- — Director 
of the Board of Music; 6 b. 

1 74.— Ho SflfiNG Shu Shu Cn^feNG ft S 1^ |^ fB-— Sub- 
director of the do. do ; 7 b. 

175. — HiEH Lu Lang fg ^ J$. — Chief Musicians ; 5 in all. 

176.— SzE YoH Lang g m ®.— Band-masters; 25 in all. 

177.— YoH SnfeNG m ^.—Musicians; 180 in all. 

178.— Wu SHfiiNG H Ife.— Posturers ; 300 in all. 

179.— SzE YiH HwEi T'UNG KwAN Ta She B Hl^ ^ H 
^ ft* — Keeper of the Residence for Tributary Envoys (under 
the Board of Ceremonies) ; 9 a. 

180.— SzE YiH HwEi T^UNG KwAN Su Pan ^ ^.— 
Ceremonial Usher of Tribute Missions ; 9 b. 

1 81 .— PiH-T^iEH-SHE |l iKf ^.—Official Writer. The title 
borne by the class of Government clerks (with official status of the 
7th, 8th, or 9th rank) attached to all the metropolitan departments. 
Lit. des. Pi/i Cheng ^ Q[. The title is a reproduction of the 
Manchu word bitkeshij or writer. Although nominally charged 
with the clerical duties of the Boards and other Government offices, 
the pih-t^ieh'she at the present day leave the bulk of the work of 
correspondence and account-keeping, etc., to be performe dby the 
permanent staff of hired clerks, shu-pan ff m (officially designated 
shu'-li ff |g), who are employed in large numbers in every 
public office in Peking as well as throughout the Empire. 

1 82. — SUB-DBPARTMBNTS OF THE BOARDS. 

Each of the Six Boards is subdivided into a variety of depart- 
ments, a certain number of which are common to all, whilst the 
ftmctions of others are naturally prescribed by the special attributes 
of the Board itself. The following are the designations of the 
departments to be found in all the Boards alike: — 



20 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 

i. Tang Fang flf '^. — Q^neral Beoord and Registry Depart- 
ment. In the Board of Revenue this is divided into two offices, 
the Northern and Southern, each with distinct classes of business 
under its control. 

ii. Ftn Fang ;jC ^. — Copyists' Department; for the pre- 
paration of reports and returns to be laid before the Throne. 

iii. SzE WuH T^iNG ^ Igjf Igg. — Superintendency of employes 
and current business. 

iv. TuH Ts^ui So ^ fg J5f. — Control Department; for ensuring 
the punctual despatch of business. 

V. Tang Yueh Ch'u § ^ jg. — Correspondence Registration 
Office. 

The following departments are common to more than one 
Board: 

vi. KuN Su KuH ^ H ^.—Office of the Military Chest. 
(Boards of Revenue and of Works). 

vii. Ts^iEN Fah T'ang §( jjfe ^. — Coinage Department. 
(As above). 

viii. Fan Yin Ch^u ^ ^ Jg. — Provincial Perquisites Office ; 
issuing the maintenance allowance to members of the Board on 
duty. (Boards of Revenue and Punishment). 

The amount thus shared, under the name of ^^maintenance, 
or food, money," is derived from percentages on the revenue 
collection remitted under this head from the provincial exchequers. 

«*« The departmental work of each Board is, in addition, 
distributed among a variety of office divisions, the most important 
of which bear the generic designation of TsHng-li Sze {JH £ "3, to 
which epithets indicating either the names of the provinces 
appertaining to the several divisions, or the character of their 
special business, are prefixed. The most noteworthy of the special 
departments appertaining to each of the principal Boards are the 
following :— 

ix. HiEN ShSn Ch^u 3g 9 gf.—- (Board of, Revenue). 



PART n. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 21 

A special Court for the adjudication of suits among Manchus 
relating to landed property. 

X. San K'u Tang Fang H Jfltt tt *•— (Board of Revenue). 
Registry Office of the Three Treasuries. — ^These are: the Bullion 
Treasury, the Treasury of Silks and Satins, and the Treasury of 
Dye-stuffs and Stationery. 

xi. Wu SuAN Ts*iNG-Li SzE IC 3 jH j^ fj.— (Board of 
War). Office of appointments and promotions. 

xii. Chih Fang Ts^ing-li Sze JR JST iH £ '9.— (Board of 
War). General Conduct Office. Supervises the bestowal of 
rewards and adjudication of penal ties j the periodical scrutiny of 
qualifications, inspection of troops, etc. etc. 

xiii. Ch'I; Kia Ts^ing-li Sze :^ S It ft Q.— (Board of 
War). The Cavalry Remount and Postal Department. This office 
superintends all matters relating to the military stud. Beneath it 
are the following three sub-departments : — 

xiv. HwEi T^UNG Kwan #|^|t. — Imperial Despatch Office; 
superintending the transmission of the correspondence from the 
Provinces. 

XV. TsiEH Pag Ch^u ^ ^ g^. — Council Messenger's Office. 

xvi. T^i T^ANG H ||.— The Courier Posts. 

The arrangements for the transmission of Government des- 
patches along the lines of postroads throughout the Empire are 
superintended by military officials stationed at either end of each 
line of communication, and entitled either Chu King T^i-t^ang 
IK ^ ^ Hi' Superintendents of Posts residing at Peking, of 
whom there are sixteen, or Chu Sheng 'Pi Pang 1^ i§ H ^y 
Provincial Superintendents, as the case may be. Under the 
direction of the former are the Pao Fang ^ ]^ or offices at which 
the Peking Gazette is printed. 

xvii. Wu K^u Ts^iNG Li Sze Jg jj Jflf JJ fj.— (Board of 
War). Office of registration for the army and military stores, and 
for the direction of the military examinations. 

xviii. WfeN SuAN Ts^iNG Li Sze $ S i» A S-— 



22 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATIOIT. 

(Board of Civil Office). Appointment and Transfer department. 

XIX. K'AO KuNG Ts'iNG Li SzB ^ J^ f|||t f|.— (Board of 
Civil Office). Department of Scrutiny; having the control over the 
rewards or penalties to be awarded throughout the civil service. 

XX. Yen FSng Ts^ing Li Szb Jjf ^ fH ft g.— (Board of 
Civil Office). Department of issue of patents of nobility and 
rank, etc 

183.— Li Fan Yuan 3 flf J^.—The Mongolian Superin- 
tendency. This department, which has sometimes been called 
the Colonial Office^ is specially charged with the control of the 
tribes of Mongolia, including the multifarious and complicated 
relations with their princes and various ranks of nobles, with the 
affidrs of Tibet, and with the supervision of the Lamaist hierarchy 
in all its ramifications. Until within the present generation, it 
also conducted the relations of the Chinese Government with that 
of Bussia. Its organization is similar to that of the Six Boards 
(see above), with the exception that it has but one President and 
two Vice-Presidents. For the affairs administered by the Board, 
see Parts XI and XII. 

184.— The Tu Ch*a Yuan |gs |g R.— The Censorate, or 
Court of Censors. Lit. des. Ya She T^ai Ift jfe ^. 

185.— Tso Tu Yu She ^g HJ :^ i.— President of the 
Censorate; lb. One Manchu and one Chinese. Lit. des. 

Tsung Him iH JjR- 

186.— Ybo Tu Yti She :& S5 ^ ft.— Associate-President of 
the Censorate; a title borne by Governors General of the provinces. 

187.— Tso and Yeo Fu Tu Yu She 2E :& gJ|B ^ ft.— 
Vice-Presidents (Senior and Junior) of the Censorate; 3 a. Lit. 
des. Fu Hien g|J JjJ. Two of the first and four of the second rank, 
in each case half Manchu and half Chinese. The title of the junior 
rank is borne by Governors of the Provinces. 

188. — Ki She Chung fj^ Tf. ^. — Supervising Censors; 
5 a. These constitute the Imperial Supervisorate or Of&ce of 



PART II, — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 23 

Scrutiny over the Six Boards, hence called Liu K^o 3?; f|. In 
each department there are two Chang Yin Ki She Chung jIC PP |fr 
^ rfi or Keepers of the Seal, and two ordinary Supervisors. 
Lit des. Ta Ki Kim :^ |& t||. 

189.— YtJ She ^ 4.— Censors; 5 b. Lit des. She Ya ^ :^. 
Coll. des. Tu Lao-yeh |0 ^ j^. There are 56 in all, distributed 
over 15 Tao ^ or Circuits embracing the Eighteen Provinces, 
beside the King Ki Tao ^ ft S, Metropolitan circuit. .To each 
division there are allotted two Chang Yin Yu She '}$. ^ Hi £, or 
Keepers of Seal, and two or more Censors, whose duty it is to 
inform the Sovereign upon all subjects connected with the welfare 
of the people and the conduct of government. 

In addition to the above, a certain number of the Censors are 
employed as Superintendents of Police for the Five Divisions of 
the city and suburbs of Peking, called the Wu Ch^ing jj M? ^^ 
"Five Cities." These are the Centre, or the environs of the 
Imperial Palace, and the North, South, East, and West divisions. 
Others of the Censors are appointed in turn to act as Supervisors 
of the Granaries, or Ch^a Ts'ang Yu She £ ^ ^ £• 

1 90.— The T'uNG CnfeNG Sze jiljfca.— Office of Transmission. 
Lit. des. Yin T^ai ft ^. Tliis department had the duty, under 
the Ming dynasty, of opening, recording, and transmitting to the 
Council of State all memorials received from the provinces. At 
present, it takes cognizance only of the tH pin @ TfC, or memorials 
on routine business which are thus received. AH memorials on 
special business go to the Council unopened. 

191. — T^UNO ChIing She Sze jH igfi; ^ %* — Commissioner 
of the Office of Transmission ; one Manchu and one Chinese. 

192.— T^uNG CHfeNG Sze Fu She JHfc Q gll 1i-— Deputy 
Commissioner of the Office of Transmission; one Manchu and oq^ 
Chinese. 

193.- T^UNG CnfiNG SzB Ts<an I ji ft €1 ^ H-— Secretaiy 
of the Office of Transmission; one Manchu and one Chinese* 



24 PABT II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 

194.— T^UNG Cheng Szb King Lih ^ Q|[ ^ jg |f.— 
Commifisary of Records of the Office of Transmission. 

1 95,— The Ta Li Szr :fc g ^.— Grand Court of Revision. 
This department exercises a general supervision over the administra- 
tion of the criminal law. 

1 96.— Ta Li Sze K^ing ^ 9 ^-jjip.— Director of the Grand 
Court of Revision; 3 a. Lit. des. Ting Tsih |g BQ. 

1 97.— Ta Li Tze Shag K^ing :fc 9 # {{? Up.— Sub-Director 
of do. do. ; 4 a. Lit. des. Tso Ki ^ IJ. 

1 98. — Tso Sze and Yeo Sze ChISng 2£ ^ ^ 5^* — Secretaries 
of do. do.; 6 a. Lit. des. I Sze ^ %, 

199. — ^Tso and Yeo P^ing She 2£ /& ^ ^.—Assistant 
Secretaries of do. do.; 7 a. 

200. — Note. — The three foregoing departments, colloquially 
classed in the phrase Jw, T^tinjr, Ta, |B( j|| ;)t;9 constitute with the 
Six Boards the Ta Kiu KHng "^ZJL^iOv Nine Chief Ministries 
of State. When the Kiu K^ing are named in decrees without 
mention of the Six Boards, the above combination is implied. 
When the "Six Boards and Nine Ministries" are specified, the 
Siao Km K'ing ij^ ^ jgl, are understood to be referred to. These 
comprise the Censorate, the Tung ChSng SzCy the Five Courts or 
Sze 3£ ^9 the Han Lin Yuan^ and the Kwoh Tsze Kien, 

201.— The Han-Lin Yuan ^ ;^ K-— The College of 
Literature {Han-lin College). 

202.— Chang YOan High She S|E ^ #1 i.— Chancellor of 
the Han-lin ; 2 b. One Manchu and one Chinese. (The post may- 
be filled by a Grand Secretary, or by a President or Vice-President 
of a Board). 

203.— She Tuh High She f^ || j|( j;.— Reader of the 
Han Jin ; 4 b. Two are Manchu and three Chinese. 

204. — She Kiang Hioh She ^ ^ ^^ j;.— Expositor of the 

Han-lin ; 4 b. (As above). 

205.— She Tuh ^ H-— Sub-reader of the Han-lin; 5 b. 

(As above). 



PART II. — METROPOLITAK ADMINISTBATION. 25 

206.— She Kianq j^ If.— Sub-Expositor of the Han-linj 
5 b. (As above). 

Note. — ^The above classes constitute what may be called the 

superior hierarchy of the Han-lin College. The following are the 

titles bestowed upon the successful candidates at the triennial 

examinations of tsin^sze graduates held in the Palace, and hence 
called Tien Slie or Palace Examinations (See Part IX). 

207.— Siu Chwan f^ ^. — Han-lin Compiler; 6 b. 

208.— PiBN Siu |g j|f. — Han-lin Compiler (second class); 

7 a. Lit. des. "Pai She ^ ^. 

209.— KiEN T'AO It If .—Han-lin Graduate of the third 
degree; 7 b. 

210. — Shuh-Ki She ^ "§ j:. — Han-lin Bachelor, or 
graduate of the lowest degree. (See Part IX, No. 473). The 
graduates of this class are still held bound to pursue a farther 
course of study, which is conducted at the Shu Chiang Kwan ^ 
% H^, a college devoted to this purpose, and are enabled by a 
subsequent examination, held by a special Commission within the 
Imperial palace, to attain the degrees of Pien Siu and Kien T'ao^ 
as above. They are then said to be Liu Kwan fj f|[, t.€., retained 
in the Han-lin College. Those who fail to reach the higher degrees 
are described as San Kwan ^ f|f, or *' released from study," and 
receive appointments as District Magistrates or Secretaries of 
Boards. 

211.— Wu King Poh She £ g jf :t.— Doctor of the 
Han-lin degree; 8 a. A special distinction conferred upon des- 
cendants of the sages of antiquity, after passing the examinations 
at Peking. 

212.— Tien Pu :^ ||.— Archivist of the Han-lin College; 

8 b. Four in all. 

213. — ^Tai Chad ^ ^. — Probationer of the Han-lin College; 

9 b. (As above.) 

214.— K^DNG MuH JL @.— Clerk of the Han-lin College 
(lowest grade) ; 9 b. 

215.— The KwoH She Kwan B ^ If.— State Historio- 
grapher's Office. 



26 PART IL — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 

This is a department of the Han-lin College, engaged in the 
custody and preparation of the historical archives of the dynasty. 
Its duties comprise the compilation of official biographies of all 
eminent public servants. The following are the titles of its 
functionaries:— 

21 6. — TsuNO Ts'Ai iHl ^.—Director General. (This appoint- 
ment is usually held by one of the chief Ministers of State). 

217.— T^i TiAO H m.— Proctor; two Manchu and two 
Chinese. 

218. — ^TsuNG TswAN ill 0|. — Historiographer; four Manchu 
and six Chinese. 

219.— TswAN Siu H gf.— Compiler; 34 in all. 

220.— The Chan She Fu )^ 1^ jjj. — Imperial Supervisorate 
of Instruction. This department is specially charged with the 
direction of the studies of the Heir Apparent, but it has ceased for 
upwards of a century to exercise, even nominally, any active 
functions. The appointments connected with it are conferred as 
sinecure rewards for literary service. 

221. — Chan Shb d^^. — Chief Supervisor of Instruction; 
3 a. Lit. des. Kung Clian ^ j^. 

222.— Shao Chan She fj^ @.— Assistant Supervisor of 
Instruction; 4 a. Lit. des. Shao Yin ^ ^. 

223.— Tso and Yeo Ch<un Fang Shuh Tszb &:Q ^i^M 
^. — Deputy Supervisor of Instruction (senior and junior rank) ; 
5 a. Lit. des. Kung Shu ^ |S|. 

224.— SzB King Kxjh Sibn Ma ^ fl[ ]g jJb Jg.— Groom of 
the Library; 5 b. 

225.— Tso and Yeo Ch^un Fang Chung YtJN &:& M^ 
tp ^. — Secretary of the Supervisorate of Instruction ; 6 a. Lit, 
des. Kung Yun ^ ^. 

226.— Tso and Yeo Ch^un Fang Tsan Shan H ||.— 
Assistant do. do. do.; 6 b. Lit. des. Kung Tsan ^ f(. 

227.— Chu Pu i H,— Archivist; 7 b. 



PART II. — ^METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 27 

The Four Mxnor Courts: 
These are as follows: 

228.— T^Ai Chiang Szb -j^ fH ^.— Court of Sacrificial 
Worship. 

229.— T^Ai P^u Szb ±^ HI ^.-Do. of the Imperial Stud. 

230.— K WANG LuH Szb % ^ ^.— Do. of Imperial Enter- 
tainments (or Banqueting Court). 

231.— Hung Lu Szb ^ H ^.— Do. of State Ceremonial. 

The officials of the above-named departments, which, with the 
Court of Bevision (see No. 195) constitute the Wu See 3£ ^, are 
as follows, the titles in each case being nearly identical, but 
distinguished by the name of the department to which they 
respectively belong: — 

232. — K^ING IgL — Director; 3 a (except in the Hung Lu SzBj 
which is 4 a). The lit designations of the various Courts are as 
follows: T>ai Chiang Sze^—Tsung Peh ^ffi; T^ai P^u Sze^— 
Ta Sze P^u ^ fi| fl; Kwang Luh Sze^—Ta Sze Shan ^ ^ Ji; 
Hung Luh Sze^ — Ta Hing JSn :fi fx A* Except in the case of 
the first of the four, the Sub- Directors (see below) have the same 
designations, with the character Shoo (lesser) substituted for Ta. 

N.B. — The Directors and Sub-Directors of the Courts are 
generically described as King T^ang jS( £• 

233. — Shao K*ing ^p 0. — Sub-Director; 4 a and 5 a 
(except the Hutig Luh Sze^ which is 5 b). Lit. des. of Sub-Director 
of the T'ai Ch'ang Sze,—F^g Ch'ang $ ^. 

234. — Szb Ch^Iing ^ ^.—Secretary of a Court; 6 a. 

235.— SiJ Pan ^ igt.— Usher of the Court of State Cere- 
monial. 

236.— Ming Tsan ql ||.— Herald of the do. do. ; 7 a. 

237* — Shu ChIsng |f ]£. — Superintendent of various depart- 
ments of the Banqueting Court, such as the Fleshers', the 
Cellarage, the Game, the Spices, etc., etc. 

Special officers of the Tai Chang Sze : 



28 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 

238.— SnfiN YoH Shu SHU-CefiNO i^i ISII^ ft ]£.— Director 
of the Sacred Music Department; 6 a. 

239.— Sh^n Yoh Shu Snu-CH^fiNG iMi i||^ ft ^.—Sub- 
Director of the do. do.; 8 b. 

240. — POH SzB ^ i.— Doctor; 7 a. 

241.— TiBN Tsi H j|.— Recorder; 7 a. 

242.— TuH Cnufi Kwan ^ H 'g.— Reciter of Prayers; 7 a. 

243.— Ts^zK Tsi Shu FSng Sze j^ ^ J§ $ fE.— Offerer of 
Sacrifice; 7 b. 

244. — TsAN Li Lang K H Sg. — Ceremonial Usher; 7a and 
9 a. Commonly designated by the Manchu title of Hii~la Hd^/an. 

245.— Hieh Lfir Lang {ft ^ Kg.- Chief Musician; 8 a. 

246. — SzB Yoh ^ m. — Band-master; 9 b. Each court has 
also its Archivist, Sub-Archivist, etc. 

247. — ^The Kwoh Tsze Kibn g -^ J|. — Imperial Academy 
of Learning. Lit. des. T^ai Hioh ^ ^. 

This, like the Han-lin College, is rather an assemblage 
of titled literary dignitaries than a body of officials with active 
fimctions. The ^^ Imperial Academy" has its nominal seat in a 
vast range of buildings adjacent to the Temple of Confucius, near 
the north-eastern angle of Peking, but, like most of the official 
institutions of the capital, it is visited only as a matter of form, 
at infrequent intervals, by the functionaries connected with it by 
their titles. The great quadrangle occupied by the institution is 
bounded east and west by a long arcade within which the monu- 
mental slabs erected to perpetuate the authorized text of the 
whole of the Confacian Books are arranged in rows. In the 
centre stands one of the most striking specimens of Chinese 
architecture, consisting in a lofty pavilion-shaped building, erected 
upon a platform of white marble placed in the midst of a circular 
piece of water, itself walled in with marble, and across which 
access is given to the building, by four marble bridges at the 
cardinal points. In this building, which represents the Pi Yung 
W S or Imperial College of antiquity, each sovereign is held 



PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 29 

bound to enthrone himself once in the course of his reign, to 
preside over a solemn assemblage of all the scholars of the capital, 
in whose hearing a classical essay, nominally composed by his 
Majesty, and hence designated Yu Lun ^ H^, is recited. The 
department of study is divided into six classes, Liu T^ang /; jj^, 
the students connected with which receive a stipend from Govern- 
ment and are periodically examined. The schools for the instruc- 
tion of Russians and Liu-Ch4uans in the Chinese language, forming 
part of this institution, have ceased to exist. The Liu-Ch4uan 
class was known as the Nan Hioh ^ ^. The students of the 
Imperial Academy are designated Kien ShSng H ^, a title which is 
purchaseable throughout the Empire as the lowest literary degree. 
The officials of the department are as follows : 

248.— KWAN-LI KwoH TszB KiBN Ta Ch^bn ^ 81 H •? K 
^ g. — Chancellor of the Imperial Academy (a post usually con- 
ferred on one of the senior Grand Secretaries). 

249. — ^Tsi Tsiu g fg. — Libationer; 4 b. One Manchu and 
one Chinese. Lit. des. Ta Sze Ch'hig ^ "Q jjR. 

250. — SzB Ybh % H.— Tutor; 6 a. One Manchu, one 
Mongol, and one Chinese. Lit. des. Shao Sze Ch^ing^ ^ jjj. 
251. — Ejbn Ch^^ng g ^. — Proctor; 7 a. 
252.— PoH SzB If i.— Doctor; 7 b. 
253.— TiBN Pu Jf^ a|.— Archivist; 8 b. 
254.— Tien Tsi jH g.— Sub-Archivist; 9 b. 
255. — Tsu KiAO Jfy Jfe. — Preceptor; 7 b. 
256. — SzB Shb Hioh-Luh Q Jg ifl ^. — Registrar; 8 a. 
257. — HiOH LuH ^ ^. — Sub-Registrar; 8 a. 
258.— Hioh Ch^ng ^ ]£.— Director of Studies; 8 a. 

259.— NaiT Shu Fang fg § g.— The Imperial College of 
Inscriptions. 

This is a committee formed by special appointment, at the 
sovereign's pleasure, of an indeterminate number of high literary 
officials, who are said to "do duty"— Aiwjp tsow f} j^ — in con- 
nection with the College. Their functions consist in preparing 



30 1»ART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION, 

transcripts of inscriptions in the imperial hand, for presentation 
to favoured personages, or for bestowal upon temples erected in 
honour of different deities whose supernatural interposition is thus 
from time to time acknowledged. They are also liable to be called 
upon to discharge the duties of a poet laureate, in preparing odes 
or similar compositions which it is intended to confer upon 
distinguished public servants. 

260.— The K^in T^ien Kien fk 55 JR.— Imperial Board of 
Astronomy; with the following staff of officials: — 

261.— KwAN Li Kien She Ta Ch^Iin if a £ V :;I^ g.— 
Chancellor; a special appointment. 

262.— Ejen Ch^no £ £•— Director; 5 a. One Manchu 
and one Chinese. 

263.— Kien Fu £ H|.— Sub-Director; 6 a. (As above.) 

264.— Tso and Teo Kien Fu ^ ^ £ g).— Assistant Sub- 
Directors; 6 b. 

N.B. — The Ta TB^ing Htoei. Tien contains the proviso that the 
two above-named posts shall be filled by Europeans (referring to 
the missionary astronomers of the eighteenth century). 

265. — ^Wu KwAN CnftNG 5 'g }£.- Secretary; 6 a. 

266. — HiEH Hu CnfeNG 4E fi jE- — Keeper of the Clepsydra; 
8 a. 

267. — LingT^ai Lang S IE SB* — Keeper of the Observatory; 
7 b. 

268.— The T^ai I YfiAN ± fif K-— College of Imperial 
Physicians. 

269. — ^YuAN She |^ ^. — Commissioner; 5 a. 

270.— Tso and Yeo YIjan P«an £ $ R fj.— Senior and 
Junior Proctors; 6 a. 

271. — Yu I m ff.— Imperial Physicians; 8 a. Fifteen in 
number. 



PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 31 



PART III.-PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 

272- — Shih-pa ShSng +/Vi^.— The Eighteen Provinces. 

The moderu division of the Empire into provinoes^ called 
Shingj dates from the period of the Yiian dynasty (14th century), 
when, in addition to the departments of the central government, 
which were designated Chung Shu SliSng rf« ^ i^y thirteen 
provincial Governorships were established, under the title of 
"ambulatory" departments, or Chung Shu Hmg Siting (f^SfTW* 
The Ming dynasty inherited this system from their Mongol pre- 
decessors, and continued it with slight alteration, changing, however, 
the title of the provincial governors in the first instance to Ch'ing 
SiUm Pu CMng She ^ IK ^ lEJI 'j^v who became superseded later 
by Inspectors or SUn Fu jgj m, the Provincial Grovemors of the 
present day. To these, in the 16th century, Governors-General, 
Tsung-tuh |S ^y began to be added. The fifteen provinces of the 
Ming dynasty were Shan-tung, Shan-si, Ho-nan, Shen-si, Fnh- 
kien, Cheh-kiang, Eiang-si, Hu-kwang, Sze-ch^wan, Ewang-tung, 
Kwang-si, Yiin-nan, and Kwei-chow, with the two " metropolitan " 
provinces, Chih-li (or Peh Cliih-li) and Kiang-nan (or Nan 
Ghih-li), in which the northern and southern capitals, Peh King 
and Nan King, were respectively situated. In the reign K^ang Hi, 
of the present dynasty, the province of Ngan-hwei was separated 
from Kiang-nan, which thenceforward took the name of Kiang-su ; 
and Kan-suh was similarly formed by the partition of Shen-si. 
By dividing Hu-kwang into two provinces, which received the 
designations Hu-peh and Hu-nan, moreover, the number was 
brought up to eighteen. In contradistinction to the Chung Shu 
Slthig or Central Departments of State of the Yuan dynasty, the 
provinces to which the same title was, with a certain degree of 
modification, subsequently transferred, became entitled Chih ShSng 
||[ i§, or " departments under government,'* and by this designa- 
tion they are now generically recognized. 



32 



PART III.— PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 






The provinces are divided into Fu jgp or Prefectures; Ting |g| 
or Independent Sub-Prefectures; Chih4% Cluno H ^ ^ or 
Independent Departments ; Chow ji{ or Departments subject to a 
Fu; and Him J^ or Districts subject to a i^M or Chih-li Chow. 

For the three Manchurian Provinces see Part V. 

The following table exhibits the names and grouping of the 
eighteen provinces, together with the literary or archaic designa- 
tions by which they are frequently referred to : 



ARCHAIC OR LITERARY 
DBSIGNATION. 



iK S or ^ ft 






in or jg 

Suborns 
H orfft 

f « 
4111 

m 



PRESENT NAME. 



1. ChihJi iti^ 

2. Kiang-su ftf^ 

3. Ngan-hwei ^^ 

4. Kiang-si JX|f 

5. Shan-tung (1]]^ 

6. Shan-si lIlBf 

7. Ho-nan ^W 

8. Shen-si S^W 

9. Kan-suh -^ 

10. Fuh-kien |gji 

11. Cheh-kiang SJtJt 

12. Hu-pgh JSSB4fc\ 

13. Hu-nan ^^j 

14. Sze-ch*wan h)|I 

15. Kwang-tungUlK 

16. Kwang-si j||f 

17. Yiin-nan f^ilf 

18. Kwei-chow jfcjfll 



TITLE OF GOVBRNGR- 
OENBRAL8HIP. 



} 
} 



} 
} 



1ft ^ Chih-li (Separate) 

M Jl Liang Kiang, or 
ftl^ Kiang Nan. 

None, 
do. 
do. 

15* -fl- Shen-Kan. 

f^^ Min-Chgh. 

MSi HuKwang, or 
^ jgg Liang Hu. 
Hjll Sze-ch^wan(Sep.) 

^JK Liang Kwang. 
Jl Yun-kwei. 



273. — ^TsuNG-TUH H >|p. — Governor- General; 2 a. Off. 
des. CA^ Kan Hj^ ffi; Coll. des. Che-t'ai ^ ^. Being ex officio 
invested with the title of President of the Board of War, he 
styles himself Pu T^ang $ £• Is also ex officio a Junior Pre- 
sident of the Court of Censors. The Governor-General is the 
highest in rank of the civilian functionaries of the provincial 
administration, and is at the same time invested with special 
powers of control over the military forces within his jurisdiction. 
In the cases of Chih-U, Sze-ch'wan, and Kansuh, he administers 
affairs without the intervention of a Governor; whilst in the 
remaining cases, a Governor-General is placed, as a superior 



PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 33 

colleagne, beside the Governors of two, or, in the case of the 
Liaiig Kiang, of three separate provinces. For the administration 
of his military supervisorate, each Governor-General is provided 
with a special bureau, or Military Secretariat, entitled Ying WuJi 
Ch^u S Sf Jft- ^^^ adjutant, entitled Chung KUn rf* J^, is the 
Colonel commanding the Tuh piao brigade (see Nos. 439 and 453). 
He is entitled in addition to employ a staff of civil and military 
orderly oflScers, entitled WSn S&n-pu $ ^ M, who are usually 
officers of the rank of district Magistrate (in expectancy), and 
Wu SUri'pu |iC JS tA? of the rank of lieutenant. 

274.— SuN-FU ^ J|.— Governor; 2 b. Off. des. Fu-yilanX 
91 K 5 C^^* ^®®- F^'^^^i fil 'a 5 Style in corresp. Pu Yuan ^ (^ ; 
Epist. style, Chung Ch^ing tfi ^, and Fu KUn g| %. Ex officio 
invested with the titles of Ping Pu She-lang or Vice-President of 
the Board of War, and Yeo Fu Tu Yu She or Vice-President of 
the Censorate. Each of the eighteen provinces is under the 
control of an officer of this rank, with the exception of the pro- 
vinces of Chih-li, Kan-suh, and Sze-chVan, which are administered 
by Governors-General. The Governor is in all cases a colleague 
rather than a subordinate of the Governor-General. Shan-tung, 
Shan-si, and Ho-nan have no Governors-General over them. 
The Governor-General and the Governor, jointly, are spoken of as 
Tuh'Fu ^ 81 or Liang Yuan M K- 

275. — Pu-CnfeNG Shk-Szb ^ H^ ^ f|. — Lieutenant- 
Governor, or Financial Commissioner (commonly called Treasurer); 
2 b. Off. des. Fan Sze ^ ^; Coll. des. Fan t^ai ff ^ ; Epist. 
style. Fang Peh jjf ffi. The head of the civil service in each 
province, and treasurer of the provincial exchequer. Represents 
the earlier class of provincial governors as appointed under the 
Ming d3masty (see No. 272). 

276. — ^Ngan-Ch^a She-Szb ^ ^ ft 3. — Provincial Judge 
or Judicial Commissioner; 3 a. Off. des. Nieh Sze fk ^l ^^I* 
des. Ifieh t^ai flk 'a ; Epist style. Lien Fang ||| gjf. 

{N.B. — The two foregoing officials are frequently classed 
together as Fan-Nieh Liang Sze flf Jt M fl ^^ ^^^ two Chief 
Commissioners of the provincial Government). 



34 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMimSTRATIOST. 

277.— Yen Yun She-Szb 9 ^ f| fl.— Salt Comptroller; 
3 a. OfF. des. Yan Sze^^; Epist. style, Tu Chwa7i fjS W Chief 
Commissioner of the revenue derived from the provincial gabelle or 
salt monopoly. For minor ranks see in/rd^ Nos. 307 to 313. 

278. — Liang Tag )|9 JJ. — Grain Intendant; 4 a. Chief 
comptroller of the provincial revenue from the grain tax, whether 
collected in money or in kind. Distinguished by various titles in 
different provinces, as Tuh Liang Tao ft ^ jB ^.nd Liang Ch^u Tao 
fi il it- (See infrd, No. 280.) 

279. — Note. — The "provincial government," constituted by 
the above-named high officers, is commonly designated by the term 
Tuh Fu Sze Tao ft Hi €1 iS) embracing them all. 

The Sze TaOy or four high officials immediately below the 
rank of Governor, constitute in each province a Committee or 
Board of provincial administration. This Committee was named, 
during the Taiping rebellion, when its organization first came into 
general use, the KUn SU Tsung Kuh 9C IB iK ^ or Supreme 
Military Board; but of late years the title Shau'liow Tsung Kuh 
8 IS H JS 01* Supreme Board of Beorganization (provincial 
administrative Board) has been substituted in the majority of cases. 
The phrase slum Iww implies the ** restoration of order," or pacifi- 
cation, after a state of rebellion or warfare. 

At Foochow, a Board of Foreign Affairs, similarly constituted, 
is designated the T^ung Sfiang Tsung Kuh ^ ^ |B ]§• 

280.— FfeN Sun Tag f^ ^ Ji.— Intendant of Circuit; 4 a. 
Off", des. Tao Jft; Coll. des. Tao-t'ai j^ ■^; Epist. style Kwan- 
Ch^a |g ^ and Kim Sze £ ^« A functionary placed with 
administrative control over two or more Prefectures {Fu). In 
virtue of the powers of control over the military forces within his 
jurisdiction, which are usually annexed to a Taotai's office, he is 
officially designated Ping Pei Tao ^ fH ^, a title which dis- 
tinguishes him from the Liang Tao (see No. 278), or the 
Intendants of the Salt and Tea Revenue, Yen Ch^a Tao H i|^ jiE 
established in some of the provinces. (See also Hai-kivan Kien^iuh^ 
No. 324.) 



PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 35 

Note. — All ofRcials appertaining to the above ranks are 
spoken of or addressed in conversation by the title Ta Jen ;fj A 
appended to their surnames; except in the Case of members of the 
Grand Secretariat or titular "Imperial Guardians" (see Part II, 
Nos, 135, 139, and 142). 

281.— Chb Fu JD JjJ.— Prefect; 4 b. Off. des. Show t^; 

Epist style T'ai Show ^(j ^. Personal designation in recital of 

titles, Clieng T^ang j£ ^. The title of the officer governing the 

largest of the provincial subdivisions, or Fuy of which each province 

at the present day embraces, on an average, about ten. There are 

now, in all, 183 Fu or Prefectures, the smallest number (seven) 

being in Shensi, and the largest (thirteen) in Kiangsi. The Che Fu 

'•I 

of the present period represents the Kun Show fB "^ of the earliest 
administrative division of the'Empire, under Ts'in She Hwang-ti, 
B.C. 221, and the T'ai Show of the Han dynasty (reign of King Ti, 
B.O. 156). The Prefecture of the present day is frequently 
spoken of as KUn f|{, in reference to the ancient designation. 
The incumbent of the prefecture within which the provincial capital 
is situated is designated Slvow Eu "M* iff or the chief (head) Prefect 
(of the province). 

282.— T'UNG Che (g ^.—Sub-Prefect; 5 a. Coll. des. 
Urh Fu ^ }^; Epist. style Sze Ma ^ J^. To be distinguished 
as (A) First-class Sub-Prefect, administering a T^ing or indepen- 
dent sub-prefecture, and (B) Second-class Sub-Prefect, holding 
office under a Che Fu. Of this latter class there are a variety of 
denominations, according to the functions exercised. Such are 
Hai Fang Tung Che Mf^ ^ {^ ^9 Maritime Sub-Prefect; Kan 
Min T^ung Clie or Knn Min Fu % Sk }^^ Sub-Prefect with 
military jurisdiction; Shuei Li T'ung Clie i^JCJpJ l^^j Sub-Prefect 
in charge of water communications; Li Fan T^ung Che i|£$|^^9 
Sub-Prefect in authoriiy over aboriginal tribes, etc. A distinct 
office is Li Slie T'ung Che 2B ^ 1^ ^9 ^^ Civil Commissary of a 
Manchu Garrison.' 

283.— T^UNG-P^AN 3§ fj.— Assistant Sub-Prefect; 6 a. 
Epist. style Pieh Kia gl] ^ ; Coll. des. San Fu H M- Holds 
office imder either a Prefect or an independent Sub-Prefect. 



36 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 

Distinguished, according to the functions exercised, by titles such 
as Liang Pu T^ung-p^an fl| li ii fH? Revenue and Police Sub- 
Prefect,— and Pm 2^ao T^ung-p^an MfiEJiifi? Police Sub-Prefect, 
etc. 

284. — Che Chow ^ fl\. — Department Magistrate; 5 a and 
5 b. Off. des. Mu ^g;; Epist style Sze Ma p^ ^. To be dis- 
tinguished Rs ]j|[ ^ ^ Magistrate of an independent Department 
or Chih-li Chow, i.«., subject to no prefectural control but reporting 
direct to the provincial government ; and ^ f\ Magistrate of a 
subordinate Department or San Chmo^ forming part of a prefecture. 

Note. — The C7«« Chaw of the present period are considered to 
be the counterparts of the Tb'zb She M £ of the Sung dynasty. 
Wu Ti, of the Han dynasty, had in more ancient times given this 
title to Governors of provinces (Chow). 

285. — Chow T'ung i)JI (g. — First-class Assistant Department 
Magistrate; 6 b. Epist style Pieh Kia jj/^ H and Cliow Sze-tna 

286. — Chow P^an jHI fj- — Second-class Assistant Depart- 
ment Magistrate ; 7 b. Epist. style Cho Pieh-Kia JH JSA M- 

287. — Li MuH IJI g. — Department Police-master and Jail 
Warden ; 9 b. 

Note. — The three foregoing offices are common to both classes 
of Departments (see No. 284). 

288. — Tso Urh ^ JJ. — ^Assistant Magistrates, whether of 
Prefectures, Departments, or Districts. Lit. des. Ch^hig Ts^iii 
^ {^. To be distinguished from Tso Tea (see No. 322). 

289.— Che Hien 9b J|@R.— District Magistrate; 7 b. OflP. 

des. Ling ^; Epist. style Ming Fu Ifi Mi ^^ ^^ ifc ^j and 

t ^ Yth Tsun g^ dj. Personal designation in recital of titles ChSng 

T^ang J£ g. The district within which a provincial capital is 

situated gives the title of Shaw Hien *§* H to its incumbent. 

290.— Note.— The Fu Chow Hien Iff W IS or Prefects 
and Magistrates of different classes constitute the general ad- 



PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 37 

ministrative body of the provincial civil service. They are charged 
with the collection of revenue, the maintenance of order, and the 
primary dispensation of justice, as well as with the conduct of 
literary examinations and of the government postal service, and in 
general with the exercise of all the direct Ainctions of public 
administration. They are commonly spoken of as Fu Mu Kwan 
^ {^ ^, or officials who stand in loco parentis toward the people 
— to., who are the "father and mother" of the people. 

AH officials in the above-mentioned ranks are colloquially 
spoken of or addressed as Ta Lao Yeh ;fc ^ 3S* 

291. — HiBN Ch'Sng H £. — ^Assistant District Magistrate; 

8 a. Coll. des. Tio T^ang 2£ JJ; Epist. style Urh Tm%^. 

292. — Chu Pu i K- — Deputy Assistant Magistrate; 9 a. 
Epist. style San Yin ^ |^. 

293. — SiJN KiKN ^ Ut-— Sub-district Deputy Magistrate; 

9 b. 

294. — ^TiEN Shb K:£. — District Police-master and Jail 
Warden; unclassed. Coll. des. Pu THng ^ 0; Lit. des. Yea 
T'ang ^ ^ ; Epist. style Shoo Yn ^ jH", Shao Yin iJ? ^, Lien 
Pu H tt, and Sfiao Fu ^ J^. 

295. — KiNG-LiH fg^ gg. — Commissary of Records, or Secre- 
tary. Coll. des. Kmg T'ing S tf; ^P^^^- ^^V^^ ^«^^'< ^^'^ ^%- 
In the office of a Lieutenant-Governor, has 6 b; of a Provincial 
Judge, 7 a ; of a Salt Comptroller, 7 b ; of a Prefect, 8 a. 

296. — Chad Mo $E[ ^. — Commissary of the Seal, or Corre- 
spondence Secretary. Coll. des. Chao THng ^ |g|. In the office 
of a Lieutenant-Governor, has 8 b; of a Provincial Judge, 9 a; 
of a Prefect or First-class Sub-Prefect, 9 b. 

297. — K*u Ta She j|t :fc ffi. — Treasury Keeper. Coll. des. 
K'u T'ing ^ K|. In office of a Lieutenant Governor, a Salt 
Comptroller, or Superintendent of Customs, has 8a; of a TaoHai, 
9 b; of a Prefect, etc., unclassed. 

298. — ^Tu She |0 ^. — ^Assistant Secretary; 7 b. Coll. des. 
Tu She THng fS ^ 



38 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 

299.— Li Wen 3 ^.— Law Secretary; 6 b. 

300. — Che Shb ^ 1ft- — Archivist; 8 a, 8 b, and 9 a. 
Employed in offices of a Provincial Judge, Salt Comptroller, and 
(formerly) of a Prefect. 

301. — Ts'ang Ta She ^ ^ ^. — Granary Keeper; 9 a, 
and unclassed, according to degree of jurisdiction. 

302.— SzB Ytj % it.— Jail Warden of a Provincial Judge- 
ship or a Prefecture ; 9 a. 

303.— KiAO Show ffelf . — Director of Studies ; 7 a. Attached 
to a Prefecture. Lit. des. Kivang Win J| 3!C» 

304. — HiOH ChIing 4|jE.— Director of Studies; 8 a. Attached 
to a department. 

305.— KiAO Yu H; St.— Director of Studies; 8 a. Attached 
to a district Lit. des. Fuh Yu :g[ m^, from the full official title 
Fu SMh Kiao Yn ^^^^^ which indicates the "restoration" 
of the office after its temporary abolition in the last century. Epist. 
style Sze Kiao % fj;, and Ching Chat jE X* 

306.— Sun Tao n ^.—Sub-Director of Studies; 8 b. Lit. 
des. Fuh Sun ^ fH from Fuh SMh £t2n Too flt K P| ^ (see above). 
Epist. style Sze San % |||| and Fu Chai g{| ^. 

Note. — ^The above-named four officials act as superintendents 
and registrars of the candidates preparing for the Literary Exa- 
minations and as custodians of the Confucian Temples, etc. 

307.— YuN T^UNG fg ig.— Assistant Salt Comptroller; 4 b. 

308.— YuN Fu ^ g!|.— Depuiy-Assistant Salt Comptroller; 

5 b. 

309.— T^i Ku H 5.— Inspector of the Salt Department; 5 b. 

310.— YuN P'an 3S Ij.— Sub-Assistant Salt Comptroller; 

6 b. 

311.— Yen-K^o-Szb Ta She H ^ H :;^ ft.— Receiver of 
the Salt Department; 8 a. 

312.— P'i-Ybn-So Ta She ^ St J5 ^ ft.— Examiner 



PART IIL— PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 39 

of the Salt Department H 5| ; 8 a. Examiner of the Tea Depart- 
ment ^ §1 ; unelassed. 

813.— Ybn-Ch^a Ta She 9^ :fc iS|.— Examiner of the Tea 
and Salt Department; nnclassed. 

314._Shuei-K^o-Sze Ta She 5R ^ ^ :fe ^g.— Customs' 
Examiner. In a prefecture ; 9 b. In a department or district, 
unelassed. 

31 5._SuAN.K^o-SzB Ta She g ^ ^ :^ ^.—Customs' 
Examiner; 9 b. 

316.— Shubi-K'o Ffiif^ SzB Ta She ^ ^ ^ g :^ ^.— 
Customs' Deputy Examiner; unelassed. 

317.— KwAN Ta She H ^ jgg.- Customs' Examiner; 
unelassed. 

318. — Ho Po So 29 {3 J^- — River Police Inspector; unelassed. 
Coll. des. Ho T'ing fSl tf. 

31 9. — YiH Cn^fiNG ^ ^. — Postmaster ; unelassed. 

320.— Chah Kwan ||^ §. — Sluice Keeper; unelassed. 

321.-»KiBN Ejao UJ :gJ5. — Police Inspector in a Prefecture; 
unelassed. iV.-B. — This office no longer exists. 

322.— Tso TsA ^ JS.— Petty officials. Assistant Magistrates, 
Secretaries to Prefect, and the like, belonging to the eighth rank, 
are designated tso; whilst minor officials, of the ninth rank, and 
those unelassed, such as Jail Warden, etc,, are designated tea. 
(See No. 288.) 

323.— HiOH ChSng H Igj;.- Provincial Director of Education 
or Literary Chancellor. Off. des. Hioh Yuan ^ J^ ; Coll. des, 
Hioh T'ai ^^; lit des. Win Tsung ^J ^j and Tuh Hioh She 
ChS^ ^^ if. Full official title is TH-tuh Hioh Yuan % % 
» ^. A special appointment, usually filled by officials of high 
literary degrees who leave Peking for three years to serve in this 
capacity. They preside at the prefectural examinations, and give 
the degree of siu ta^ai^ which admits to the triennial competition for 
the M'jin degree. (See Part IX, No. 469.) 



40 ' PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 

324. — Hai Kwan Kien-tuh ilH H £ if. — Superintendent 
of Customs. %X){ various ranks. At Canton, a special officer, 
appointed from the Imperial Household, bears the designation 
Yoeh Hai Kwan Pu J^ JIK H {fS^ or Superintendent of Customs 
for the province of Kwangtung. Is commonly designated by 
Europeans as the "Hoppo," a term the derivation of which is 
unknown. At Foochow, the Manchu General-in-Chief fills a 
similar position. At the Custom House of Hwai-ngan, a special 
appointment is likewise made, the three functionaries in question 
being regarded as special purveyors for the Court. Elsewhere, 
the office is usually filled by a Taotai, in addition to his territorial 
duties. In such case he receives the designation Kwan Too j^ ^. 
Within recent years, a special "Customs' Taotai'' has been 
established at Tientsin, without territorial jurisdiction. 

325. — Chih Tsao m^ Jg. — Superintendent of an Imperial 
Manufactory, at Nanking, Soochow, or Hangchow. Specially 
appointed, from the Imperial Household, to superintend the manu- 
facture and despatch of silk textile fabrics and other requisites for 
the use of the Imperial Court. 

326.— Ho Tung Ho Tao Tsung-tuh |^ ^ fjj ^M tt-— 
Director-General of the Yellow River; 2 a. Ordinary designation 
Ho Tao Tsung tuh. The duties attached to this post have in recent 
years become much reduced in importance, the Governors of 
Honan and Shantung having become the active agents in the con- 
servation of the river embankment works. A military division, 
under the orders of the Director-General, is designated the Ho Piao 
|i|f |g. It numbers at present about 1,700 rank and file, having 
its head quarters at Tsi-ning Chow, in Shantung. 

327.— Ts^AO YtjN Tsung-tuh ff % (g ft.— Director-General 
of the Grain Transport ; 2 b. 

This functionary has the grain transportation system, for the 
conveyance of the rice from the southern provinces to Peking, 
under his control. The Wei^^ and /Sb J^, or first and second 
class transport-stations, connected with this system, have a special 
military organization of their own. Of late years, the introduc- 



PART III.— PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. i 41 

tion of steam-shipping, concurrently with the progressive difficulties 
of navigation on the YUn Ho ^ ||J, or Grand Canal, has led to 
the larger portion of the grain despatched to Peking being forwarded 
by sea to Tientsin. Of the Hai YUn ^ S, or grain transport by 
sea, a part is conducted by the steamers of the CJiao S/iang Kuh 
ffl ^ J§> the so-called "China Merchants' Sfceam-ship Company," 
which was established as a Government institution in 1872. 

328. — T*u KwAN i ff. — Administrators of ** Native" 
Districts. 

The portions of the provinces of Kwangsi and Kweichow which 
are inhabited exclusively by the Miao-tsze "jJSf ^ and other 
aboriginal tribes are in some cases organized as Districts or 
Departments under hereditary Magistrates, the representatives of 
ancient independent chiefs. They are generically designated as 
above; but the ruler of each district or department bears the 
ordinary Chinese official title, with the character t'u prefixed, as 
i jj(|, and jt )Ss» ii Yunnan, four "native" prefectures, t'ufu 
i jjf, are organized, with four t^u c/iow^ or "native" departments. 
The province of Kwangsi has 26 "native" departments, and four 
districts of the same class. The process of exchanging the status 
of a tribe under the direct government of its hereditary chief or 
magistrate for that of the ordinary Chinese population, or the 
*' bestowal of rights of citizenship,'* is described by the phrase 
kai t'u ioei liu Qfk db ft SK* 

329. — T*u SzE i '3-— The Native Tribes j and their 
Chieftains. 

This is the designation applied in general to all the multi- 
tudinous tribes of aborigines who overspread the southern and 
western provinces, and occupy the border-land between China on 
the one side and Annam, Laos, Burmah, and Tibet on the other. 
The most widely distributed and important of these are the Miao 
Tsze "jjjf ^ of Kwangsi, Kweichow, and Sze-ch'wan, the Lo-lo 
^JH i^^^^W^ ^f Sze-chVan and Yunnan, and the Shans, who 
occupy the southern and western portions of that province and 



42 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 

the frontier lands beyond. This last-named race, the representa- 
tives of a once powerful and still widely-spread nationality, whose 
name (as known to Europeans through the Burmese) may be 
traced in the Sien of Sien-Lo JS IB ^^ Siam, are considered by the 
Chinese as the descendants of the people of Yiieh Shang j^ ^ of 
whom their most ancient records make mention. The designation 
attributed to them in Chinese literature is Lao Chwa ^ 3, in 
which an afBniiy to the Laos of the Burmese and Siamese is 
plainly apparent The Shans of the border-land between Yunnan 
and Burmah term themselves, and are commonly known as, Pat I 
JH 5^. Chinese official writers, however, describe them as Lao 
Chwa, and the designation Pai I is applied in the description of 
the tribes of Yunnan {Nan Man Che Ifif ^ ^, Book III, forming 
part of the topography of that province), to the aborigines of the 
Kwangsi frontier, who are distinguished as Jtan ^ and shuei i^ 
or Land, and Water, Pai I. The government of the semi-in- 
dependent tribes in general is left in the hands of their hereditary 
chieftains, upon whom high-sounding titles of various degrees are 
bestowed, in accordance with a system introduced originally by 
the Mongol conquerors of China. According to the size and 
importance of the territory they rule over, these chieftains — 
known to the Burmese, on the south-western frontier, by the title 
of tsaubwa — are invested with different gradations of rank, as is 
shewn in the following list : 

330.— Che Hwei She Sze ft H ft ^; 3 a. 

331.— SuAN Wei She Sze g gt ft S; 3 h. 

332.— SuAN Pu She SzE g is ft 3; 4 b. 

333.— Chad T*ao She Sze ^ fj ft Q; 5 b. 

334.— Ngan Fa She SzE $ is 1^ ^; 5 b. 

In each of the tribal Governments as above, subordinate ranks 
are provided with the following titles: 

T^UNG Che |^ ^ ; rank varying from 3 b to 6 a. 
Fu She glj ft ; do. do. 4 b to 6 b. 

K*iBN She ^ :^; do. do. 4 a to 7 a. 



PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION, 43 

The following are the titles and ranks in a different class of 
tribal government: 

335.— Ts'iEN Hu -f- ^; 5 a, 

336.— Fu Ts^iKN Hu gj ^ ^; 5 k 

337.— PehHu-S ^; 6 a. 

338. — Chiang Kwan Szb Chiang Ewan :g1^^fiff ; 6 a. 

Fu Chiang Kwan SI :g ^ ; 7 a. 

Chiang Ewan Sze Li Muh £frflSS ; unclassed. 



44 PART IV. — GOVERNMENT OF PEKING. 



PART IV.-GOVERNMENT OP PEKING. 

339. — Fu Yin }^ ^. — Governor of (the Imperial Prefecture 
of) S/iuti't'ien Fu Jij^ J^ jjjj, ue.y the region enclosing the imperial 
eapital^^ a. Lit. des. King Chao ^ ^^. Beside the actual 
Governor, there is a Governor Adjoint, or Kim Yin ^ 5^, 
appointed from among the Presidents and Vice-Presidents of 
Boards, who exercises a concun-ent authority. 

840. — Fu Ch^^ng JjjSf 2g. — Vice-Governor of Shun-t^ien Fu; 

4 a. Lit. des. Fu King Cliao glj ^ ^f^. 

341.— Che Chung ^ tfi.— Sub-Prefect of Shun-i'ien Fu; 

5 a. 

^*^ In addition to the foregoing officials, the usual subordinate 
ranks appertaining to a Prefecture are also represented within the 
jurisdiction of Shun-t^ien Fu. 

342.— Wu Gn'tm Yu She £ |^ ^ ft .—The Police Censors. 
The city and suburbs of Peking are mapped out into five divisions, 
termed the Wu Ch^Sng or Five Cities, viz., the centre, embracing 
the neighbourhood of the Imperial Palace, and the North, South, 
East, and West. (See Part II, No. 189). One Manchu and one 
Chinese Censor is appointed to control the police and primary 
judicial arrangements of the capital. The subordinate ranks are 
as follows : 

343.— Ping Ma Szb €he Hwbi ^ ^ W^ f?.— Police 
Magistrate; 6 a. One to each of the five divisions of Peking. 
Common des. Sze Kwan p[ ^. These officials exercise a primary 
jurisdiction in judicial cases throughout the city and suburbs of 
Peking. 

344._PiNQ Ma Sze Fu Che Hwei |£ Jg ^ gl] }§■ ^.— 
Assistant Police Magistrate; 7 b. One to each of the five divisions 
of Peking. Common des. Fang Kwan j^ 1^. 

845. — Li Muh |^ g. — Police-master and Jail-warden. 



PART iV.-^GOViffiRNMENT OF PEKING. 45 

346.— KiEi Tao T*ing ft Jf g|.— The Roadway Office. 
The repair and maintenance of the streets of the outer (Chinese) 
city of Peking; are, nominally, cared for by this department, 
which is presided over by the police Censors. The preservation of 
public order is also included among its duties. 

347.— Pu KtjN YiNG ^ ^ g,— The Division of Gendar- 
merie. 

The police arrangements of the capital are conducted by the 
TH^tuh Yamin £ fip ffi P^^ or Office of Gendarmerie, under which 
the Fu Kan Ying, a force recruited from the Eight Banners (see 
Part VI), is placed. The men of this force, numbering from 
15,000 to 20,000, are distributed in squads at guard stations, 
Kwcvti tHrtg 1^ i|g, throughout the city and suburbs. Judicial 
cases in which Bannermen alone are litigants, are heard by this 
office. Mixed Cases, between Bannermen and ordinary Chinese, 
are dealt with by the police Censors. The men of the gendarmerie 
are also charged with the duty of maintaining the roadways of the 
city proper. 

348.— Pu KiJN T'UNG Ling ^ ^ fiK ®.— General Com- 
mandant of the Gendarmerie; 1 b. Has also the designation 
TH-tufi Kill MSn San Pu Wu Ying Ji^^P^igJMSg officially 
preceding his title as above, with reference to his command over 
the Nine Gates of the city proper and of the Five Battalions of 
Chinese troops forming the police of the city and its environs. 
Hence his common appellation of Kiti M4n 'Pi-tuh ^ P3 JS S, or 
General of the Nine Gates. The incumbent of the office is usually 
also President or Vice-President of one of the Boards. The total 
number of troops comprised within the Wu Ying, or SUn Pu Ying 
JS if g, is officially reckoned at 4,000 mounted and 6,000 foot 
soldiers. In reality, the force is much smaller. 

349.— Tso and Yeo Yih Tsung Ping 2£ ^ R JB H-— 
Police Provosts, or Lieutenant-Generals, senior and junior, of the 
Gendarmerie; 2 a. Usually hold office also as Vice-Presidents of 
Boards. 

350.— Yih Yu % j^.— Deputy Provost; 3 a. 



46 PART IV. — GOVERNMENT OF PEKING. 

351.— Pang Pan Yih Yu fff Igl H J^.— Assistant Deputy 
Provost; 3 b. 

352.— HiEH Yij ^ ^.— Major of Police; 4 a. 

353._Fu YiJ glj jH".— Captain of Police; 5 a. 

354.— Pu KuN Hiao jp ^ igg.— Lieutenant of Police; 5 b. 

355._Wei Shu Pu Kun Hiao # S ^ H :g.— Deputy 
Lieutenant of Police; 6 a. 

356.— Sin P'ao Tsung-Kwan ft 1S2 18 flf.— Controller of 
the Alarm-signal guns; 4 a. 

Gate Gtiarda: 

357.— Ch^Sng MfeN Ling ^ H SS-— Captain of a Gate; 4b. 

358. — MfeN Ts^iEN-TsuNG p^ ^ H.— Lieutenant of a Gate; 
6 a. 

359._CH^IiNG Men Li jig R g.— Clerk of a Gate; 7 a. 

360.— TS^UNG WfeN MISN KlEN-TUH # ^K M S ff-— 

Superintendents of the Customs and Octroi of Peking. A com- 
mission consisting of one principal and one secondary High 
Commissioner, appointed annually. The title borne by them is 
derived from the fact that the principal office of the Collectorate 
is situated near the Ts^ung Wen Gate (Ha-ta Men) of the city. 
Out-stations are established in a cordon around Peking, ranging 
to a distance of from ten to thirty miles. 

361.— Tso and Yeo Yih Kibn-tuh 2£ :& R ffi '&.— 
Superintendents of the Live-stock and House duty at Peking. 
Two Commissioners, annually appointed, one each for the East and 
West divisions of the city. 

362.— Ts^ang Chiang ^ Jg.— The Peking Granaries. 

These are controlled by a commission of two officers with the 
rank of Vice-President of the Board of Revenue— hence called 
Ta'ang Chiang She-lang j^ jj^ f^ J^, whose head quarters are at 
T^ung Chow, the point at which the grain from the southern 
provinces is landed. Their two principal subordinates are of the 



PART IV. — GOVERNMENT OF PEKING. 47 

rank of lang chung (see Part II, No. 163) with the title Tso Liang 
T^ing ^ ^ Hg, or Grain Super\dsors of the Board of Revenue. 

363.— Pao Ts^uan Kuh Jg % jg.— The Coinage department 
of the Board of Revenue. 

364.— Pao Yuan Kuh Jf }g ^.— The Coinage department 
of the Board of Works. 

The above are the two departments at which the copper cash 
constituting the currency recognized by the Chinese Government 
is minted. In each case, the department is placed under the 
supervision of one of the two junior Vice-Presidents of the Board, 
with the addition of the words Kien Li Ts^ien Fa T^ang She \Vu 
^aiiiab^^gfto liis title. (See Part 11, No. 161.) 



48 PART V. — THE THREE MANCHURIAN PROVINCES. 



PART V.-THE THREE MANCHURIAN PROVINCES. 

365.— The Tung San Sh^ng JH H ^Mj or Tliree Eastern 
provinces, comprise the territory originally inhabited by the Manchu 
race, which is divided into tliree provinces. The two most northerly 
of these, Heh-lung Kiang or T'sitsUiar — the Amur, and Kiririj 
are organized upon a purely military basis, whilst FSttg-t^ien^ the 
southernmost, including tlie Manchu capital, named ShSng King 
or Moukden, approximates more closely in its form of administra- 
tion to that of the eighteen provinces of China Proper. The system 
of government of the province of Fevg-t^ienj indeed, was remodelled 
in 1876, bringing it even more nearly than before into harmony 
with that of the rest of China. Its distinctive mark in the past 
was the control exercised by the Five local Boards, corresponding 
to the Boards of Revenue, Ceremonies, War, Punishments, and 
Works, at Peking, over the affairs of the province in general. 
The authority heretofore vested in these boards has now been con- 
centrated in the hands of the Military Governor, to whom the 
position and title of a Governor-General (see Tsung-tuhj Part III, 
No. 273) have been accorded. 

366.— Province of F^ng-tien 3^ 5^.— Commonly called 
ShSng King jS 3sC> f^om the Chinese designation of its capital 
city, otherwise known as Moukden, from the name it bears in the 
Manchu language. 

367.— TsiANG KxjN JH 3|.— Military Governor; 1 b. (Since 
1876 invested with the title and attributes of a provincial Governor- 
General or Tmng-iuh). 

368.— Fu Yin }^ ^.— Civil Governor (with title and attri- 
butes of a provincial Governor or SUn Fu). 

369.— Fu Ch^Iing /jj ^.— Civil Vice-Governor and ex officio 
Provincial Literary Examiner. 

370.— Fu Tu-T^UNG gtj ^ DJ.— Military Deputy- Lieutenant- 
Governor ; 2 a. Commanding various divisions of the province. 



PART V. — THE THREE MANCHURIAI^ PROVINCES. 49 

371.— Cn^feNG Show-tij jj| «5P j®.— Military Commandant; 
3 a. An appointment held under the Military Lieutenant-Governorgf, 
in command of the garrisons of the various prefectural and depart- 
mental cities. 

372.— Fang Show-yu jSjjjf ^ J|^. — Military Commandant of 
the second class; 4 a. . 



* 



* 



^ In addition to the functionaries of the provincial Govern- 
ment enumerated above, there exist at Moukden, furthermore, 
counterparts (on a reduced scale) of the Boards of Revenue, 
Ceremonies, War, Punishment, and Works as established at Peking, 
each presided over by a Vice-President who acts, in his own 
particular department, as a colleague of the Military Governor. 

373. — Province of Kirin •§ ^ ig. — Governed by a 
Tsiang Kiln or Military Governor (see No. 367), with Military 
Deputy-Lieutenant-Governors (see No. 370) at the following points : 

i. Kirin Ula {city of Kirin) "^ ^ j^ ^' 
ii. Ningutd ^ ifr ^. 
iii. PetunS fg ^ ff^. 

iv. Sansing ^ jjj. 

V. Altch'ukha M Jil % ^• 

A small number of officials of the lower civilian and literary 
ranks are also stationed in different parts of the province. 

374. — Province of Heh-lung Kiang H || ZC i^^ or 
TsiTSiHAR. Governed by a Tsiang Kiln or Military Governor 
(as above), with Military Deputy-Lieutenant-Governors at the 
following points : 

i. He/i'lung Kiang ^ H Hi* 
ii. Mergum S fi ^• 
iii. Tsitsiliar ^ ^ i^ IS* 

There is, in addition, a civil administration at the town of 
Hu-lan THng If |g ®. 

375. — Ta Sheng Jf 43^. — Hunters; a designation applied 
to the indigenous population of certain districts in the two above- 



50 PART V. — THE THREE MANCHURIAN PROVINCES, 

named provinces^ who are held bound to pay certain tribute of 
animals or ftirs. 

376. — Yko Muh ^ ig^. — Nomads. The wandering tribes 
existing within the limits of Manchuria are placed under the 
superintendence of the following officials: — 

377.— Yeo Muh CnfeNG YtJ gf ft IE JH".— Chief Super- 
intendent of Nomads; 7 a. 

378.— Yeo Muh Fu Yu J^ ft gi| |^.— Assistant do. do.; 
7 b. 



PART VI. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 51 



PART VI -THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 

379.— Pa K*i A IR— The Eight Banners. 

The armj specially appertaining to the Mancha dynasty is 
known as the Eight Banners, from the organization introduced by 
the early sovereigns of the reigning family. These Banners are 
distinguished by the colours enumerated below, and are farther 
divided into two classes, viz., the Three Superior and the Five 
Inferior Banners, as follows : 

i. Bordered Yellow ft |iE 1 ± H ft 
ii. Plain . „ jE it f The Three 
iii. „ White jE & J Superior Banners. 

iv. Bordered „ Jl 6 



T£Jft 

The Five 
Inferior Banners. 



V. Plain Red ]£ ^ 

vi. Bordered „ M^LY 
vii. Plain Blue j£ ]g 

viii. Bordered „ fSk^ 

^ The nationalities composing the Banner force are three in 

number, viz., Manchu, Mongolian, and Chinese, the latter, known 
as Han KUn ^ ^, consisting in the descendants of those natives 
of northern China who joined the Manchu invaders during the 
period of their contest with the Ming dynasty in the early part 

y of the seventeenth century. Each nationality bears the Manchu 
designation of Ku-sai (written Kn-shan @ jlj); and as a complete 
division of each nationality exists under the colour of each of the 
Banners enumerated above, there are in fact 24 banners, or eight 

^ KH divided into three Ku-sai each. Under one or other of these 
divisions all living Manchus, and all descendants of the Mongolian 
and Chinese soldiery of the Conquest, are enrolled. Each banner 
of the Manchu and Mongolian nationalities, again, is divided 
into a nui kH f^ ]Q^ and a wai kH ^ ]^, t.e., an Inner and 
Outer division. The inner division is composed of the so-called 
paO'i Q ^, from the Manchu 6o-/, signifying a bondservant, who 



52 PABT VT. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 

are especially bound to render suit and service. The pao-i of the 
three Superior Banners appertain to the JViii Wu Fu or Imperial 
Household (see Part I, No. 62), whilst those of the remaining five 
Banners are attached to the various Princely houses or Wang Fu 
(see Part I, No. 31). 
^ The Btoners constitute, in fact, tba population of Peking, 

with offshoots in various provincial garrisons; and a certain number 
of the adult males of the force receive pay as meipbers of one or 
other of the military corps into which they have, from time to time, 
been organized, in addition to the pittance they receive as soldiers 
, of the Banner.* The General Head Quarter Office of the Banners 
is designated the Chih Nim KH {| ^ j^^, to which one Tu t^ung (see 
below) from each Banner is annually appointed to do duty. All 
correspondence relating to the Banner force as a whole* passes 
through this office. The official organization of the Banners is as 
follows: • 

380. — ^Tu-T^UNG Hi SKI. ^Lieutenant-General; 1 b. One to 
each hjaai or national division of a Banner. (For the Tu T^ung 
acting as Military Lieutenant-Governors, see Part XI, No. 548.) 

381 . — Fu Tu-T^UNG gl| 9 ig^. — Deputy Lieutenant-General ; 

2 a* (For the Fu Tu T^ung of the provincial Banner garrisons, 
see infrdj No. 427.) 

382.— YiN Wu Ts^AN^LiNG ^ K ^ fi.— Adjutant-General; 

3 a. Two to each of the twenty-four Banners (except the Mongo- 
lian, which have but one). Selected from the Colonels (see 
below.) 

383.— HiAO-K^i Ts<AN-LiNG @ H j£^ f|.— Colonel; 3 a. 
Has the general civil control over a sub-division or Cha-la ^ IK, 
of which there are five in each of the Manchu and Han Kiin 
Banners. In the Mongolian Banners there are but two of these 
1sub-di visions. 



♦ For a complete analysis of the various forms of the Banner organization, 
with all details of the composition and pay of the forces, as shewn on paper, see 
The Army of the Chinese Empire, a series of articles by T. F. Wade (Sir T. F, Wade, 
E.C.B.)) in the Chine$e Bepontory for May, June, and July, 1851, Vol. ZX. 



PART VI. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 53 

384.— Fu HiAO-K*i Ts^an-ling glJlgJB ^®[.— Lieutenant- 
Colonel; 4 a. One to each Cha-la or sub-division (as above). 

385.— YiN-Wu Chang-king ^ K jt ^.—Adjutant; 5 b. 
Conducts the civil correspondence of the Banner. Although less 
in degree of rank than the Uo^ling (see below) this officer is con- 
sidered as filling the higher post, and is promoted from it to the rank 
of lieutenant-colonel — No. 384. The term eltang-king is a corruption 
of the Manchu word chan^yiuy signifying an "assistant." (See 
Part II, No. 133.) 

886.— Wei Yin-Wu Chang-king ^ EP Sf S ^.—Assistant 
Adjutant. Appointed from the grade of Hiao KH Hiao. 

887. — Tso-LING ^ ^. — Captain ; 4 a. Of this rank there 
are, in each Manchu banner, from 70 to 80 officers, and in each of 
the Han-kiin Banners, from 30 to 40, according to the strength of 
the corps. Acting under the immediate command of the ts^an-ling 
(see No. 383) of the eha~la to which he belongs, the tso-ling is 
specially charged with the control of some 70 to 100 of the house- 
holds of the Banner. The Uo-ling hold in some cases their 
appointments by hereditary right, either as Hiin Kiu JH ^ or as 
She Kwan ^ ^ Tso-ling, Those who become entitled to appoint- 
ment by various processes of selection are designated Kung Chung 
^ i(t, FSn Kwan ^ 9, and Lun Kwan ||| ^ Tao-ling. 

388.— Pan Ko Tso-ling ^ <B ^ 0[.— Half Tso-ling. A 
title formerly in use but now almost, if not entirely, obsolete, to 
designate the captains of companies numbering less than one 
hundred strong. 

389.— HiAO-K^i Hiao jg £f :R.— Lieutenant ; 6 a. Officers 
of this grade are drawn upon to fill the post of Pu Kan Hiao (see 
Part IV, No. 354). Their post in the Banner is then filled by a 
"deputy," of lower rank, with the following title: 

390.— Wbi Shu Hiao-K^i Hiao ^ S £g if :K.— Sub^ 
lieutenant; 8 b. Promoted from the post of pi/i-t^ieh-she (see 
Partll, No. 181). . 

391 . — LiNG-TS^ui f^fH' — Corporal (non-commissioned officer). 
Acts under the orders of Hiao Ki Hiao. 



64 PART VI. — ^THE MAKCHU MILITARY OEOANIZATIOI^. 

392.— Ma Kia Jg fp .— .(Manch. UheaAi.) Pirat-class Private 
Sol4ierf receivlqg 3 Tls. per men^m. 

SQS.'-^Ao-TTRH-PU 50ClB ^S* — (Manch. Orbo.) Second-class 
Private Soldier, receiving 2 Tls. per mensem. , Also called Luh- 
Kioh Ping Jj ^ ^, or chevaux de frise bearer, from his traditional 
duty on parade and in action. In the Han KUn Banners only. 

394. — ^Yang Yu Ping ^ "^ &.-. — Supernumeraries or juniors, 
awaiting appointment to the position of second or first class private, 
as v^a9cies occur. In all the Banners. 

395. — HiEN San ^ fj;.— (Manch. Suld,) B^nn^riPQU ^t 
large, without position or pay. 

Paid Forces of tlm banner Organization: 

The various corps organized from the Banner population of 
Peking are as follows? 

396.— Hu Kt^N YiNG H H g.— The Guards' Division. 
Common des. Ta Ting ^ § (the main division). This force was 
organized during the early wars of the Manchu sovereigns, with 
the designation Pa-ya-ld^ which was exchanged in A-P. 1660 for 
its Chinese equivalent now in use. Admission into the corps, 
which is estimated as numbering some 3,000 to 4,000 strong^ con- 
stituted until lately the special ambition of the great mass of the 
Bannermen of Peking, to whom it secured the advantages of 
"substantial addition to their pay and prospects of promotion in a 
degree which, until the institution of the SMn Kl Ying (see infrd^ 
No. 415), was attainable by comparatively few. From the place 
assigned to the two main sections of the Division, on the right 
and left wings of the Banner force when drawn up for review or 
action, the title "Flank Division" has been given to this corps 
by Sir T. F. Wade in his article on the Chinese army already 
frequently referred to. The principal duty assigned to the corps, 
at the same time^ is that of fomishing detachments of guards for 
the Imperial palace. It consists of eight divisions corresponding 
to the eight Banners, i^ach Ojf yf\?idk is compmnded by a T^ung-Ung 
(see below) : 



397. —Hu KtJK T^TOQ Ling 8| 9 H ^.—Captain-General; 

2 a. This office is U3u*lly filled by Prijioes or pther dignitaries of 
the Court. 

899.— Hu KtjN Ts^i^-LiNQ i| ^ S ffi.— Lieut -Colonel; 

3 a. 

399.— Hu KuN HiAO ^ !|| ^.-r-Lieutenant; 6 ^ 

400.— Wei Shu Hu JLui? Hiaq ^ H^ Q $ :g^.— Sub- 
lieutenant; 8 b. 

401 ,— Ts^iEN F%G YiNQ |J ^ ^.-^Y^Pgnard Divisiop. 

*' The Vanguard or leading division is composed entirely of 
M9,nchus or Mongols of the whole Eight Banners, chosen in the 
proportion of two to every tsoMng; it is divided into right and 
left wings, each of which is under a t^ung-ling^^ ( The Army of 
tlie Chinese Empire^ see Chinese Repository, Vol. XX, p. 264.) 

r 

402.— Tso YiH Ts'iEN F^NG T^uNG-LiNG and Yeq Yih 
Ts'iEN Feng T'ung-ling &:Q % M M^ ®* — Commandants 
of the Left and Right 'Wing of the Vanguard division ; 2 a. 

403.— Ts^^EN Feng She Wei jj ^ f^ g|,— Ipciperial QuardsT 
man of th^ Vanguard division ; 4 a. 

404,^Wi|i 85U Ts^tpr nm &m Wei # * tJ gi ^ Ig.-^ 

Deputy dp. do,; ^ b. 

405.-rrTa^iEjr FliNa Hiao |i^ fSt iK'—^Sergeant of the 
Vaaguard division; 6 a (and Wd Shu do. do.; B b). 

406.— Pu KuN YiNG ^ H g.— (See Govermnent of PeUng^ 
Part IV, No. 347). 

407.— Hwo K^i YiNG 9i S g.— The Artillery and Musketry 
.Divi«ion. Ggnalstjng in Nui and Wai^ of Inner and Outer 
Divisions, of which the former -is stationed at Peking and the latter 
at Lan^tien Chiang or <Jie Indigo Manufactory, a short distance 
from Y%n Ming Yuan. The Ifui Hwo KH Ying is formed from 
the bo'i of the different Banners (see supra. No. 379). At the 
PPQ^Q* day this mtl^^j like the " light Division " (see infra j No. 4 1 1 ) 
has but a nominal exjgtence» 

408.^TsuNp T*yNQ H j|J..-^General Commandant. 



\ 



56 PART VL-^THi: MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 

409. — YiH Chang ^ g.— Brigadier ; 3 a. 
41 0. — YiNG TsuNG {gf H* — Commandant. 
The remaining ranks as in the Hu KUn Ying. 

411.— KiEN Jul YiNG fl fSt S- — Light Division. Banks as 
above. Quartered near the Hiang Shan Yuan ^ |ll ^, or Tsing 
I Yuan j^JiCH? *h® Imperial Hunting Park, north-west of Peking. 

41 2.— HiANG Tao Ch^u 8f 51 JS-— The Guides. A depart- 
ment which fiimishes the outriders, etc, for imperial progresses. 

41 3. — Hu Ts^iANG YiNG J^ It g. — The marksmen for tiger 
hunts. 

414.— Shang Yij Pei Yung Ch^u J: U flS M ft-— The 
Imperial Hunting Department. 

415.— Sh6n Ki Ying H H flf.— The Peking Field Force. 

This force, comprising the 61ite of the Banner troops of the 
capital, was organized, in 1862, as a result of the disastrous 
campaign of 1860, with a view to provide for the future defence 
of the centre of government. The title given to the force was 
borrowed from the history of the Ming dynasty, when, on the first 
introduction of fire-arms in the 15th century, the designation 
SUn Ki or ''divine mechanism'' was attributed to the new engines 
of warfare. The Field Force numbers some 18,000 or 20,000 men, 
/ including cavalry, artillery, and rifle regiments, aU of whom are 

drilled and manoeuvred after the European fashion. The instruc- 
tion of these troops is based upon the lessons in European drill 
which were given to detachments sent to Tientsin for the purpose 
of studying under British instructors in 1862-1865. 

41 6.— Yuan MiNg YttAN Pa K'l H ^ H A K-— The Yuan 
Ming Division of the Banner Force. 

This is a corps composed of representatives of all the eight 
Banners, forming a sedentary garrison in the vicinity of the 
Summer Palace. 

, 41 7.— Chu Fang ft gjf • — The Manchu Garrisons outsidb 
Peking. Divided into three classes, as follows: — 

418.— a. Ki Fu Chu Fang ^ |f ft gjjjf.— The. garrisons 



; 



PART VI. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION, 57 

of the "military cordon," consisting of 25 cities in the province 
of Chihli, surrounding Peking.* The nine garrisons nearest to 
the capital are termed the Siao Kiu Ch^u h\% JL^^ or Nine Small 
Posts. The organization of these garrisons is the same with that 
of the Peking Banners, of which they are offshoots. 

41 9.-6. Ling Ts^in Chu Fang I^ jglg gjf.— The garrisons 
of the Imperial Mausolea. In connection with these, also offshoots 
of the Peking Banners, are the following ranks : — 

420. — TsuNG KwAN H ^. — Comptroller-General; 3 a. 
Has the chief command of the guard of the Mausolea. 
421. — ^YiH Chang ^ ^. — Brigadier; 4 a. 
422. — SzB KuNG-TSiANG rJ X g. — Oversccr of Works; 4 a! 
423.— Fang Yu Kf |j.— Captain; 5 a. 

424.— Tsi SzB kuNG YiNG KWAJF ^ JE ft H '&•— 
Commissary of Sacrifices ; 6 a. 

425.— «. KoH ShSng Chu Fang # ig S Kf •— The garrisons 
stationed in the provinces, to wit, at Sui-yiian, Kwei-hwa, and 
T'ai-yuan Fu in Shandy at Ts^ng-chow Fu and Teh Chow in 
Shantung^ at K*ai-fBng Fu in Honan, at Nanking and King K^ow 
in Kiangsuy at Hangchow Fu and Cha-p^u in CMh-kiang, at 
Foochow in Fuhkien, at Canton in Kwangtung^ at Ch*eng-tu Fu 
in Sze-ch^wariy at King-chow Fu in Hupehj at Si-ngan Fu in 
Sliensiy and at Ninghia, Liangchow, and Chwang-liang T4ng in 
Kansuhy beside the garrisons of Urumtsi, Barkul, Ku-ch^Sng, and 
Turfan, included within the Kansuh jurisdiction. f 

426.— TsiANG KuN ^ ^.— Manchu General-in-Chief (or 
"Tartar General"); 1 b. Lit. des. Ta Yuan Jung ^ % 3^- 

Note. — The Tsiang Kan exercising territorial jurisdiction in 
Manchuria and elsewhere are described as Military Governors. 
(See Part V, No. 367). The Tsiang KUn in the Chinese provinces 
ranks with, but before, the Governor-General, although exercising 
no authority except over the small Banner force at the head of 
which he stscnds. In Kwangtung and Sze-ch'wan he has a 

* See Chinese depository, Vol. XX, p. 314. 

f See Chinese Repository, Vol. XX, p. 318 et seq. 



58 PART VI.— THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 

bominal degree of control over the Ohinese foroes in addition to 
his own ; but this is not in practice exercised. 

427.— Fu Tu-T^UNG gij ^ ]gj.— Manchu Brigade General; 
2 a. Lit. des. Ta T^ung-che ^fz^M* ^^^ ^^ ®^^^ provincial 
command. For the Fu Tu-t^ung of the Peking Banner organization 
see sttprdj No. 881. 

428. — HiEH-LiNG % ^.—Colonel; 3 b. One to each 
provincial Banner. 

429. — Tso-LiNG ^ ^. — Major ; 4 a. 

{N.B. — A position appreciably higher than that of the tso-ling 
of the Peking banners, although with equivalent nominal rank.) 

430. — Fang-yu g{f 1^. — Captain; 5 a. 

431.— HiAO-K*i HiAO |g H :g.— Lieutenant; 5 b. 

432.— Wei Shu Hiao-K^i Hiao ^ ^^ SS *S?.— Sub- 
lieutenant; 8 b. 

433.— Ts^iEN-FfiNG Ijf jf.— Sergeant. 

434. — LiNG-Ts*ui fS, HI- — Corporal. 

435. — Shwei She Ying ^ ggi g. — Marine Battalion of the 
Banner Forces; for river service in the various provincial garrisons. 

436. — Wei Ch'ang S J|[. — The Imperial Hunting Reserves. 
A vast tract of country, several hundreds of miles in extent, in the 
region of Jeh-ho, set apart in the early years of the reigning 
dynasty as a preserve for large game and as a place for the exercise 
of the Imperial troops in the art of war as exemplified in the chase. 
(See Part XI, No. 548.) The guards of the Hunting Reserves 
are placed under the command of the following officers :— 

437._Wei Chiang Tsung Kwan H ^ ift If.— Chief 
Comptroller of the Hunting Grounds ; 3 a. 

438.--WEt Ch'ang Tie Chang S ;^ ^ ^—Brigadier of 
the Hunting Grounds ; 4 a. 



PART VII. — THE CHINESE ARMY. 59 



PART VIL-THE CHINESE ARMY. 

439.— LuH YiNG ^ g.— The Chinese provincial Forces; 
designated as the Army of the Green Standard. These troops 
are divided into Luh Lu H jjj, or Land Forces, and Shuei She 
:^ fiS^ or Marine. The ranks and designations are identical in 
both divisions. The land forces, numbering in all some 400,000 
to 500,000 men, are an absolutely effete organization, discharging 
the duties of sedentary garrisons and local constabulary, but 
superseded, on all occasions when active service is required, by 
the so-called '* braves" — yung ^, or irregulars, enlisted and 
discharged according to circumstances. The officers of these 
irregular troops are usually invested with rank as "expectants" 
of appointments to posts in the regular service. The main bulk 
of the provincial forces are commanded by a General-in-Chief or 
TH'tuh (see below), and bear the designation of TH Piao J§ i^, 
or TH-tufis command. A smaller body of men, to whom the 
duty of garrisoning the provincial capital is specially assigned, 
is known as the Fu Piao ^ g, being the command allotted to 
the provincial Governor; and a Governor- General has in addition 
a third distinct command annexed to his functions, this division 
receiving consequently the title of Tuh Piao § ^. The forces 
under the command of the General-in-Chief are divided into 
Chen-Piao |J| i^, or Brigades, and these again into Hieh ^, or 
territorial regiments. The Hieh are divided into Ying g, bat- 
talions, and the t/ing is farther subdivided into a right and left 
Shao jf^', or patrol. The f/ing is commanded, as a rule, by an 
officer of the rank of Major (see infrdj No. 444), although in 
some cases the commanding officer is only a first or second Captain. 
The shao is commanded by a tsHen-tsung or lieutenant, beneath 
whom the force is distributed in either two or four sze ^, corre- 
sponding to the sUn J^, or military posts established in different 
localities, at the head of each of which a pa-tsung "or sergeant is 
placed. As has already been stated above (see Part III, Nos. 



60 PART VII. — THE CHINESE ARMY. 

326 and 327) the Directors-General of the Yellow River and of the 
Grain Transport have each a separate military organization under 
their command designated, respectively, the Ho Piao fij ^ and 
Ts^ao Puzo iff S* The division under the orders of the Director 
of the Grain Transport has the duty of garrisoning and guarding 
the stations along the line of the grain transportation service at 
which the squadrons of junks are successively loaded, despatched, 
and discharged in effecting the conveyance of the "tribute rice" 
to Peking. These stations are designated wei ^ and so J^, 
according to the class to which they belong; and the officials in 
charge at these points, ranking as ahow^pei (second captain) and 
ta^ien-isujig (lieutenant), have special designations such as aJiaw yU 
«5P ^, "on service for garrison duty,*' f^ ling yiin fg ^, "charged 
with the conduct of the grain squadrons," etc., prefixed to the titles 
of their rank. In the river-guard squadron which has been 
organized of late year's for the patrol of the Yangtsze, under the 
name of Chiang Kiang Shuei She Ting ^ SC bfC 6$ §> forming a 
distinct command, the aze of the established land forces are repre- 
sented by tui |§|t, or gunboat companies. In other respects, the titles 
employed in this organization are the same with those of the regular 
army, which are as follows : — 

440. — T^i TUH jg 'If. — Provincial Commander-in-Chief, or 
General-in-Chief; 1 b. Common des. tH-fai ^ •§ ; Epist. style, 

hnn m^ ^ H- " 

441. — TsUNG-PiNQ H ^.-—Brigade General; 2 a. Common 
des. CMn-i^ai SR -^. Lit des. Tsung Jung ^ 3^; Epist des. 
Ta Tsung^-che :f; H ff • 

442.— Fu-TSIANQ g)J JRf. — Colonel; 2 b. Lit des. Fu Jung 
gl| 3^; Common des. Hieh^t^ai ^ ■^. 

443. — Ts^AN-TSiANG ^ JRp. — Lieutenant-Coloncl ; 3 a. Lit. 
des. Ts^an Jung ^ 5^; Common des. Ts^an Fu ^ J^. The 
Lieutenant-Colonel acting as Commandant of a Fu Piao or 
Governor's Brigade is colloquially designated Ta THng ^ 10. 

444.— Yeo-Ki ^ y. — Major; 3 b. Lit des. Yeo Jung 
M ^ 9 Common des. Yeo Fii^ ]^. 

445. — Tu-SZB ^ 3.— First Captain; 4 a. Lit. des. Tu 
KwSn IP Hg. 



PART Vn. — THE CHINESE ARMY. 61 

446.— Show-pet «gp fl|.— Second Captain; 5 b. Common 
des. Show Fu If ^. 

447._Ts^iEN-TsuNG ^ j||.— Lieutenant; 6 a. Lit. des. 
Ts^ien Jung ^ 3^ ; Common des. Tsung Yeh ^ ^. 

448.— Pa-tsung ^ H.— Sergeant; 7 a. Common des. 
Fu Yeh glj |g. 

449. — Wai-wei Ts*ien-tsung 9^^^ ift.— -Second Sergeant 
8a. 

450. — Wai-wei Pa-tsung Jfr ^ JC H- — Corporal; 9 a. 

451. — NGfeH-WAi Wai-wei S 9f% (ll* ^.— Lance-Corporal ; 
9 b. 



452. — YiNG TsuNG g H. — Commandant. This title is given 
to the officers in command of special bodies of troops, such as the 
Manchu contingents employed in Sungaria, and the irregulars or 
"braves," chwang yung ^ ^, who have superseded the regular 
army organization for purposes of active service, together with the 
divisions or contingents of these irregulars which have been subjected 
to drill and furnished with arms on the European model. These 
are ordinarily designated lien kiln |f[ ^, a term which may be 
translated as "field force." 

453. — Chung KiJN »}» ^. — Adjutant or Military Secretary. 
This post is filled by an officer of the rank of Colonel, Lieutenant- 
colonel, Major, or first or second Captain, according to the position 
of the authority under whose orders it is established. The officers 
who serve as Adjutants to Governors- General and Governors are, 
respectively, the commandants of the Governor-Generars and the 
Governor's brigades (see suprdy No. 439). In the general araiy 
organization, each commanding officer, down to the rank of major, 
has an officer of the rank immediately below him as his adjutant, 
except in the case of the General-in-Chief, who makes his own 
selection for the post. 



62 PART Vni. — HEREDITARY RANKS, 



/-" 



PART VIII.-HEREDITARY RANKS, TITLES OP HONOUR, 

AND DECORATIONS. 

454. — TsioH Yin |$ $. — Hereditary Banes. 

The existing Chinese system of conferring patents of nobility 
and honorary titles is linked by an unbroken chain of descent 
with the history of the feudal states of the sixth century before 
Christ, perpetuating in its nomenclature, on the one hand, the 
titles of the semi-independent Princes of that era, and, on the 
other, the names of official degrees which have ceased for many 
centuries to exist in practical operation. Inasmuch, however, as 
the feudal system has scarcely at any period shewn symptoms of 
revival since it was laid low by She Hwang Ti in the 3rd century 
B.C., the titles now conferred are not to be regarded as other 
than official distinctions of a peculiar class, and cannot rightly be 
considered as bestowing aristocratic position or privilege in the 
European sense. The nine degrees of nobility, indeed, which are 
conferred at the present day, and which are either heritable within 
certain limits — site siJi jft ^ — or hereditary for ever, — she sVi wang 
^ ^* "K fi S § — ^^® granted exclusively as rewards for military 
services. The titles from the highest to the third degree, as set 
forth in the following table, are designated Ch^ao PHn j^ |{p, or 
" excelling rank " : — 

455. — She Tsioh •{£ ||. — Hereditary Nobility. 

RANKS. 

Of each of these five ranks, which are some- 
times rendered in English by the titles duke, 
marquis, earl, viscount, and baron, there are 
y three classes or degrees. To the titles of the first, 
second, and third ranks, laudatory (kia ming 
jft^) are appended, significative of the special 
services by which the rank has been earned, 
vi. ICing Ch^e Tu-yiX H i$ iP M« 
vii. K'i Tu ri2 jg i 1^. 



i. Kung ^ 

ii. How j^ 

iii. Fell i(x 

iv. Tsze ^ 

V. Nan 15 



TITLES OF HONOUR, AND DECORATIONS. 63 

viii. YUn KH r« g H ^. 

ix. NgSn KH Yu ,g, jg ^. 

All the above titles, the ninth excepted, are hereditary during 
a specified number of lives, ranging from 26 for a Kung of the 
first class to 1 for a Yan KH Yu, 

The lower titles, beginning with No. 6, have occasionally the 
degree next above them "annexed*' {Kien ^), the bearer being 
thus enabled to rank "with, but after," possessors of the title 
immediately preceding. 

Any one of the above titles may be conferred posthumously 
{tsing ^) on ofiicers killed in battle, and thus become hereditary. 

Beside this, a form of reward for meritorious public servants 
is provided in the shape of hereditary official rank bestowed upon 
the sons, grandsons, younger brothers, or nephews, with due regard 
to seniority, of the person whom it is thus seen fit to distinguish. 
This form of reward is termed Nahi Yin J@, ^. By a special 
enactm^t, moreover, officials whp may lose their lives at sea or 
on any of the inner waters whilst engaged in the public service, 
are entitled to receive posthumous titles of honour according to 
their degrees of rank, and official rank is furthermore bestowed 
upon the eldest son of any such individual. This is designated 
Nan Yin ||| ]^ (hereditary distinction conferred as a reward for 
suffering in the public service). 

456.— FliNG TsMg ^ H.— Titles of Honour. 

The system of conferring titles of honour is one of the most 
frequent forms of reward for merit or service, or of Imperial 
bounty on occasions of rejoicing. These titles may either be 
conferred — aJww |g — upon an official in person, or bestowed — 
feng ^ — upon his wife, or his parents or grandparents, whilst 
still living, or, lastly, they may be granted as a posthumous 
distinction — taing ^ — to his deceased progenitors. The patents 
by which these titles are conferred are designated Kao Ming |§ ^ 
for all ranks from the 1st to the 5th inclusive, and Ch^e Ming j^ ^ 
for all the inferior ranks. The following are the titles conferred 
upon civilian functionaries or their connections, in the various 
degrees of rank : — 



64 PART VIII. — HEREDITARY RANKS, 

Title of Functionary. Wife's Title. 

1 a. Kwang Luh Ta Fu *i»:fc*] — 55 * A 

1 b. Yung Luh Ta Fu S5fi*^ ) ^»* ^'^^ ^" •^^^• 

2 a. Taze Ch^g Ta Fu Sflgtlfc*]. — i5 * A 

2 b. T'ung FSng Ta Fu 5i*:fc^) Urh FHn Fu Jen. 

3 a. r^wn(7 7 Ta Fu 5i%^*) Jli A 

3 b. Chung I Ta Fu t^Wi^^) Shuh Jen. 

4 a. Chung Hien TaFu +3R:fc*l M A 

4 b. a^ao I Ta Fu |a«:fc*) ^""S' «^^^ 

5 a. F^g Ching TaFu H^}^^^) !£ A 

5 b. FSng Chih Ta Fu *|iL**]/ JSn. 

6 a. a^% m Lang ^ ^ &^\ ^ A 

6 b. Ju Lin Lang • fl| ^ fiB ) ^?<3in Jin. 

7 a. TF^ Zfn Lang 'iC W ^\ 81 A 

7 b. Ch'ing She Lang ^ ft $^] Ju Jin. 

8 a. /Sm ChUi Lang Ht M &^\ A £ HI A 

8 b. Siu Chih TsoLang ifH^ifPa F'in Ju Jin. 

9 a. r% 5A« Za«y a ft J^) ^d'p 81 A 

9 b. Ting Site TsoLang Sft ^j^J ) Kiu FHn Ju Jin. ' 

Note. — Officials of the class of Li Yuan ^ P, i.«., such as 
have gained admission into the public service, by examination, 
from among the ranks of the clerks, shu pan ^ H^, in the Govern- 
ment Boards at Peking, may receive the following titles of 
honour: — 

6 a. Saan Tih Lang Jg (g J^. 

7 a. SUan I Lang ^ V^ $^. 

The titles exhibited in the foregoing list are set forth in 
all historical State papers and family records, on funeral cards, 
ancestral tablets, and tombstones. They are also frequently 
displayed on ornamental boards placed over the entrances to 
dwelling-houses. The patents . (referred to above) are inscribed 
on long scrolls of damasked silk, woven in five colours, with 
figures of the phoenix in relief, upon which the particulars of 



TITLES OF HONOUR, AlTD DECORATIONS. , 65 

the grant are inscribed saccessively in the Chinese and Manchu 
languages. 

Military officials receive similar patents conferring honorary 
titles of a martial character. The first and second degrees of rank 
are invested with the title tsiang kUn ^ ^, to which appropriate 
epithets are prefixed, whilst the lower degrees receive the titles 
Tu Yn $Si ]^, K}i Yu J|f JH", and Hiax> Yu ^ ^ with similar 
prefixes. 

457» — Shanq Kung % ^. — Distinctions for Merit. 

Although rewards for distinguished service, or marks of 
Imperial favour, the conception of which resembles in some degree 
that of the European system of Boyal or national Orders and 
medals of distinction, are to be found in China, nothing in the 
shape of an actual Order of Merit, approximating to th6 European 
type, has been adopted by the Chinese Government. In Japan, 
on the contrary, as is well known, an Order of the European kind 
was instituted in 1875, with the designation HUn Ting Shang P^ai 
W^ ^ H ^ ^^^ '^^ various classes of decoration. The term 
kUn p^ai ^ j[$ was at the same time selected to denote the medals 
which it was decreed should be awarded for military services. 
Isolated distinctions* have indeed been conferred in China on 
foreigners of various nationalities, principally for services rendered 
in the command of drilled troops during the Taiping rebellion, and 
subsequently in the collection of the Customs' revenue, which are 
known, with reference to the European term "star," by the 
designation pao sing ^ £; but as these are bestowed, for the 
most part, by provincial authorities, and without the sanction of 
any established rule or recognized statutes, such as are required to 
constitute what is commonly known as an "Order," the badges 
thus conferred can scarcely be regarded as having a real value as 
authentic marks of distinction. The Imperial decorations for merit 
established under the reigning dynasty are as follows : — 

458. — HiNG KwA fj ^.— The Eiding-cape. 

This distinction, the most coveted form of reward for military 




PART VIII. — HEREDITARY RANKS, 

services, is better known as the Hwang Ma Kwa XJ[§^ or Tellow 
Riding Jacket, although this is but one form of the privileged style 
of dress. According to the Imperial regulation, the Cape, which 
is worn only when in personal attendance upon the sovereign in 
the field, or upon journeys, is of the colour of the Banner to which 
the Princes, nobles, or other members of the Banner force upon 
whom it is conferred, may belong. Officers of the Body-guard and 
Ministers of the Presence are, however, entitled to wear a yellow 
cape, irrespectively of their Banner: and in general, at the present 
day, the Yellow Riding Jacket is the form in which the distinction 
is commonly bestowed. It has been awarded to two Europeans, 
to Lieutenant-Colonel Gordon, R.E., for his services in contributing 
to the defeat of the Taiping rebels in Kiangsu, and to M. Prosper 
Giquel, for his labours in establishing the Arsenal at Foochow, 
coupled with previous military services. 

In this connection may also be noted the privilege of " riding 
within the precincts of the Imperial Palace*' — Taze Kin Ch'Sng 
niii k^i ma fl^ ^ ^ ^ M ^ — ^^^ bestowal of which is termed 
ahang ch^ao ma ^ ]||] j^. This is an honorary distinction, fre- 
quently conferred upon eminent public functionaries, who become 
thus entitled to proceed on horseback, instead of on foot, for some 
distance within the outer gateways of the Palace when summoned 
to an audience. 

459. — Ling Che ^ ^. — The Feather, or Plume. 

The principal form of distinction for public service under the 
reigning dynasty. It is classed in different degrees as follows: — 

460.— A. K'uNG TsiOH Ling JL ^ fiH-— The Peacock 
Feather. 

This decoration is arranged in the following classes: — 

461.— i. San Yen Hwa-ling H 8ft ?E ^•— The Three- 
Eyed Peacock Feather — a distinction conferred only upon Imperial 
princes or nobles of the higher degrees, or for the most signal 
military achievements. 

462. — ii. Shwang Yen Hwa-liNq H 8ft ?B ^- — The Double- 
Eyed Peacock Feather — conferred upon dignitaries of intermediate 
rank or degree of merit. 



TITLES OF HONOUR, AND DECORATIONS. 67 

463.— iii. Tan Yen Hwa-ling M^^ ^.— The Single- 
Eyed Peacock Feather (commonly called Hwa-ling ^ ^ alone). 
This distinction is bestowed as an ordinary form of reward for 
public service, and during the last few decades has been indis- 
criminately obtainable by purchase. 

464.— B Lan Ling ]g ^.— The Blue Plume, colloquially 
termed, from its glossy blue-black tint, Lao-kwa Ling^ or the 
Crow Feather. This distinction is attributed by regulation to the 
rank and file of the Imperial guards (see No. 98), and is conferred 
as a reward for services upon officials below the sixth degree of 
rank: It is not to be confounded with the sable-tail tiao wei U J8 
(often erroneously termed fox-tail) badge which soldiers are 
entitled to wear when employed on active service. This badge is 
stated to have been introduced, originally, as a part of the uniform 
worn on the Imperial hunting expeditions. It is now commonly 
worn by all soldiers as an addition to their unifoi^. 

465. — Pa-t'u-lu E» H #• — The Bat'uru Distinction. 

The Military distinction called in Chinese Pa-t^u-lu (a repre- 
sentation of the Manchu word bdt^uru^ signifying "brave") is an 
institution dating from the early years of the present dynasty, 
and is conferred solely for active service in the field. It consti- 
tutes an order of merit partaking of some of the characteristics of 
the French Ligion dlionneur ; but its special feature of difierence 
from a European order consists in the fact that it has no outward 
mark of decoration to be worn by its possessor, in. the place 
of which there can only be reckoned the distinguishing word 
(or title) which is assigned to each recipient on the bestowal of 
the order. These specific titles may be either Manchu, Mongolian, 
or Chinese, the Manchu being considered the most honourable. 
Under this system an officer upon whom the distinction is con- 
ferred might receive the designation YVi Yung Pa-t^u-lu |jS H 
^ B i^, or "Bat^uru with the title Magnanimous Brave," and 
so forth. The title carries with it the right to wear the peacock- 
feather (see No. 463), although it seldom happens at the present 
day that the peacock-feather, lavishly awarded as this decoration 
has been of late years, is not obtained previously to the bestowa 



68 PABT Vni. — HBBEDITABY BANKS, &C. 

of the Bdt^uru; and the allowances of the bearer, when employed 
on active service, are considerably enhanced in virtue of his 
possession of the title. The Bdt'uru has been conferred upon at 
least one European, Mr. W. Mesny, a native of Jersey, for services 
rendered in the province of Kwei-chow. 

466.— KuNG P'ai 3^ m.— The Soldibb's Medal. 

This is an oblong plate of thin silver, having the character 
Shang Jjd (reward) embossed upon it, which is bestowed at reviews 
and inspections upon meritorious soldiers. 



PABT IX.— EXAHINATIOlTS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 69 



PART IX.-EXAMZNATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 

467. — K^AO She ^ ((. — The Chinese system of competition 
for civil and military degrees, which famish successful candidates 
with a passport to the public service, is organized in three principal 
gradations, under the following names: Hiang She ^ fi(, the 
Provincial Examinations, held as a rule triennially, in the autumn, 
followed by the Hwei She ^ SC^ or Metropolitan Examination, held 
at Peking in the ensuing spring, and Tien She B ^, or Palace 
Examination, at which the final award of degrees is obtained. 
Special examinations, granted in celebration of auspicious public 
events, are denominated Ngin She J9; |S(, or Examinations by 
Imperial Grace, in addition to the regular triennial occasions. 
The ^^ classes'' of graduates at the Hiang She and Hwei She respec- 
tively are termed h^o ^ and hia ^, whence the meaning of ^^ literary 
graduation " has come to be applied to these terms combined in a 
single phrase. The following are the ranks successively obtained 
under this all-important system : — 

468.— TAXING Sheng j| ^.—Student. 

The students of each district throughout the Empire undergo 
a series of preliminary examinations, before the Magistrate of their 
own district, the Prefect within whose jurisdiction they are placed^ 
and the Literary Chancellor of the province, before qualifying for 
entrance at the triennial provincial competition. A certificate of 
merit from the District Magistrate enables the candidate for 
literary honours to term himself ^^un^ sheng ^ which may be regarded 
as equivalent to Student. The candidate who is ranked first on 
the Magistrate's list has the distinguishing title of Ngan SIiow jf^ *|^. 
A person before competing for the right to term himself t'ung shSng 
is designated, in complimentary parlance, tsiln siu ^ ^, which 
may be rendered "man of promise." 

469.— Siu Ts*ai H :^. — Licentiate. 

In every second year the Literary Chancellor of each pro- 



70 PART IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 

• 

vince completes a tour of his domain, holding examinations — 
ngan-lin ^ E£ — at the different Prefectural cities. Candidates 
who are successful on these occasions obtain their first degree, and 
become entitled siu-ts^ai, which may be rendered Licentiate. The 
highest on the list receives in this category, likewise, the title 
ngan-sliow (see above). The general literary and official desig- 
nation for the siu'-ta^ai class is sheng-yUan ^ g. Two categories 
are formed by the division of the successful candidates into those of 
the "established list/' termed fu sheng ^ ^, and those of the 
"supplementary list," or tseng sheng jl§ ^, the first class repre- 
senting the number of degrees accorded by the ancient regulations, 
and the second those who are admitted under more recent ordinances, 
extending, for one reason or another, the number of degrees 
obtainable. 

470. — Lin Shan ShI&ng ]j| J^ ^.—Salaried Licentiate. 

A limited number of siu-ts^ai are annually admitted to the 
position of tin sli^g ^ ^, or lin shan slieng, so called from the 
stipends {kao hwo ^ iPj) which they receive from govemmerit {"unds. 

471. — KuNG ShSng % ^.—Senior Licentiate. 

In addition to the privilege described above, a farther series 
of advantages remain open to the licentiates who fail to obtain this 
position or to pass for a degree at the provincial examinations. 
Special examinations, granted as an act of imperial grace (see suprdy 
No. 467), enable a certain number otsiu-ts^ai to attain the position 
of ngin kung-slieng ,§, Jf 4. An examination recurring once in 
twelve years gives access to the grade of pa kung-sheng fjt^ &9 
which qualifies for admission to the metropolitan competition. Simple 
seniority admits a certain number of unsalaried licentiates to the 
grades of fu kung-sheng glj ^ ^, and sui kung-shSng ^ 3( ^ ; 
whilst for meritorious achievements at periodical examinations a 
certain number receive the title of yeo kung-sk^g fl| ^ ^. After 
the degree of fu sheng (see No. 469) has been reached, that of 
fu kung-shing P§ 9 £ or accessory Senior Licentiate may be 
obtained by purchase. 



PART IX. — fiXAMINATIOlTS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 71 

472. — Ku-jfiN 9( A. — Provincial (Ku-j^n) Graduate. 

This degree, which forms the first substantial reward of a 
student's ambition, is conferred at the Hiang Slie (see suprdy 
No. 467). Lit. des. Hiao-lien ^ jjj^. Licentiates of one or other 
of the primary degrees described above assemble at the provincial 
capital in the eighth moon of every third year (or more frequently 
on special occasions offering), to compete under the auspices of 
the Examiners appointed from Peking (see in/rdy No. 479). Of 
some ten to twelve thousand competitors, commonly described as 
slie tsze i •? ^^ scholars, barely 300 at the utmost are admitted 
to degrees, the number of which is limited by regulation. The 
successful graduates, whose names appear upon the official list, 
termed the Lung Hu Pang H J^ 1^, are said to have chung ku 
if> jfi — attained their degree — and are thenceforward known as 
ku-jSuy or ''promoted men." Their next step is to proceed to the 
capital, early in the following year, to compete at the Metropolitan 
Examination for the superior degrees (see below). Li addition 
to the actual list of graduates, about forty of the candidates, whose 
performances are adjudged as not inferior in merit to those of their 
selected competitors, are admitted to a secondary list, entitled 
fupang gi| ^ — a description oi proximd acceasit — by which means 
their names obtain the honour of publicity although they have 
failed to secure the degree competed for. The highest on the list 
of graduates receives the honorary title of kiei yUan ^ yQ; and 
the five individuals next in order are entitled king kw^ei ^ ^. 
For the encouragement of study, it is farther provided that ku-jen 
graduates who shall have attended three successive examinations — 
san ¥o H ff — for the tsin she degree (see below), without actually 
passing, shall be allowed to appear before a Commission of Selection, 
Ta T^iao ^j^ ^, which is appointed triennially after each metro- 
politan examination. On this occasion, a limited number of 
appointments to the rank of District Magistrate, and some minor 
offices at Peking, together with sundry nominations to the rank of 
Kiao Kwan ^ '^ ov district officers of instruction (see Part III, 
Nos. 303-306), are conferred upon the most approved candidates. 



72 PART IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DBGRBBS. 

KH'jin graduates are entitled by regulation to an official 
entertainment at which an ode of the Book of Poetry, entitled the 
Luh Ming |g l]^, should be chanted. The banquet is accordingly 
known by this name. As a special mark of respect for old age, it 
is farther ordained that a kii-jen graduate who shall reach the sixtieth 
anniversary of his examination, thus completing an entire cycle 
according to the Chinese reckoning, shall "repair a second time to 
the Luh Ming banquet" — Cheung fu Luh Ming fi ^ ^ ^ — 
for which purpose certain ceremonies and imperial donations are 
prescribed. 

The kil'jen degree is also bestowed as an honorary reward 
upon candidates above the age of 80 or of 90, who have presented 
themselves at repeated examinations without passing, and who 
comply with certain specified requirements. 

473. — TsiN She jH i. — Metropolitan Graduate. 

This degree is obtained at Peking, by triennial (or special) 
competition among the ku-jen assembled from the provinces, to 
the number of about six thousand, out of whom some 325 to 350 
obtain a successful result. The provincial graduates, or ku taze 
^ -^F, after assembling at the capital early in the Spring following 
the examinations at which they have severally passed, are required 
to undergo a test examination, fu «Ae J| gj, which qualifies 
them for admission to the Hwei She ^ |^, or metropolitan 
competition. The graduates who prove successful at this examina- 
tion become entitled kwig she ^ j; during the period which 
still intervenes between the publication of the lists and their final 
competition. This takes place within the precincts of the Imperial 
Palace itself, and is hence called Tien She ^ gj, or Palace Exa- 
mination. The essays written on this occasion are scrutinized 
and classified by a special Commission of Imperial Eevisers, 
entitled Yiieh Kuan Ta Ch^Sn B9 ^ ;^ S* According to their 
order of merit, as ascertained by this crowning test, the graduates 
now receive, usually in the proportion of about one in three, 
admission into the ranks of the Hanlin, or College of scholars 
par excellence (see Part II, No. 201). The highest in order of merit 
are distinguished by various titles, as seb forth below; and the 



PABT IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 73 

remainder are classed as tsin sJie of three classes ( — kia ^ , see 
below). Some days after the publication of these awards, a fresh 
competition, entitled Ch^ao K'ao ^ ^, or the Court Examination, 
is held in the Palace, a theme selected by the Emperor himself 
being given out for the compositions required. The graduates 
are subsequently admitted to audience, whereupon a certain 
number belonging to the second and third classes of the graduates 
are honoured with the title shu hi slie, or Bachelor of the Hanlin 
(see Part II, No. 210); the remainder, as idn she^ receive appoint- 
ments either to provincial ofEces, as District Magistrates in ex- 
pectancy, or to minor ranks in connection with the Six Boards at 
Peking. 

474. — Chwang Yuait ^ jj;.— Optimus. 

The title conferred at the Palace Examination (see above) 
on the most approved scholar among the competing metropolitan- 
graduates. The recipient of this, the highest literary award, 
becomes entitled to enter upon the rank of Han^lin Yuan Siu Chwan 
(see Part II, No. 207). To have produced a chwang yUan is 
rejoiced in as a lasting honour by the disti;ict whence the fortimate 
candidate proceeds. 

475.— Pang Yen Ijj^ B|. — Secundus. 

The title conferred upon the graduate ranked second in order 
of merit at the Palace Examination (see suprdy No. 473). 

476.— T^AN HwA Jg ^!g.— Tebtius. 

The candidate who secures this distinctive title, together with 
the Pang Yen (see above), becomes invested with the rank of 
Pkn Siu (see Part II, No. 208). The two together constitute, in 
company with the Chwang-yUanj the first class, yih kia — ^, of 
the year, and are designated tsin-she kih ti jH it !?S^ SIf* 

477. — Oh^wan Lu ^ ]||. — QuAETus. 

This title is bestowed upon the candidate graduating at the 
head of the second class, urh kia JH ^, at the Palace Examina- 
tion. The remainder of this class take rank as Shu Ki Site (see 
Part II, No. 210). They are designated tem-sJie eh^u ah&n j^ j; 
|{{ $[[. The designation i^ung tein'-ahe ch^u ehen |3 jft db ttl ^ ^^ 



74 PART IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 

bestowed upon the graduates of the third and last class^ of whom 
the highest take rank as Shu Ki She and the remainder simply as 
tsin she. 

^^*^ Examinations for military degrees follow precisely th« 
same course and give access to the same degrees as those for the 
civil career, with the character wu (military) prefixed. Examina- 
tions are likewise held for Manchus qualifying as interpreters 
{/an-yih ^ gj) in the language of their race, and who receive 
degrees as in the ordinary literary course. 

478.— HiAO Lien Fang ChIing ^ ^ # jE- — Worthies of 
Literature. 

This is an honorary title bestowed by Imperial grace on 
obscure scholars who are specially recommended by provincial 
authorities for examination and the bestowal of official rank, in 
conformity with ancient precedent. 

The following are the most important among the titles employed 
in connection with the Literary Examinations: — 

479.— ChSng K^ao Kwan jE ^ 'g. — Chief Examiner; the 
president specially appointed for each provincial or metropolitan 
examination. For the provincial examinations, Vice-Presidents 
of the Metropolitan Boards or Courts are selected; whilst for the 
examinations at Peking, a Grand Secretary or President of a Board 
is named as Chief Examiner. Lit. des. Ta Taung Ts^ai :K; IB ^ ; 
Common des. Ta Chu JS^ao 5!C i ^• 

480. — Fu K^AO Kwan g|| ^ ^ ^Assistant Examiner; 

appointed to assist the functionary above named. Lit. des. Fu 
Tmng Ts^ai M M Ml Common des. Fu Chu K'ao gjl i ^. 

481 .— T^UNG K*A0 Kwan (^ ^ ^.—Associate Examiners ; 
Common des. Fang Kwan '^ ^. 

482.— Nui KiEN She Kwan p) £ £{ 1^. — Lispectors. 

488.— Nui Show Chang Kwan ft Jlfc S ^.—Deputy 
Examiners. 

The above classes of officials constitute tlie Nui lAen ft jH, or 
Inner Precinct of the Examinations. The Wai Lien ^ |j|, or 
Outer Precinct, comprises the following list of functionaries: — 



PABT IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEQREEB. 75 

484, — KiBN LiN KwAN ^ (g ^. — Supervisor. This office 
is filled in the provinces by the Governor, who is said on 
this occasion to juh wei \ JfUj^j or "confine himself within the 
precincts," i.e., of the Examination Hall. At Peking the office 
is filled by a functionary selected from among the Directors of the 
various Courts. Lit. des. Che Kung Ku ^ ]| 9^. 

485.— T^i-TiAO • KwAN H IH ^.—Proctor; the official 
charged with the general supervision and control of the candidates 
during the examination. 

486.— Wai Kien-she KwaN 9h |S SC §. — Comptroller of 
the Outer Precinct. 

487. — Wai Show Chang Kwan ^ IK J|E 'g.— Receiver of 
the Essays. 

488.— Mi FfiNG Kwan ^ f^ 'g.— Sealer of the Essays. 
489.— T^liNG LuH Kwan 0^1^.— Transcriber of the Essays. 

490.— Tui TuH Kwan 3^ H 'g.— Comparer of the Essays. 

491.— Yin Kuan Kwan pp § 'g.— Stamper of the Essays. 

The five above-named offices are filled by appointments from 
among Secretaries of the Boards who have themselves taken their 
degree. 

Beside the above, a number of additional posts exist in 
connection with the police and internal management of the 
Examination Halls, to which special appointments are made, as in 
the foregoing instances, at each recurring period. 

491a. — Shan Chang jIj ^. — President of a College. 

This title is bestowed upon the officials who ar^ employed to 
superintend the studies prosecuted by advanced scholars at the 
various provincial capitals, usually those who have already acquired 
the hutr-jen degree, with a view to qualifying for the higher examina- 
tions. The institutions at which these studies are pursued are 
known as Shu YUan ^ J^, which may be rendered by the 
term ^^ College," and each has farther a distinctive name derived 
either from the locality in which it is situated or from some 



76 PART IX. — EXAMINATIOJrS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 

classical quotation. The Colleges, of which one or more are to be 
found at each provincial capital, where they represent the position 
assigned at Peking to the Kwoh TszeKien (see Part II, No. 247), 
are in most cases endowed from the provincial revenues, and 
certain stipends are paid to the graduates who frequent them as 
well as to the tutors who are employed in their instruction. The 
chief superintendents, or shan change are frequently retired officials 
of high rank. By a decree of the Emperor K'ien Lung, which, 
however, is usually ignored in practice, the designation ahan chang 
was ordered to be exchanged for Yoan chang |^ ^j as a more 
dignified epithet than that popularly in use. 



PART X. — ^BUDDHISM AND TAOISM. 77 



PART X.-BUDDHISM AND TAOISM. 

The Chinese official system, which allows no condition of the 
body politic to remain, in theory at least, unprovided with means 
for its control, includes among its administrative rules a complete 
scheme of ecclesiastical gradations of rank and authority in con- 
nection with the priesthood of both the Buddhist religion and the 
Taoist order. Whilst refraining from interference with the internal 
organization of either of these bodies, or with the admission of 
members to their ranks, the imperial Institutes provide a frame- 
work in harmony with the all-pervading official system, to be 
grafted upon the hierarchy as it is found in either case developed 
according to its own traditional rules. The complicated and costly 
organization of the Tibetan form of Buddhism, which has been 
created by the emperors of the reigning dynasty, is a subject 
entirely distinct from the more ancient and orthodox type which 
constitutes the religion par excellence of the Chinese people; and 
the Lamaist hierarchy is left aside in this place, to be separately 
dealt with in Part XII below. For the control of the Buddhist 
priesthood, official ranks are established according to the following 
scale: 

492.— SfiNG LuH SzB ff ^ -g.— Superior. 

Two office-bearers invested with this title are appointed in 
each district, department, and prefecture throughout the Empire, 
as principal and deputy, the chief being distinguished as C/ieng 
Yin IE HI J or principal, and the second in order as Fu Yin g|J fp> 
or deputy, holder of the seal. The appointment is made by the 
local authority by selection from among the leading abbots {fang 
cliang ')J ft) of monasteries, and is submitted for approval, when 
made by subordinate officials, to the provincial government. The 
superior thus appointed acts as the medium of communication 
between the secular authorities and the priesthood, for whose 
general good conduct he is considered responsible, and over whom, 
in cases of litigation among themselves, he exercises certain judicial 



78 PART X. — BUDDHISM AND TAOISM, 

powers. The Sing Luh Sze of the metropolitan district is a person 
enjoying much consideration and wielding no small amount of 
authority; but the position elsewhere is attended with little respect. 
Distinctive titles are held by the incumbents of the office, according 
to the rank of the territorial division to which they belong. These 
titles are as follows : 

493. — SfiNG Kang ff iM. — Superior of the Buddhist priest- 
hood in a Fu or prefecture. The full title is Seng Kang Sze Tu 
Kang f^ IH 'i^ tf IN* The secondary degree of the ninth rank is 
assigned to holders of this office. 

494. — SfiNG ChSng If J£. — Superior of the Buddhist priest- 
hood in a Chow or department. 

495. — SfeNG HwEi ff ^.—Superior of the Buddhist priest- 
hood in a Hien or district 

Beside the foregoing, a certain number of ranks are provided 
by regulation, apparently for bestowal by way of distinction upon 
deserving members of the priesthood. They are but little, if at 
all, in use at the present day. The following is the list of these 
ranks as officially recognized : — 

496.— Tso and Yeo Shan She £ ^ ft -jft.— Preceptor 
(principal and secondary) ; 6 a. 

497.— Tso and Yeo Shan Kuo 2£ ^ W JR.— Preacher 
(principal and secondary) ; 6 b. 

498.— Tso and Yeo Kiang King £ ^ 91 jg.— Expositor 
(principal and secondary) ; 8 a. 

499.— Tso and Yeo Kioh I &7^9t H-— Clerk (principal 
and secondary) ; 8 b. 

For the control of the Taoist priesthood a similar organization 
is provided, centreing in the patriarch or hereditary chief of the 
order, the Heavenly Master Chang, or Cliafig T^ien She ^JifSHj 
in whose person the spirit of one of the earliest of the Taoist 
mystics is reputed to reside (see I7ie Chinese Reader's Manualj 
p. 11). The following are the ranks of the official Taoist 
hierarchy: — 

500.— Tag Luh Sze ^ ^ ^.—Superior. An appoint- 



PART X. — BUDDHISM Al^D TAOISM. 79 

ment corresponding in all respects with that of the Superior of the 
Buddhist order (see mpra^ No. 492). 

501. — Tag Ki ^ J£. — Superior of the Taoist priesthood in 
a Fu or prefecture; 9 b. The full title is Tao Ki Sze Too Ki 

502. — Tag CHfeNG JS J£. — Superior of the Taoist priesthood 
in a CAow or department. 

503. — Tag Hwei ^ ^. — Superior of the Buddhist priest- 
hood in a Hien or district. 

In addition to the foregoing, a number of offices, with corre- 
sponding rank according to the Chinese official scale, are established 
with reference to the Taoist priests who are connected with the 
State temples devoted to the worship of the powers of Nature. 
Hiese are as follows: — 

504.— TsG and Yeg Cheng Yih & 7^ j£ —.—Director 
(principal and secondary) ; 6 a. 

505.— TsG and Yeg Yen Fah 2E © fS }§|.— Hierophant 
(principal and secondary); 6 b. Employed in performing the 
stated acts of sacrifice in the Imperial temples. 

506. — TsG^and Yeg Che Ling 2£ ^ S ft.— Thaumaturgist 
(principal and secondary); 8 a. These "miracle-workers" are 
employed at the State temples in services specially intended as acts 
of propitiation in times of flood or drought. A corresponding 
office is filled by priests designated Yin Yang Cheng Shuh ^|S1E% 
in the temples dedicated to the presiding spirit (^Ch'eng Hwang 
Miao j^ (£ id) of prefectural cities. 

507. — TsG and Yeg Che I ^ ^ 31 tl- — Priest of the lowest 
order (principal and secondary) ; 8 b^ 



80 PART XI.— MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 



PART XI.-MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 

508. — Wai Fan Jr[> j|f. — The Dependencies of the 
Empire. 

Under the institutes of the reigning dynasty, the bulk of the 
tribes composing the Mongolian nationality are primarily divided 
into two great classes, the Niii ^ and Wai ^ Mung Ku HI *]£?, 
or the Inner and the Outer Mongols. Both are placed under the 
control of the Li Fan Yuan or Mongolian Superintendency (see 
Part II, No. 183), together with the governments of the region of 
Hi, which includes Eastern Turkestan or Kashgaria, and of Tibet. 
Inner Mongolia is that portion of the Mongol territory which 
borders upon China Proper and Manchuria, along the whole of the 
north-eastern and eastern frontier. Outer Mongolia encloses the 
Inner region with a vast semi-circular sweep, and is itself con- 
terminous on the west and north with the territories of the Russian 
Empire. The Inner Mongols are otherwise known as those of the 
Forty-nine Banners, from the military divisions in which they are 
grouped. They represent, with the Ch^ahar tribe, which forms a 
separate organization (see infrciy No. 526), the sections of the 
Mongol race which were foremost in submitting to the Manchii 
invaders of China in the first half of the seventeenth century. 
The Outer Mongols comprise the Khalkha and Kalmuk (or Eleuth) 
and other tribes, which will be found treated of below (see infrd^ 
No. 516). 

509.— Nui Mdng-ku ft ^ igf. — The Inner Mongols. 
The Forty-nine Banners of the Inner Mongols at the present day 
are directly descended from the organization adopted by the 
successors of Chinghiz Khan during their tenure of power as 
masters of the greater part of Asia, and continued by their 
descendants after the expulsion of the Yiian dynasty from the 
throne of China. The Mongols of the fourteenth century were 
organized in six grand divisions, known as the Djirgughan Tumen, 
or Six Ten Thousands, which again were arrayed in two sections, 



PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 



81 



termed the right and left wings, the left occupying the eastern, 
and the right the western, half of the Mongolian territory. 
Apparently in imitation of this earlier system of organization, the 
Banners of the Inner Mongols are divided into six meng Jg, or 
leagues (Mong. chogolgdn), which embrace the whole of the 
twenty-four pu ^, or tribes (Mong. aimak §^ 311 j£) under which 
they are distributed. Before proceeding to elucidate the titles of 
the hereditary or appointed rulers of the Mongol tribes, a list of the 
various administrative divisions must be given. The transliteration 
of their respective names, as represented in Chinese characters, has 
been undertaken with special, although not invariable, deference 
to the authority of I. J. Schmidt, the translator of the chronicle 
of Ssanang Setzen, whose labours form, with the writings of 
D'Ohsson, the basis of the recent compilation entitled History of 
the Mongols; by Henry H. Howorth^ London^ 1876 — a work 
which may be usefully consulted for detailed information with 
reference to the Mongol tribes. 

510. — I. Chbrim League 

1. Khorch^n tribe 

2. Djalaid 

3. Turbet 

4. Qhorlos 

511. — II. Chosot'u League 

5. Kharach^n tribe 

6. T'umed „ 

51 2. — III. Chad Uda League 

7. Ao-khan tribe 

8. Naiman 

9. Barin 

10. Djarud „ 

11. Aru Khorch4n ,, 

12. Ongniod ,, 

13. Keshikhteng „ 

14. Khalkha (one tribe 
from the left wing) 



J) 



j> 



>? 



>> 



)j 



eM?f:ai- 




mn^- 


6 banners. 


fLiE#- 


1 banner. 


*fc W f6 !|#. 


1 » 


Mmmn- 


2 banners. 


J$^il9§- 




^mm ii^- 


3 ,, 


±mm- 


2 „ 


03 ,i H 91- 




^w- 


1 banner. 


^M- 


1 „ 


E W' 


2 banners. 


JLnfift- 


2 „ 


mm^m\i^- 


2 „ 


^"^A^- 


1 banner. 


%i\'%m- 


1 „ 


^filS$£S- 


1 » 



82 PART XI.— MONGQLIA AND TURKESTAN. 

51 3.— IV. SiLiNGHOL League ^ # IR ^ £. 

15. Uchumuch^in tribe J^ 3|c iS iJS- 2 banners. 

16. Khaochid n JS i # 2 „ 

17. Sunid » iS ^ ift 2 „ 

18. Abaga » P^ E I® 2 „ 

19. Abaganar „ P^f B «& Ift li 2 „ 
514.— V. Ulan Ch^ap League ^M^^ H- 

20. Sze TszePuLoh tribe H •? ^ i^ or 
Durban Keuked „ 1 banner. 

21. Mow Mingan „ :3g ^ ^ 1 „ 

22. Urad » ,i 8H # 3 banners. 

23. Khalkha (one tribe 1$ 1| ^ :& H 1 banner. 

from the right wing) 
51 5.— VI. Ikh Chao League ^ jg BS 5|. 

24. Ordos (Ortous) tribe fP If ^ ^ 7 banners. 

With the tribe of the Ordos there are amalsramated certain 
fragments of the Teamed tribe, occupying the region adjacent to 
Kwei Hwa Ch^eng, lying to the north-east of the Great Bend of 
the Yellow River. 

51 6. — Wai Mung-ku ^ ^ igf . — The Outer Mongols. 

Outer Mongolia comprises the territory of the Khalkhas, 
extending from the north-eastern termination of the desert of Gobi 
(Sha-mo ^ ^) to the borders of Russian Siberia, and of the 
Kalmuks, or Western Mongols, otherwise known as Eleuths or 
Oelot. 

517. — Khalkha V^ ^ ^.— The Khalkha nation comprises 
the tribes of the Mongols which, owing probably to their greater 
remoteness, maintained to a much later date than the tribes of 
the Forty-nine Banners, described above, their independence of 
the Manchu sovereignty. They constitute four great pu ^ or 
tribes, three of which are still governed by hereditary rulers bear- 
ing the title Khan (in Chinese, ^Han ff). The number of banners 
distributed among the four tribes is eighty-three, beside the two 
banners which, as is shewn above (see Nos. 512 and 514) have 
been incorporated with the Inner Mongols. By the addition of 



FART ZI.— UOKOOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 83 

two banners of Oelots and one of Khoits, the number of the 
banners of the Khalkhas is brought up to 86 in alL The four 
great divisions bear the following names : 

i. The T^ushet^u Khanate ± IB ■ ff iS5 20 banners, 
ii. The Tsetsen „ ¥ E tt flS 23 „ 

ill. The Dzassakt'u „ JL S 3£ ■ ff IC 18 „ 
iv. The Sain-noin tribe H ^ IS ffl ^ 22 „ 

The town of Urga, or K*u-lun (Kurun) |^ |^, situated within 
the territory of the T^ushet^u Khan, is the administrative centre 
of the northern and eastern Khalkha tribes. It is the residence 
of the Cheptsun Dampa Hut*ukht*u (see Part XII, No. 598), a 
Lamaist dignitary of the most venerated order, through whose 
spiritual influence the Chinese Imperial Agent (see in/rd. No. 556) 
maintains his authority over the Khalkha chiefs. The Western 
Khalkhas, i.e., the Dzassakt^u and Sain-noin tribes, are under the 
rule of the Military Governor of Uliasut'ai (see i/j/Vd, No. 552). 
A chain of frontier posts, known as K'a-Iun -^ j^ {Kanin, called 
Caron, or Carou by a misprint, in the writings of the Jesuits of 
the last century), runs along the border of the Khalkha territory, 
where it adjoins the Russian possessions, and at each post a small 
military colony under a chief having the title cliang king ;§[ tJC 
(see Part VI, No. 385, and in/rd, No. 541) is established. The 
line of frontier is marked by piles of stones, called ob6 ^ fH, and 
the space intervening between two such frontier-marks is termed 
by the Mongols sahu m ^. The khans of the Khalkhas testify 
their allegiance to the Chinese sovereign by an annual presentation 
of tribute, designated as the Kiu Feh ^ ^ or Nine White 
[Animals], consisting of eight horses and a camel, all pure white 
in colour. 

Next in importance to the Khalkhas are the Kalmuks or 
Western Mongols — Eleuths, etc. — bearing six tribal designations 
as shewn below : — 

518.— i. Oklot (Elbuth) jg # «r, or jg i^ #.— The 
Kalmuks or Western Mongols. 

The term Kalmuk (or Kalmuck) by which the Western 



84 PABT XI. — ^MONGOLIA AITD TUBEXSTAK. 

Mongols are known to European authors, is unknown to the 
Chinese, who designate the leading tribes of this once powerful 
division of the Mongols by the name given above. Several 
derivations for the word Kalmuk have been suggested by different 
authors, whose speculations are assembled by Howorth {Hist of 
the Mongols, p. 497). In the word Oelot, which the French 
missionary authors of the last century transcribed as Eleuth, the 
Chinese themselves trace an obvious relationship with the Wa-la 
%i 8H (Wara, or Oirad), the designation applied to the leading 
tribe jsvith which the eariier sovereigns of the Ming dynasty 
warred and negotiated. Having overspread the region north of 
the T4en Shan, including the modern territory of Hi, the chieftains 
of the Oelot tribes founded, early in the 17th century, a dominion 
known as that of Sungar, or Dzungar fp |!§ 1^, which was 
eventually shattered by the arms of the Emperor K'ang Hi, and 
finally overthrown by the invasion of their territory (Sungaria) in 
1757 by a Chinese and Manchu army despatched against them by 
the emperor KMen Lung. During the period of its independent 
existence, {lie Sungar nation was divided into four tribes, known 
to the Chinese as the four Weirad ^j Pjp) ^ ( Mong. Durben 
Oirad, said to signify the Four Allies) in which the perhaps 
derivative sounds of the Oelot or Oirad form of designation may 
clearly be recognized. Without entering here upon an enquiry 
into the dispersion and gradual reassembly of the Oelot tribes, a 
task more appropriately and fully dealt with elsewhere, the follow- 
ing enumeration of the remaining divisions of the Kalmuk tribes 
is proceeded with : — 

519. — ii. TuRBET (Tourbeth) :H: ^ fjgf S#---A division of 
the Kalmuks or Oelot, now organized in two chogolgdn or leagues 
(see below). 

520.— iii. TuRGUT (Tourgouth) Jfet W )! J^.— This large 
division of the Kalmuks is declared by the celebrated Chinese 
Minister of State, Sung Yiin, in his work (dated A.D. 1823) on 
the Mongol tribes, to be identical with the Turbets (see above) and 
to represent one of the four tribes or Wei rat of the Sungar nation 
(see No. 518). The Turgut now form five c/u>golgdn or leagues. 



PART XI. — MONGOLU AND TURKESTAN, 



85 



521. — iv. The Khoshoit ^ftHdif^. — A southern branch of the 
Kalmuks, whose principal seat is in the neighbourhood of Kokonor, 
although a part of them are found at present, constituting one 
chogolgdn, on the north-eastern frontier of China. 

522. — V. The Khoit j^ ^. — A small tribe associated with 
the Khoshoit. 

523.— vi. The Ch^oros ^ ^ ^.— The sixth and last of the 
divisions of the Kalmuk tribes. 

524.— Ts'iNG Hai Mung-ku iH f^ SIe tS*.— The Mongols 
OF Kokonor. 

The disintegration of the Western Mongols, as a result of 
the wars of the last century with Tibet and China, has caused 
repeated displacements to befall the various tribes, and has led 
to their being distributed under several distinct jurisdictions. 
Twenty-nine banners, all but one of which are of Kalmuk origin, 
are now seated in the region of Kokonor and on the northern 
borders of Tibet, in the territory anciently known as Tangut The 
following is the list of the tribes of Kokonor, who ar§ placed under 
the sway of the Imperial Controller General at Si-ning (see in/ra, 
No. 562) :— , , , 

Khoshoit ../ ... ... ••• ... 21 banners. 



1. 



ii. Ch'oros 
iii. Khoit 
iv. Turgut 
V. Khalkha 



525. — Alashan Mung Ku pl ^ 
OF Alashan. 



jj 



1 banner. 
4 banners. 
1 banner. 

|g "jSf. — The Mongols 



These are the tribes settled in the region north of Ning-hia 
in the province of Kansuh and along the Western Bend of the 
Yellow River, extending as far as the western extremity of the 
Great Wall and the desert of Gobi. They are Kalmuks by 
descent. Four tribes, of those already enumerated above, have 
formed offshoots in the region tributary to the Prince of Alashan 
PjIIJe; HIK 2, constituting 3^ banners in all, distributed as follows : 



86 PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 

i. Si T^ao Oelot TS^ E^ #.— The Oelots of the Western 
Bend of the Yellow River. 

ii. EdsinS Turgut is $¥ IB ± W S ^.— The Turguts of 
the river Edsine or Edsinei. 

iii. Turret ij^ J^ i^ !|#. — A portion of the Turbet tribe. 

iv. Khoshgit ft ^ !|f .—As above. 

. 526. — Yeo Muh ^ 4Sl- — The Herdsmen Tribes. 
Under this designation the Chinese ofHcially class the Mongol 
tribes who are placed under the direct government of the high 
authorities of the frontier, and especially the Ch'ahar, to whom 
the territory lying in immediate proximity to the Great Wall, and 
nearest to the imperial capital, was assigned after they had sub- 
mitted themselves to the Manchu conquerors of China. Unlike 
the Mongols of the Forty-nine Banners, they are denied the 
privilege of being ruled by titular tsHn wang or Princes, but on 
the other hand they are organized under eight Banners on the 
same footing as the Manchu military forces. Their distinctive 
title of yeo muh or "nomade herdsmen" is derived from the 
interdict against engaging in agricultural pursuits, and their 
restriction to the pasturage of flocks and herds, which was imposed 
upon them by their new masters. Within their territory are 
situated the imperial pasturages, or muh ch'ang tfy^ J^, upon which 
the herds and flocks specially pertaining to the imperial house- 
hold and the stud department are reared. A recent enumeration 
Jaas given the number of about 100,000 horses, 7,000 camels, 
200,000 sheep, and 12,000 horned cattle, upon these pasturages. 
The following are the tribes coming under the category of the 
nomade herdsmen. 

527.— Ch^ahar ^ »& f|.— The Ch'ahar (or Ohakhar) tribe. 
(See suprdj No. 526, and infrd^ No. 550.) 

628.— Bargu E W if.— The Bargu tribe. This tribe 
has been incorporated with the Ch^ahar, conjointly with whom, 
and a portion of the Oelot and T^umed tribes, who have similarly 
been annexed to the Ch^ahar, they are placed partly under the 
control of the military Lieutenant-Governor residing at Kalgan 



PART XI. — ^MONGOLIA AND TURKKSTAK. 87 

(see tn/rd, No. 550) and partly under that of the military Lien- 
tenant-Governor of Jeh-ho (see vafra^ No. 548). 

529. — Uriakghai % |j| ji||. — The tribes of Urianghai or 
Uriankai, the territory occupying the extreme north-west of the 
Chinese dominions, now placed tinder the administration of the 
Military Governor of Uliasutai (see tn/ra, No. 552). 

530. — MiNGAD ^ |ig !($. — The Mingad, a small tribe of 
nomades, occupying the region north-east of Uliasutai. 

531. — Djakch'in ft B^ j;(j,.— The Djakch4n or Dzakhach^in 
tribe, a remnant of the Sungar nation, associated with the fore- 
going. 

532. — ^Hasak B& m jg.— The Khassak (Cossack) or 
Kirghis, identified by the Chinese with the K'ang-kii J^f J^ of 
antiquity, and probably the same with the Kankal or Kankar of 
western geographers. In 1757, the Khan of the Kirghis tendered 
his allegiance to the sovereign of China, on the annexation of the 
territory of Sungaria being completed. Sung Yiin, in the work 
already quoted from, describes the region inhabited by the Kirghis 
as bounded on the north by the Russian possessions, and on the 
south-west by the land of the Buruts ^ ^ ^ (known as the 
black Kirghis). They own allegiance, he farther observes, to 20 
6t^ok fP fS ]£ or chieftains. Their rulers are known as 'jpi (pih) 
Jt, which he identifies with the term f|§ ^ or beg. 

533.— BuRiAT a^ ffi iH ^.— The Buriat Mongols subject to 
Russia. Simg Yiin, in the work above mentioned (vol. i, p. 22), 
observes that the Buriats owning allegiance to Russia resemble the 
Khalkhas within the Chinese border. His remarks indicate an 
appreciation of the fact that Russian civilization had already in his 
time begun to take root among them. To the west of the territory 
occupied by the Buriats, he farther states, lie the Khariat B^ m 
m !f^ (? Kerait), who are of the same stock with the T'ang-nu 
Urianghai of the Chinese territory. 

534. — Dam ^ jfc. — The Dam Mongols, occupying a portion 
of tiie frontier between Kokonor and Tibet, known as the 
region of Tsaidam ^ 9I TfC* ^is semi-savage branch of the 



88 PABT XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 

Mongol race, occupying in scattered settlements the northern 
fringe of the territory of Tibet, is probably that which is designated 
by the Tibetans ** Sok-pa," or the people of the pastures (the Chinese 
yeo muh). In this word "Sok" it might perhaps be possible to trace 
a relationship with the muh suh or muk suk '^ ^, the sweet clover 
or lucerne upon which the horses of Fergana were pastured, 
according to the reports of the earliest Chinese explorers of Central 
Asia. Sze-ma Ts'ien, the father of Chinese history, relates that 
the seeds of this clover were brought back to China by the 
imperial envoys. 

^*^ The outline of the geographical distribution and political 
grouping of the Mongol tribes, which has been given as concisely 
as possible above, is intended to serve as an introduction to the 
list of titles by which their princes, nobility, and other rulers are 
distinguished. For more minute details, the Institutes of the 
reigning Dynasty ;^j||'&Htj Books 49 to 52, which have furnished 
the groundwork of all that precedes, may be consulted. Articles 
entitled the Topography of Extra-provincial China^ in the Chinese 
Repository^ Vol. xx, p. 62, and Tlie Army of the Chinese Empire^ 
ib., p. 336, have also been placed under contribution and are 
deserving of careful study. The following are the offices and ranks 
established among the various Mongol tribes : — 

535. — MfiNG Chang g ^—Captain-General of a chogolgdn 
(meng) or league (see ante^ No. 509). This office is bestowed by 
imperial appointment, on the recommendation of the Mongolian 
Superintendency. Each league of tribes is placed under the 
supreme control of such an authority, selected from among the 
leading chieftains (dzassaks) of all the tribes of the confederation. 

536.— Fu MfiNG Chang glj S ;g.— Deputy Captain-General. 
One to each chogolgdn (as above). 

537. — DzAssAK f^, jg| ^, — Chieftain. 

This title, pronounced in southern Mongolian as Djassaky 
appears to be a derivative from the Mongol verb dzassakhoy to 
regulate or govern. With the exception of the tribes or portions 
of tribes, such as the Ch'ahar and the Pumed^ as noted above, 



PART XI. — ^UONOOLIA AND TUBKEBTAN. 89 

which are placed under the immediate government of Manchu 
generals, each Mongolian banner is ruled by a chieftain or noble 
bearing this generic designation. Among the Inner Mongols, the 
dzassak are classed in six ranks, commencing with that of TsHn 
Wang IR I, or prince of the first order, and identical in nomen- 
clature with the six highest ranks of the imperial nobility (see 
Part I, No. 17). Among the Khalkhas and other tribes of the 
Outer Mongols, the dzassak of a banner may be of any degree of 
the six ranks above named, or merely a daidji or noble (see in/rd^ 
No. 538). The position is in some cases hereditary, in others 
conferred by imperial appointment, 

538.— T^Ai-CHi •& ig.— Noble (Daidji). The daidji are 
hereditary nobles claiming descent from the founders of the 
Mongol sovereignty or from the Khans or titular "princes" and 
"dukes" of the various tribes. They correspond, consequently, 
in some respects, to the tsung-shih or imperial clansmen of the 
Chinese (see Part I, No. 29). Among the Oelot tribes, the title 
isai-sang ^ ^ was employed in the place of daidji for their 
hereditary nobles. Another term, noyen or noin ]flj ^, with the 
same meaning, was also heretofore in use among a small number 
of tribes. Four classes of the rank of daidji are recognized, of 
which the highest is on a par with the first of the Chinese official 
ranks, and so on in each class. A daidji of the first class may be 
the commandant or chief of a banner, in which case he is entitled 
to prefix the term dzassak (see above) to his tilJe, and he is invested 
with a seal of office issued by the imperial government. Daidji 
who are not endowed with official seals are subject to the authority 
of the dzassaks or chieftains of their respective banners. 

539. — T-A-PU-NANG ^ ^^ S* — Noble (Tabunang). This 
designation is confined to a portion of the T*umed and Kharach'in 
tribes alone, among which it stands as the equivalent of daidji 
(see above). 

540. — HiEH-Li T*Ar-CHi fft 8 -^ "§• — Administrator. This 
dignitary acts as assistant to the dzassak in the administration of 
the affairs of the Banner. Appointments are made to the position 
from the superior nobles of the Banner. 



90 PART XI. — ^MONGOLIA AND TUBKESTAK. 



541 .— KwAN K*i Chang King ^ ]R Jt SC-— Adjutant 
542-— KwAN K'l Fu Chang King If j|^ gl| JR SC-— Deputy 

Adjutant 

The above offices are filled by selection from among the daidji 

or nobles of each banner. 

543.— Ts^an-ling ^ S[.— Colonel. 

544.— Tso-LING is, fl|.— Lieutenant-Colonel. 

These ranks are likewise filled by selection from among the 
daidji. The tso^-ling has 150 adult males under his command, of 
whom 50 are reckoned as ma-kia j^ ^ or horse-soldiers, and 100 
as kien san SB % ^^ unemployed. 

545.— HiAO K^i HiAO ja fif ;K.— Subaltern. 

546 — LiNGTS^ui ffl fl|.— Sergeant Six in esich Uo-ling's 
command. 

547.— Orbadu fD R? E g.— The bulk of the Mongol 

population is thus designated. All families are arranged in groups 

of ten, under a ahih-chang ff* ^ or decurion. For each group of 

three ting "J* or men of military age, one soldier's allowance, kia 

Ep, is issued. 

The Frontier Commands: 

The following are the titles of the chief authorities ruling the 
'^extra-provincial** administrative divisions, under the supreme 
direction of the Li Fan Yuan or Mongolian Superin tendency (see 
Part II, No. 1^3). At their head may be placed the ''three 
Military Lieutenant-Governorships," of which two are associated 
with the province of Chihli, being subject in civil matters to the 
control of the Governor-General of that province, and the third 
(Urumts'i), forming part of the Hi command, is similarly associated 
with the province of Kansuh. They are as follows : — 

548. — i. Jbh-ho Tu-tunq ^ ^ ^ jg{.— Military Lieu- 
tenant-Governor of Jeh-ho. This large tract of country, embracing 
tlie easternmost region of the Mongol tribes, is organized in its 
southern section on the footing of a Chinese administrative division 
of the first class, under the naioe of Ch^Sng^tSh Fuh ^ D /SP< An 



PART XI.— MONGOLU AND TURKESTAN, 91 

immense tract of country, several hundred miles in length, on its 
western side, is designated the Wei Chiang ^ j^, or Hunting 
Reserves, also called Muh-lan ;|C W or muran, which during the 
earlier reigns of the present dynasty was periodically visited by 
the Emperor with a large military retinue, for purposes of the . 
chase and martial exercises (see Part VI, No. 436). Of late 
years, a population of Chinese squatters has largely encroached 
upon these reserves. The civil administration of the territory of 
Jeh-ho, apart from the prefecture of Ch*eng-teh Fu, is conducted 
under the Military Lieutenant-Governor by secretaries of the 
Mongolian Superintendency, entitled Li She Sze YUan iS^-^^? 
or Civil Commissary, and Li Hing Sze Yuan 3il ^ ^ ^^ Judicial 
Commissary. Sub-Prefects or T^ung P'an (see Part III, No. 283) 
have of late been appointed for the control of the Chinese squatters 
in the Hunting Reserves. Secretaries of the Mongolian Superin- 
tendency are also employed as Collectors of Customs at four 
points {sze shuei ^) on the Jeh-ho border-line. 

549.— li. Ch'aHar Tu-t-ung & ^ W is M —Military 
Lieutenant-Goveruijr of Ch^ahar (or Chakhar). This officer, 
residing at Chang-chia K*ow jH ^ D? the gate-town on the line 
of the Great Wall, commonly known as Kalgan, from the word 
Kalga^ or gate, in the Mongol tongue, conducts, with the assistance 
of the Fu Tu t'ung or Deputy Lieutenant-Governor, bis colleague, 
the government of the Mongol tribes whose territory extends west- 
ward from the Great Wall to the desert of (if^bi and northward to 
the land of the Khalkhas (see sup^d, No. 526). The nomade 
herdsmen of the Ch'ahar and other tribes in this region are entirely 
subject to the rule of the Tu^tung; but in civil matters relating to 

Chinese affairs within the Lieutenant-Governorship, as has been 
observed above, the Governor-General of Chihli exercises a 
superior jurisdiction. The Prefecture of Siian-hwa Fu, lying 
between the Inner and the Outer Wall, is nominally part of the 
Ch^ahar command, but in practice it is administered on the 
ordinary Chinese territorial system, under the supervision of an 
Intendant bearing the title of K'ow Peh Tao P ^t IS? residing at 
Siian-hwa Fu. Three Civil Commissaries, Li She T'unt/ Cite ^see 



92 PART XI.— MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 

Part III, No. 282), stationed respectively at Chang-chia K'ow, 
Tuh-shih K'ow, and To-lo-no*rli ( Dolon-nor) on the Mongolian 
plateau, are jointly subject to this functionary and the Military 
Lieutenant-Governor. 

550.— A-Lfe-T^Ai KtJN Ta*i W lf& S •&.— The Military 
Postroad. The Military Lieutenant-Governor of Ch^ahar is 
ex-'officio Controller of the postroads, for the conveyance of govern- 
ment despatches and the transit of officials, which extend from the 
Great Wall to the Altai {^M ^ ^^HM ^) Mountains, to 
K^urun, Uliasut'ai, etc. These roads, divided into chan f^ or 
stages, are served by detachments of Mongol tribesmen who take 
turns of duty at the kun t'ai jj^ '^ or military posts established at 
each stage. To these posts, officials throughout the Chinese 
government service are liable to be banished as the penalty of 
misconduct, but the service they are nominally required to render 
in expiation of the offence committed is in most if not in all cases 
commuted for a money payment, designated as t'ai fei -^ ^, the 
amount of which is fixed by law. The Mongol tribes along the 
line of route are required, in addition to detjjchments of guards, 
to furnish the necessary quota of animals for the post service to 
and fro. Officials proceeding on duty beyond the Wall receive 
posting-orders, entitled K'an hoh ^ '^ or tally-slips, from the 
Board of War, under whose general superintendence the courier 
service is placed. 

551.— iii. Urumts'i Tu-t^ung ,^ # TfC § S5 i^ —Military 
Lieutenant-Governor of Uruints'i or Unimch'i (Oroumchi). 
Subject to the control of the Military Governor of the Hi ngion 
(see infrd^ No. 557). 

552.-Uhasut'ai Tsiang Kun ,^ ^ « if^ ^ Jflf !? - 

Military Governor of Uliasut'ai. This region, the seat of govern- 
ment of which is the town of Uliasut'ai in the territory of the 
Sain Noin Khalkhas, is the principal centre of the imperial 
authority as exercised over the KInilkha trihes. The Military 
Governor is invested with the special title of ling rim Tso Fu 
Imuig Kiln ^ JS 4 g'J Hf '^i which may be translated Vice- 
Wat*den of the Marches, In ad^lition to the subordinate function- 



PART XI. — ^MONaOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 93 

aries placed under bis command (see below), four Deputy Military 
Governors, entitled Fu Tsiang Kiln g|J Jj^ IjL^ in the persons of a 
prince of each of the four tribes of the Khalkhas, assist the chief 
authority in the affairs of his government. Each of the four 
Mongol dignitaries takes a turn of residence, for three months at 
a time, at Uliasut'ai. 

553.— Uliasut'ai Ts'an-tsan Ta Ch'Sn ,^ M IS S "a ^ 
H ^ £. — Military Assistant Governor. The Military Governor 
of Uliasut*ai is assisted by two subordinate functionaries under the 
above-named title, one of whom is appointed from among the 
Manchu dignitaries at Peking, and the other from the Khalkha 
nobles. 

554.— Ting Pien Ts^an-tsan Ta Ch^en £ jI # g :fc &— 
Assistant to the Warden of the Marches (see mprdj No. 552). 

555.— K*OBDO Ts^AN-TSAN Ta Ch^Sn Sff ^ $ ^ g a &— 
Military Assistant Governor, commanding at K^obdo. The 
Urianghai tribes of the Mongols are placed under the above 
jurisdictions, subject to the authority of the Military Governor of 
Uliasut'ai. 

556.— K'u-LUN Pan She Ta Ch^en SH JH Wt ^ ^ &— 
Imperial Agent at K*urun (Urga). Associated with this high 
officer, usually a Manchu lieutenant-general from one of the 
Peking banners, is a Mongolian Pan She Ta Ch^en with co-ordinate 
authority in matters relating to the Mongolian tribes. The 
Imperial Agent at Urga is specially charged with the control of 
the frontier town of Kiakhta 'lip ]^ Bl, and the trade conducted 
there with the Russians. The Manchu term ainban, equivalent to 
the Chinese designation Ta Ch^en or High Officer, forming part of 
the title borne by the Imperial Agent and other functionaries of 
similar position, is frequently applied by European writers to the 
Chinese representatives in Mongolia and Turkestan. 

557.— Ili Tsiang KiJN ^ ^ }» ®.— The Military 
Governor of Ili. This title, to which a regard for analogy 
requires the above rendering to be given (see Part V, No. 367), 
would be more correctly translated by the term Governor-General, 



94 PART XT. — ^MOKGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 

or Viceroy, of Chinese Turkestan. The region of Hi is, properly- 
speaking, the territory formerly occupied by the Sungar nation 
(see suprdy No. 518), the final conquest of which dates from 1759, 
when the arms of K*ien Lung completed the destruction of the 
Kahnuk sovereignty and established his supremacy on either side 
of the Tien Shan mountains. The territories of Sungaria, on 
the north, and of the Mahommedan cities (or Kashgaria) on the 
south, of this great range were divided into two vast provinces, 
entitled respectively, with reference to their position north and 
south of the mountains, the T'ie7i Shan Peh iw 5c ill 4t K ^^^ 
T*ien Shan Nan ^w 3^ [II ^ K, and designated generically as Sin 
Kiang ^ S ^^ ^^® ^®^ Dominion, the supreme control of which 
was placed in the hands of a Military Governor. The first 
appointment to this post was made in 1764. Large bodies of 
Manchus were transferred to the Hi region as military colonists ; 
and a fortified town adjoining the site of Kuldja on the river Hi 
was built for the residenco of the Military Governor and his 
troops. The name of Hwei-yiian Ch'eng S^ ^ JS was given to 
this place. Five divisions — tui |§5 — of military colonists were 
established in the Hi region, drawn from the following sources, 
viz., Manchus from the capital, Solon ^ j^ Manchus from the 
region of the Amur, Sibe ^ fj^ Mongols from the Jeh-ho region, 
Chahars, and Oelots (see supra, No. 518), each under the com- 
mand of a divisional General or Commandant (see infrd, No. 559). 
Toward the close of the reign of K'ien Lung, a large influx of 
population into the region of Sungaria was secured by encouraging 
the migration of Chinese from the provinces of Kansuh and Shensi, 
to whom extensive tracts of land were allotted. The majority of 
these settlers were of the Mussulman religion, which had taken 
root in Western China at a very early date, owing to the influx 
of Persian and Arab immigrants; and they eventually formed in 
the Hi region a distinct nucleus of population, known to the 
Chinese simply as Hwei Min J5 or Mussulman subjects of the 
State, but designated by their neighbours of the Turki race by 
the name of Dungan or Tungani, a term the origin of which 
has not been ascertained. In the neighbourhood of Hi itself 



PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 95 

there further dwells a population of Mahomraedans, known as 
Taranchi, the descendants of colonists transplanted from Kashgaria. 
This part of the population still retains its Turki language and 
other marks of alien extraction. The name Taranchi is said to be 
derived from tararij millet, and hence to signify a millet-grower 
or farmer. The Dungan or Chinese Mussulman immigrants, on 
the other hand, found their way not only into Sungaria but also 
into the region south of the TMen Shan, where they mixed but did 
not harmonize with the indigenous population. Although pro- 
fessing the same religion with the Chinese Mussulmans, the 
Mahommedans of Kashgaria were descended from a different stock, 
that of the Turki or Uigur race. From this medley of nationalities 
have grown the conflicts of the last fifteen years, in the course of 
which the Chinese occupation of both Sungaria and Kashgaria 
became extinguished, Hi falling to the share of Russia, and 
Kashgaria being erected into a Mussulman Kingdom by the 
prowess of Yakub Khan, an adventurer from Kokand. He, with 
his adherents, became known to the Chinese by the name of ** the 
Andijani," — Ngan-tsi-yen ^ $^ J|E, — from Andijan, the city of 
Kokand with which the most frequent relations have customarily 
been maintained from the side of Kashgar. Notwithstanding the 
expulsion of Chinese authority from the territories on either side of 
the T^ien Shan, ideas of reconquest have never been abandoned, 
and a partially successful attempt in that direction has occupied 
the imperial forces for several years past. The following are the 
ranks of the military administration subject to the control of the 
Tsiang KUn of Hi : — 

558.— Ts^AN TSAN Ta Ch^^n j^St ^ E.— Military Assistant 
Governor. One at Hi, one at Tarbagatai, one at Yarkand. 

559.— Ling Tui Ta Ch^Sn f^^:fi g.— Commandant of 
the Forces, — at Hi, Tarbagatai, Ush, Yarkand, Urumts'i, Turfan, 
Guchen, and Kurkara Usu (see supra, No. 557). 

560.— Pan She Ta Ch'Sn if^^g.— Agent,— at Kashgar, 

Kharashar, Kuche, Aksu, Khoten and Hami. (See also Xo. 556). 

561.— HiBH Pan Ta Ch^Sn 18 |J? :fc g and Pang Pan 



96 PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 

Ta CH'feN H^ ^ E.— Assistant Agent. At Ush and Hami. 

562.— TsuKG Li Ts^ing Hai She Wuh Ta CH^flN ig| g ^ 
^ ^ ^ ^ g. — Imperial Controller-General of Kokonor. 
Invested with the control of the Mongol and Tangutian (fan §) 
tribes of the Ts*ing Hai or Kokonor region. (See supra. No. 524). 

563. — PfiH-K^fiH fg jg. — Beg. This title, universally in 
use among the followers of Islam, is employed among the Chinese 
Mahommedans of Turkestan and the region of Hami as a generic 
designation for the local chieftains. The begs under Chinese 
authority are classed in five degrees of rank, ranging from the 
third to the seventh degree of the Chinese official scale. The Ma- 
hommedans of the Hami and Turfan region, who are of Mongol 
descent, are distinguished by a organization similar to that of the 
Mongol tribes. Their chiefs are invested with the designation 
dzassak (see supra, No. 537), in addition to which the titles of 
Wang, beilSh, etc., are conferred upon them as is the rule among 
the Mongols proper. The Mahommedans of other than Chinese or 
Mongol descent are commonly known as ch'aji t^ow Hwei-hwei ^ 
BM ISly or " turban -wearing Mussulmans." 

The following are the most important among the titles and 
attributes of the Begs of different classes in Kashgaria : 

i. Ak'im Beg pj ^ tJC (6 jS* — Local Governor. 

ii. IsHKHAN Beg 19^ ff- ^ ffi j£. — Assistant Governor. 

iii. Shang Beg |g| {^ [^.—Collector of Revenue. 

iv. Katsanatch'i Beg |!§ ^ IA 9 f6 !S- — Same as above. 

v. 'Hatsze Beg ^ ^ i^ ^. — Judge. 

vi. MiRABU Beg i^ Ij|J ^P ffi jg.— Superintendent of Agricul- 
ture. (See @ S oE ^ Description of Turkestan, B. VII). 



PART Xn. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 97 



PART XII.-TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 

564. — Tibet, or Thibet, which the progress of events during 

the last two centuries has converted into a dependency of the 

Chinese Empire, is known to the Chinese of the present day by 

the name of Tsang ^ or Si Tsang H ||{. This appellation has 

superseded the term U-sze Kwoh ,^ ^ S or U-sze Tsang by 

which the country was known under the Ming dynasty, from the 

indigenous designation Us Tsang, or U Tsang, signifying Central 

and Pure, at that time applied to it. The native sound of U 

appears farther to have been corrupted by the Chinese into Wei, 

whence the designation Wei Tsang ^ ^ has come to be used as 

the general geographical title for the entire country. The limits 

at present assigned to the territory of Tibet occupy only a part 

of tlie ancient region of T^u Fan ^ ||, the people of which, 

known hIso by the name of Si Fan "g ^ and T^ang-ku-teh ^ •jjf 

i^ i^^ M "6" W) ^'^*y Tangiit, were for many centuries the dreaded 

enemies of the Chinese. Tlie name Tibet, by which, since the 

day of Marco Polo, the country has been known in European 

geogiaphy, is represented in Chinese by the characters T^u-pSh-- 

teh H fl3 4$ (T'ubod), intended probably to reproduce the sound 

of the appellation given to it among the Mongols. The Tibetans 

call themselves Bod, and their country Bod-jul, — the land of Bod, 

a term the derivation of which has been variously interpreted by 

European writers, but which the Chinese appear to identify with 

Full Kiooh ^ g — the land of Buddha. According to the legends 

preserved by indigenous records, the first germs of enlightenment 

and order were introduced into Tibet bv offslioots of the race of 

8akya, from which the founder of the Buddhist religion had 

himself earlier derived his descent; and Srongtsan Qampo ^ ^ 

M ^ ^h whose lineage is traced through seven generations to 

the first of the semi-mythi^-al sovereigns of this line, became in 

the seventh century of our era at once the first acknowledged 

ruler of the entire land of Tibet, and also the introducer and 



98 PART XII. — TIBBT AND THE LAMAIST HIBRAROHY. 

vigorous patron of the Buddhist religion among his subjects. He 
took to wife, on the one hand, a daughter of the sovereign of 
Nipal — Pai'pu j^ ^ or Pa-pu-Uh Kwoh G ^ ]|Hl H» *-^> ^^^ 
Parbuttiya Kingdom — and, on the other, the princess Win Ch^6ng 
3lt JA & £9 daughter of the emperor T*ai Tsung of the T'ang 
dynasty in China. This last-named alliance was contracted in 
A.D. 641. For many centuries his descendants, with the title 
of Gialbo — in Chinese, l^san-p^u JR ^ — continued to rule over 
Tibet, although in the course of time the temporal authority 
became encroached upon to a large extent by the pretensions of 
the Buddhist hierarchy which had gradually come into being. 
In the course of the eleventh century, in particular, the superiors 
of a religious association known as the Sakya — in Chinese Hi ^ — 
monastery, originally founded under the patronage of a royal prince, 
began to usurp the exercise of exclusive powers of government; 
and for some centuries later, this priesthood appears to have 
wielded a predominant influence in the affairs of Tibet. Known 
at that period as at present by the name of Brugpa — in Chinese 
written ^ ^ "^ Ci — the Sakya priesthood is also distinguished 
by the title of the Red Church — Hung Kiao ig[ fjj; — from the 
colour of the vestments and headcovering they adopted. The 
primitive doctrines of Buddhism, already largely corrupted in 
Tibet, from the earliest period of its introduction, by Hindoo 
and especially Bivaitic forms of worship, were farther perverted 
among the Sakya priesthood by a deliberate departure from the 
rule of celibacy. Marriage was permitted among them with the 
avowed object of securing an hereditary transmission of power ; 
and magic arts in infinite variety and with unbounded pretensions 
to efficacy were professed among them as a means of ensuring 
their supremacy in the popular mind. A revolt against the 
corrupt and licentious rule of the Sakya priesthood took place at 
length in the fifteenth century of our era under the leadership of 
a reformer named Tsongkhaba — in Chinese ^ l§ Ci —born at Si 
Ning in A.D. 1417. The history of this earnest innovator's 
career may be read elsewhere;* for tlie purposes of the present 

* See Die LamaUche Hierarehie und Kirche, by C. F. KoBPPKN, Berlin, 1859, 
p. 109 et seq. 



PART Xn» — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 99 

sketch it suffices to observe that he preached with success in 
various parts of Tibet the necessity of a return to the primitive 
doctrines and observances of the religion of Shakyamuni, as an 
outward and .visible sign of which he insisted on the adoption of 
the yellow robe and hat (yellow, or the colour of gold, being 
assigned in early legends to the founder of Buddhism) in lieu of 
the vestments of red which distinguished the ruling hierarchy. 
The preachings of Tsongkhaba were attended with remarkable 
success, and before his death, which^ according to Chinese accounts, 
took place in A.D. 1478, he found himself widely acclaimed as 
the spiritual leader of the Lamaist majority. His reforms were 
welcomed and supported by the emperors of the Ming dynasty, 
who saw in them a means of extending their influence over the 
' Tibetan people, more especially as the now discredited Sakya or 
Bed hierarchy had been staunch and favoured supporters of the 
descendants of Kublai, lately supplanted on the throne of China. 
The reformer left behind him two eminent disciples, upon whom, 
in the words of a Chinese chronicler, he "laid commands, enjoining 
upon them that they should be born again, generation after 
generation, as ^huMl'Jian 1^ H ]^ ^, to practise the doctrines of 
the Great Conveyance ( Ta C/i^ing, Sanskr. MaJidydnay the esoteric 
form of Buddhism). The word ^hubiNian signifies in Chinese 
hwa shin ft ^ (i.e., transformed body, transformation, reembodi- 
ment). The two disciples were called respectively Dalai Lama 
and Fanshen Lama." 

From the period referred to above, the spiritual and a large 
portion of the temporal authority in Tibet, which had previously 
been engrossed by the Red hierarchy, was wielded by the succes- 
sive "reembodiments" of Tsongkhaba's disciples, whose identity, 
on their reappearance in human form, has been merged, according 
to the legends that have subsequently arisen, in the personality 
of the two most exalted and revered of the divinities proceeding 
from the essence of the Buddha himself. In the senior of the 
two, the Dalai Lama, the Bddhisattwa AvalokitSswara (the 
Chinese Kwan Yin), is believed to appear on earth; and in the 
persoii of the second the Bddhisattwa Manchusri is recognized. 



100 BART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIBRAROHY. 

tiiiis deity having preliminarily occupied the form, it is also fabled, 
of Tsongkbabd himself. The second in succession of the Dalai 
Lanj^as, in the course of a long career, laid the foundation of the 
existing hierarchical system in Tibet, establishing his seat of 
ecclesiastical rale at Lassa, and organizing a body of lesser spiritual 
dignitaries, under the designation ^hut^ukht'u (see iw/ra, No. 589), 
who, like the two supreme religious chiefs, were to be continued 
by a series of reembodiments. Like the Dalai and the Panshen 
lamaa, these spiritual chiefs of the Tibetan priesthood became 
popularly known as "living Buddhas," — in Chinese hwoh Fuh JS^ 
•—a term by which they are at present commonly designated. 

In the course of the latter half of the 17th century, the 
authority of the Dalai Lama having gained entire predominance 
throughout the greater portion of Tibet, the gialbos or descendants 
of the ancient kings appear to have gradually faded into insigni- 
ficance, whilst at the same time, under various pretexts, inter- 
ference in Tibetan affairs on the part of a succession of ambitious 
Mongol princes grew more and more direct. Already, at a some- 
what earlier period, Gushi Khan, in Chinese designated as @i&ff , 
the reigning prince of the Khoshot Mongols, had supported the 
Dalai Lama of the period against the claims of the temporal 
sovereign, and had been rewarded for his fidelity to the hierar- 
chical cause with the title of Nomen *Han |§ ff) ff ? or Prince 
(Khan) of the Religious Law, an equivalent to the Sanskrit 
Dh&rma Raja. By the influence of Gushi Khan, the Dalai and 
Panshen Lamas were induced to despatch an embassy, in A.D. 
1642, with professions of respect and tenders of allegiance to the 
court of the Manchu sovereign, whose forces were then on the 
eve of effecting the overthrow of the Ming dynasty in China ; and 
from this period relations of intimacy took their rise, developing 
themselves in time into the assumption, on the part of t&e Chinese 
emperors, of the sovereign tutelage of the Buddhist papacy in 

Tibet, This consummation was hastened by the wars undertaken 
toward the close of the 17th and in the early part of the 18th 
century by the Sungar chieftains (see Part XI, No. 518) for the 
subversion of the authority of the Dalai Lama. The temporal 



PABT Xn. — TIBBT AND THB LAJCAIST HIERABOHT. 101 

administrator who^ as a regent under the Dalai Lama, had long 
conducted the government of Tibet, with the title of Diba, in 
Chinese ^ £ ^^ Jg| £ {i.e., ruler, or chief) was invested by 
K^ang Hi in A.D. 1694 with the title of T^u-pik-t'Sh Kwoh Wang^ 
or King of Tibet; but the authority thus established was ere long 
attacked by an invasion of the Sungars, and the Chinese armies 
which were despatched hereupon for the liberation of Tibet 
remained as conquerors of the country. After an interval during 
which the Government remained in the hands of puppet nominees 
of the Chinese sovereign, an outbreak directed against one of 
these gave the pretext for the appointment of two High Commis- 
sioners to control the affairs of Tibet on behalf of the Chinese 
government. This took place in A.D. 1725. Farther attempts 
at revolt led, in A.D. 1750, to the entire suppression of the 
temporal sovereignty in Tibet, and the government of the country 
was placed, thenceforward, in the hands of the Dalai and Panshen 
Lamas, aided by a council of four laymen, entitled Kalon or 
Kablon, i.e.. Ministers of State, under the direction in chief of 
the two Imperial Commissioners or Residents appointed from 
Peking. The government has from that time forward continued 
to be conducted upon this basis, the authority of the Chinese 
administration being rendered the more complete by the long 
minorities which are entailed at each successive "reembodiment" 
of the two supreme ecclesiastical dignitaries. The territorial 
divisions, or provinces, — pu Q5 — *t present established, are four 
in number, and are named as follows : — 

i. Ts^iEN TsANG Ijf m, or Anterior Tibet. This section of 
the country, the easternmost, and therefore nearest to the Chinese 
frontier, is also known as K'ang ]||, written by some geographers 
as Kham, and also known as Chamdo $ TfC $• 

ii. Wei ^ or Chung Tsang t^ |B|> — Central Tibet, contkin- 
ing the seat of government, Lassa Jft m, and the residence of the 
Dalai Lama, the great Monastery of PotalA ^ JH |3:. 

iii. How Tsang ^ ^ — Ulterior Tibet, or simply Tsang, 
containing the seat of government of the Panshen Lama, at 
Teshilumbo or Chasbilumbu fL # iH ^< 



102 PART XII. — TIBBT AND THK LAMAIST HEffiRARCHY. 

iv. Ngari f^ £. — Western Tibet. 

The following are the ranks and offices which remain to be 
considered : — 

Chinese Administration in Tibet: 

565.— Chu Tsang Ta Ch^Iin ft ]j|. :fc g.— Imperial 
Besident in Tibet. With this high officer a colleague or Assistant 
Besident is associated, distinguished by the title of Pang Pan Ta 
Ch^Sn fif m ;K; S- T^oili Besident and Assistant Besident are 
commonly selected from among the superior officers of the Manchu 
Banners, and are placed under the direction of the Li Fan Yuan 
or Mongolian Superintendency (see Part II, No. 183), but with 
the duty of memorializing the Throne direct on all questions of 
importance. They likewise correspond on a footing of equality 
with the Goyemor-General of the adjacent Chinese province of 
Sze-ch'wan, whence the troops constituting the Chinese garrison 
and the officers of the Chinese civil administration in Tibet are 
detailed. The provincial exchequer of Sze-chVan is charged, 
also, with the expenses of the Chinese occupation and government 
of Tibet. Among his other duties, the Imperial Besident acts as 
the medium of relations between the Chinese government and 
the Court of Nepal, which is Icnown to the Chinese as JS Hf ^ Bl 
or the Kingdom of the Ghorkhas, the people and products of the 
country being at the same time designated Pai-pu ^ ^ or Pa-pu 
Ei ^, i.e.y Parbuttiya. For the conduct of correspondence with 
the Tibetan and Nepalese authorities he has on his staff a "Secre- 
tary for Native (lit barbarian) Affairs" — I TsHng Chang-king 
55 W 3t *^. Appointments to the principal civil and military 
offices of the Tibetan government and hierarchy are made on 
nominations submitted to the Throne by the Imperial Besidents, 
who are also invested with the supreme command of both the 
Chinese garrison troops and the Tibetan soldiery or Fan ping ^ ^. 
The Imperial Institutes provide for a corps of about 1,500 officers 
and men, detached from the provincial forces of Sze-ch*wan, 
who are distributed at various points in the Tibetan territory. 
The Tibetan soldiery, consisting principally of village militia, 
undrilled and armed only with the most antiquated description of 



PART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAI8T HIERABCHT. 103 

weapons, is officially reckoned at a force of 64,000 men, of whom 
14,000 are described as cavalry. For the commanders of these 
forces (see tn/ra, Nos. 579-583). Through the four Ministers or 
Kahn (see infrdj No. 567) the Imperial Residents control the 
entire Tibetan administration. 

566. — Liang T*ai 10 •^. — Commissary. Of this rank three 
Chinese officials, belonging to the class of Sub- Prefect or Assistant 
Magistrate, are stationed at Lassa, Tashilumbo, and Ngari, where 
they act both as paymaster^ of the Chinese forces and as deputies 
of the Imperial Residents in all matters concerning Chinese 
interests in Tibet. They are relieved, according to regulation, at 
the expiry of two years' service. 

Secular Administration in Anterior Tibet: 

567.— -Kalon (Kablon) Bg ^ ||. — Councillor of State. 
The secular affairs of Tibet are administered by a Council com- 
posed of four Ministers under the above title. The majority of 
the incumbents of this office, who act under the immediate 
supervision of the Imperial Residents, are laymen, receiving their 
appointment by decree from Peking on nomination by the 
Residents, and becoming ea-^fficio invested with the third degree 
of Chinese official rank. The superior officers of the Tibetan army 
are eligible for the post of Kalon. The Council Chamber is 
designated Ka Hia Kg ^. 

568. — Shang Shang fj^ J:. — The Treasury. This depart- 
ment, presided over by the Kalon (see above), has the supreme 
control of all matters relating to the collection of revenue and 
secular affairs in general in Tibet. 

569. — TsAi-pfiNQ ff }$. — Councillor of the Treasury (first -^ 
class). Three in number ; invested with the 4th degree of Chinese 
official rank. 

570. — SHA!;rG Chodba |9f Jft !|# fi. — Councillor of the ^ 
Treasury (second class). Two in number; rank as above. 

571. — ^Ykrts'angba fj^Wlt £.— Controller of the Revenue. 
Two in number; 5th rank. 



» « 



^ > 



104 PART XII* — ^TIBBT AND THE LAMAI8T HIERARCHY. 

572.^— LangtsaiHia J^ ff (|.— Controller of Streets and 
Boads. Two in number; 5th rank. 

573. — HiERBANG f2 m ^. — Commissioner of Justice. Two 
in number; 5th rank. 

574. — SnlfeDiBA :j^ Hf Q. — Superintendent of Police. Two 
in number; 5th rank. 

575.— Taping % J$.— Controller of the stud. Two in 
number; 6th rank. 

C. ^^^^ ' 576. — Chung Yih tfi gg.— Secretary of the Council. Of 

two ranks, having the characters ta ^ (great) and aiao ij> (lesser) 
respectively prefixed the title. Invested with the 6th and 7th ranks. 

577. — Chonir j^ ^ ^. — Secretary (second class) of the 
Council. Three in number; 6th rank. 

578. — DiBA ^ ^ ov J^ Ei- — (a). Commissioner. This 
title, signifying in Tibetan one who rules or is chief, was borne 
during the 17th and 18th centuries by the secular delegate of the 
Dalai Lama, in whose name he wielded the government of the 
country, (b). District governor or Headman. Thirteen func- 
tionaries of this description are recognized in the Imperial Institutes. 
They are divided into six classes, each with special functions, such 
as superintendents of revenue, of cattle, etc., etc. 

Military Ranks: 

579. — Taip^ng ^ J$. — Commandant. Six in all. This, 
the highest military position, is invested with the 4'th degree of 
Chinese rank. The sound was formerly denoted by the characters 
tai'pSn f^ ^. 

580. — JupfeNG ft 5$. — Commander of 200 men; 5th rank. 
Twelve in all. 

581.— KiAPfeNG ^ J$.— Officer of the 6th rank. Twenty- 
four in all. 

582.— TiNGPfeNG j£ J$.— Officer of the 7th rank. One 
hundred and twenty in all. 

583. — Fan Muh ^ g. — A generic designation for 



PART Xn* — TIBET AND THB LAMAIST HUERAROHY. 105 

Tibetan officers of all ranks, both civil and military. Appoint- 
ments of officers to the subordinate military ranks are made, 
according to regulation, by selection from among the scions of the 
ancient native nobility or aristocracy jjj: ^, known by the name 
of Tongkhor « JplW (See * « # JH^f «, Book 741). 

The Lamaist Hierarchy: 

584. — Lama m ^, — This designation, applied to all members 
of the priesthood observing the forms of Tibetan Buddhism, is 
derived from a Tibetan word which, according to the Chinese, has 
the meaning of m?m ^hang ^ J;, ».«., "unsurpassed" or "without 
a superior." 

585.— Dalai Lama ^ JB 1*1 IW-— One of the joint Pontiifs 
of Tibet (see below). The word dalai or ^a^^in Mongolian signifies 
** Ocean," and corresponds to the Tibetan word Djamta^o or 
Chatnts^Oj which, in the combination Cheptsun Djarnts'o Rinpoc.h^4^ 
or Venerable Ocean Treasure, constitutes the proper title of this 
dignitary. As already remarked above (see supra, No. 564), the 
Dalai Lama is regarded as the reembodiment which is assumed 
by the spirit of one of Tsongkhaba's two disciples, and at the 
same time as an incarnation or Avatar of the Bodhisattwa 
Avalokiteswara. Having engrossed in their own hands, as already 
narrated, the temporal power in Tibet, successive Dalai Lamas of 
the last century were recognized by the emperors of China as the 
supreme pontiffs of the Yellow Church 'Sfi ^ ^ 'Mf fRy ^i^d the 
utmost veneration has been manifested toward their successors 
up to the present moment. Their residence is fixed at Mount 
Fotala $ m ^ (one of the three sacred mountains of this name, 
the original being situated, according to Buddhist legends, in 
Lidia, and the third, known in Chinese by the name of P'u-t^o 
Shan ^ PiS ill ) forming the well-known island of monasteries on 
the coast of Chehkiang), near Lassa ^ m, the chief city of 
Anterior Tibet At this place, the ancient capital of the kingdom, 
are situated the la Chao ^ ^'and Siao Cliao *J^ J^j ^^ Greater 
and Lesser Temples {chao in Tibetan signifying monastery or 
shrine), w^bich date £rom the period of the Chinese alliance io 



106 



PABT XII. — TIBET AND THS LAMAI8T HIBRABCHT. 



the seventh century. The Ta Chaoy in particular, is celebrated 
as containing a famous effigy of the princess of the house of T^ang, 
now worshipped, together with her consort from Nepal, among the 
chief divinities of the Lamaist pantheon. (See suprd^ No. 564). 

The succession to the office of Dalai Lama occurs, as already 
mentioned above, by a process of "reembodiment." For some 
centuries, and until within comparatively recent times, the rela- 
tives or surrounding of each successive pontiff contrived, by 
more or less open acts of fraud, to indicate after his decease the 
individual whom it suited them to select as the new Avatar. In 
order to obviate proceedings of this kind, which had more than 
once brought forward persons distasteftil and dangerous to the 
suzerain power, the emperor K^en Lung ordained, in A.D. 1792, 
that for the future both the succession to this august office and 
also the appointment to other spiritual dignities of a similar 
nature (see infrd^ No. 589) should be determined by the drawing 
of lots. At the decease of each Dalai Lama, accordingly, — when, 
like all members of the class endowed with the privilege of 
successive births, he is said to have ^' entered upon the perfection 
of repose," yUan tsih [Q ^, enquiries are made by the priesthood 
with reference to miraculous signs, ling i f| f|, which may have 
been observed in attendance upon the birth of children at about 
the same period. Particulars of the required kind are always 
duly procured; and these are transmitted in proper form to the 
Imperial Besidents at Lassa. After scrutiny of the documents 
and report being made to Peking, a certain number of the children 
are brought with their parents to Lassa. Here, on an appointed 
day, their names are inscribed on slips of wood, wUch, after 
being carefully sealed, are deposited in the "golden urn," kin pSn^ 
pa pHng ^ >4C £ JK? prescribed by the regulation instituted by 
K'ien Lung. The name drawn forth from the urn is hailed amid 
universal rejoicing as that of the new incarnation, and the Dalai 
Lama is declared to have " come forth in reembodiment " — eh^u 
^hubil^han ^H^SLMWy ^^^^ ^ Mongol word signifying " bodily 
transformation" or metamorphosis (in Chinese, hwa shin ffj Jj^). 
After a short period of instruction, the newly acclaimed pontiff. 



PART Xn. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 107 

at the age of perhaps two or three)yeavs, is solemnly enthroned — 
t8o chwang ^ ^ — and during his long ensuing minority he 
remains, as a matter of course, a puppet in the hands of the 
Chinese Imperial Residents.* 

586.— Panshen Erdeni Lama mWUWBJB^B'— 
One of the joint Pontiffs of Tibet (see above). Joint heir with 
the Dalai Lama of the spiritual inheritance derived from Tsong- 
khaba, the Panshen Erdeni is believed bv the Tibetans to be 
worthy of the higher degree of adoration, his office and functions 
being less contaminated by worldly cares and influences. To him 
is confided the maintenance of the purity of religious doctrine, as 
to the Dalai Lama is attributed the temporal governance of the 
Tibetan realm. His title signifies "The Precious Teacher" 
(Panshen or Banshen==the Indian Pandita, and Erdeni in Mon- 
golian -being the equivalent of the Tibetan word Rin-pO'Clie\ 
signifying Treasure). His residence is at Tashilumbo JLfH&^j 
or the Mountain of Blessings, a city lying at a distance of 700 li 
or about eight days' journey to the westward of Lassa. Here the 
Panshen Lama presides over an administration entirely composed 
of ecclesiastics, sharing with the Dalai Lama the headship of the 
Yellow Church, but mixing little, if at all, in questions of secular 
administration. Succession is contrived, at each ensuing decease, 
by the same device with is applied in the case of the Dalai Lama 
{see above). The sixth in succession of the Panshen Lamas, 
Lobtsang Tanishi by name, was persuaded by the emperor K'ien 
Lung to undertake the journey to Peking, in order to take part 
in the festivities on His Majesty's 70th birthday, in A.D. 1780; 
and it was for this dignitary's special reception that the vast pile 
of buildings at Jeh-ho, the emperor's summer retreat, was con- 
structed on the model of those occupied by the Panshen Erdeni at 
Tashilumbo. An attack of small-p9x carried off the illustrious 
visitor toward the close of the year ; and whilst his remains were, 
solemnly escorted back to Tibet, a magnificent mausoleum was 

* For a detailed account of the selection and enthronement of the Dalai 
Lama reference may be made to a paper by the author, entitled " Illuatrationu of 
the Lamaist System in Tibet," in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of 
Great Britain and Ireland^ Vol. IV, Part I, 1869. 



108 F4JtT XU.— TlfiBT AKD THS LAMAIST H;p}BAB€i9T. 

erected within the precincts of the temple he had inhabited during 
his stay at Peking, in which the robes of the deceased Ponti^ are 
enshrined. 

587.~Noh£n <Han ^ ^ Sg.— Begent, or Dh&rma B&ja. 
This is a title which, with sundry distinctive epithets, has long 
been customarily bestowed upon eminent supporters of the Lamaist 
hierarchy. The expression is rendered in Chinese by the charac- 
ters Fall Wang ft I, or " Prince of the [Religious] Law, or True 
F^ith" equivalent to the Sanskrit J)harmQ> RdjOf; apd the &r$jb 
r^o^d instance of its bestowal was in the case of Gushi Ehan, 
the celebrated IQioshoit spvereigij^, who pUced, in A.]). 1643, the 
Dalai Lama in possession of the temporal sovereignty of Tibet 
(see auprdy No. 564). The Imperial Listitutes record numerous 
instances in which this title was conferred, in the course of the 
18th century, upon a succession of ecclesiatical dignitaries^ under 
whose d|ir^tio]|;i the Tibetan Council appears to have been placed 
during the repeated minorities of the Dalai. It became customary, 
$4so, to bestow a ming h^o £ it or title of honour, su^h as th^^t 
of iGf^dan ^t^'m H H AftfiSH) ^^^^ with theoiBeeof 
BiJdb^ B 32 # ( ^P Mojsigoli^n, Te^ujher or Pr^ceptqr, the 
Chinese Slie {j|), or Samadi Bakhshi (apparently from the Sankrit 
Sam&dhi, absorbed in contemplation), upon the Begent thus 
appointed. The power which was consequ^itly wielded by 
successive dignitaries of this class led to their receiving in populs^* 
parlance the title of Trnng Wang H £ King (or feudatory Prince) 
of Tibet The appointment of functionaries of such dievated rank 
as this at length terminated in 1844, when the Begent, shortly 
after the visit to Lassa which has been graphically described by 
the Abbe Hue, was accused of treasonable designs and lawless 
conduct in many respects, and, having been made a prisoner, 
degraded, and unfrocked by an Imperial Decree, was banished 
to the Amur. Allowed to return to his native place, on the 
borders of Kansuh, he died in 1854; and an application lately 
made for the recognition of his ^^ reembodiment,^' said to have 
appeared on the spot in the person of a lad now aged 17, has 
been negatived in pursuance of the Decree of 1844, by which he 



PAltT Xn. — TL^m AND THS LAHAISt HIEKAItCllT. 109 

was "forbidden foreyer the privitege of appearing again on ehx&i 
in human form." (Bee Peking GcuttUB of July 25th, August 
29th, and September 7th, 1877).— See also inftd, No. 595. 

588. — K^AN-pa j§ ^^. — Abbot. The title bestowed upon 
the chief ecclesiastic of all Lamaist monasteries. By a decree 
of A.D. 1792, it was ordained that in the case of all K^an^fu 
enthroned {tso ch^wang |S K:) in the larger class of lUonast^Tit^, 
appointments should be made by the joint authority of the Dalai 
Lama and the Imperial Residents ; the smaller class alone were 
to be left to the appointment of the Dalai Lama himself. An 
envoy, with presents by way of tribute from the Dalai and Pansheh 
Lamas, who is sent annually to Peking, is selected from among 
the k^an-pu of the Tibetan monasteries. He is designated in 
Chinese by the title ErchHn ^ ^ \j^ — a representation of the 
Manchu word signifying envoy. 

589.— ^HuT^UKHT'u If B jg H-— Saint. This class of 
dignitaries, to which the Dalai and Panshen Lamas themselves 
belong, may be said to constitute the mo&t marked and essential 
feature of the Tibetan form of Buddhism. Derived from a 
Mongolian word which is interpreted in Chinese as signifying 
Uai lujen J^ ^ Ay ^•^•9 one who returns again, an Avatar-^the 
^hut^ukht^u supply, in their successive reembodiments, thstt trans- 
mission of authority in safe or chosen hands which the enforcement 
of a strict rule of celibacy might otherwise render impracti- 
cable. Confined, at the outset, to the territory of Tibet proper, 
the appearance of ^hut^ukld^u rulers has gradually overspread, 
with the Lamaist form of worship, the whole of Mongolia. 
According to traditional theory, the spirit of each 'hd^ukht^u 
reappears, on his decease, in the person of some newly born infant, 
and thus "comes forth reembodied" — eh^u^huhU^Iian — as has 
already been described above (see suprdy No. 585). The number 
of ^hut^ukht^u recognized in the Imperial Institutes, and registered 
by the Mongolian Superintendency, is 160 in all. These are 
distributed as follows : In Tibet, 30, including 12 who are known 
by the distinctive appellation of ahaburung tp ^ ^; in Northern 
Mongolia, 19 ; in Southern Mongolia, 57 ^ in the Kokonor region 



.* 1 



110 PART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 

of Tibet, 35 ; and in Chamdo, on the Sze-ch'wan border, 5. At 
and near Peking there are, finally, 14 representatives of the class. 
The special token by which they are identified, at the time of 
their reembodiment, is the faculty of recalling events or of recog- 
nizing objects connected with the history of their preceding 
existences. With one exception — that of the Ch'akhan Nomen 
*Han (see infrd^ No. 595), the system of drawing lots from the 
golden urn, Icin p^ing ^ ^, according to the politic rule introduced 
by K4en Lung (see supra, No. 585) is enforced in the case of 
each succession. The ^hut^ukht^u are familiarly known as hicok 
Full ^ ^, or living Buddhas. 

590. — Shabinor ^ ^t 5ffi W- — The designation applied 
to members of the Lamaist fraternity, undistinguished by any 
special rank. 

Ecclesiastics of the Government of Ulterior Tibet: 

591. — Chi-chunq Lama ^ fiji jlH ^* — Chief Councillor. 

592. — Sui-pSng Lama ;|| f $ (jj^ ^* — Lama of the second 
deofree. 



593. — Sit:!^-PEN Lama ^ 7|C 5H p|$. — Lama of the third 
/ degree. 

594.— Chonir Lama 41 >B W !!U Bft.— Lama of the fourth 
degree. 

^*^ The above ranks are filled by the appointment on the part 
of the Imperial Eesident, on nomination proceeding from the 
Panshen Erdeni Lama. The functions discharged by the respec- 
tive individuals are not specified in the Imperial Institutes (cf. 
:^ iS t * * W, B. 742, p. 18). 

595.— Ch'aman Nomen ^Han |g 9I If fjg ^.— The title 
enjoyed by the hereditary chieftain of one of the banners of 
the T^umeds, claiming descent from Manchusri ^Hut^ukht^u, a 
spiritual counsellor sent by the Dalai Lama about A.D. 1580 to 
assist his warlike patron, Altan Khakan (Khan), the celebrated 
chieftain of the Ordos tribes. This dignitary and his reembodi- 
ments were long established at Koku ^Hotu, the modern Sui-yiian 1"^' 



UJU. ''^-^A. 



PART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. Ill 

Ch^eng, where they enjoyed, with reference to the colour appro- 
priate to the Bodhisattwa Manchusri, the above title, signifying 
White Prince of the [Religious] Law, rendered in Chinese as 
Pell Full 1^ "1% or White Buddha. The policy of the early 
sovereigns of the present dynasty led to the displacement of this 
spiritual potentate, who was compelled to remove with his tribe 
to the region south of the Yellow River, and to pass under the 
control of the Imperial Commissioner of Kokonor. Attempts on 
the part of the Ch'akhan Nomen Han of the period to recross 
the Yellow River in 1820-1821 rendered military operations 
against him necessary, and since that period the tribe has con- 
tinued submissive, its ruler wielding great influence at the same 
time over all the Mongol and Tibetan population of this wild 
region. A decree of A.D. 1794 makes an exception in favour of 
the Ch^akhan Nomen ^Han with regard to the principle of reem- 
bodiment, which is allowed, in his case only, to be restricted to 
members of the same family, on the alleged ground of his being 
a dzassak, ue., wielding temporal as well as spiritual authority. 

596. — Cheptsundampa 'Hut'ukht'u ® ^ § iJJ- £ P? H 
"^ g. — The title assigned to the Metropolitan or Patriarch of 
the Khalkha tribes, ranking third (z.^., next to the two joint 
Pontiffs of Tibet) in degree of veneration among the dignitaries of 
the Lamaist church. The title takes its rise from the 'hut'uklit^u 
commissioned in A.D. 1604 to take up his abode among the 
Mongols of the North-west, where his authority was transmitted 
by reembodiment in the person of a younger brother of the Khan 
of the T^ushet^u tribe. In A.D. 1688, at a time when the 
Khalkhas felt no longer able to contend successfully against their 
adversaries the Sungars (see supra, No. 564), it was proposed in 
council to seek refuge under the Russian sovereignty. The 
'Hut^ukht'u, on being appealed to as umpire, decided against this 
proposal, in view of the fact that protection of the Yellow Church 
was not to be looked for in that quarter ; and the Khalkhas upon 
this tendered their allegiance to the emperor K'ang Hi, by whom 
territories were assigned to them and rank and titles were bestowed 
upon their chiefs. (Sung Yiin, vol. i, p. 19). Since this period 



112 PART XIL — TIBET AND THB LAMAKT HIBRARCHT. 

the successors of the Cheptsundampa ^Hut^nkht^u have been 
treated with high respect by the Chinese Court, although measures 
were taken, during the reign of K4en Lung, to forbid the con- 
tinuance of the succession as an appanage of the family of the 
T^ushet^u Khan. The residence of the ^Hut'ukht^u, whose authority 
is recognized as supreme by the T^ushet^u and Tsetsen Khanates^ 
is fixed at K^urun j$ jjf (Urga), where he acts as the spiritual 
colleague of the Chinese Imperial Agent {see Part XI, No. 556). 
The title he bears is derived from the Tibetan words Cliepimn^ 
^Wenerable," and Dampay " sacred." To this the Sanskrit appel- 
lation Tdranatha^ signifying "resplendent divinity" is added, 
whence the title of Taranatha Lama is derived as a common 
substitute for the official designation. By the Mongols, the 
patriarch is also frequently referred to as Maidari ^Hut^ukht^u 
(from Maitreya, the Messiah of Buddhism). He is likewise 
described as Gheghen (f.«., the Great) 'Hut^ukht'u. 

597. — Chu King Lama ft ^ !(IJ IHt. — The Lamaist Or- 
ganization in and near Peking. 

In iui^therance of their policy of ensuring the control of the 
Mongolian tribes by means of ecclesiastical influences, the Chinese 
sovereigns of the reigning dynasty have been profuse in the 
establishment of Lamaist places of worship and official dignities 
in Peking and throughout the adjacent region. The emperors of 
the Ming dynasty had indeed set an example in this respect, 
intrgducing the indecent Sivaitic effigies worshipped in Tibet, 
which are know to the Chinese as Hwan-hi Fuh iDt S ft ( i.^., 
Buddhas of Delight), into the palace itself; but the patronage 
extended to the Yellow Church by K'ang Hi and his descendants 
is conceived upon a far more extensive scale. Vast Lamaist 
communities have been founded at Jeh-ho and Dolon Nor in 
Inner Mongolia, and at Wu T'ai Shan in the province of Shansi, 
where a famous temple dedicated to the Bddhisattwa Manehusri \ 
attracts annually crowds of pilgrims from all parts of Mongolia, 
as well as in the imperial capital itself. At the imperial Mausolea, 
likewise, lamaseries are established, at which services are con- 
tinually performed in honour of the deceased sovereigns. The 






P4lBT Xn. — TIB£T AND TH^i LAMAIST HISJUBCHT. 113 

following are the principal dignitaries and other members of this 
branch of the Lamaist hierarchy : — 

596. — Chang-CHI A ^Hut^ukht^u j|t jK ^^ H j£ I- — 
The Metropolitan. This dignitary is the acknowledged reembodi- 
meat of a ^Imt^ukkt'u despatched, under the same title, to represent 
him near the Chinese Court toward the close of the 17th century 
by the Dalai Lama of that period. Heceived with profound 
respect by the emperor K^ang Hi, h^ w^s assigned a residence at 
Dolon Nor $ ^ fH (or ^ W)y ^^ *^® territory of Jeh-ho, with 
powers of spiritual control over the Mongols of Ch'ahar ; and he 
enjoyed the special favour likewise of the prince who afterwards 
reigned with the title Yung Cheng. This sovereign converted 
the palace appropriated to his use whilst heir apparent into a 
vast and gorgeous monastery, which still retains its name of 
Yung Ho Kung |K ft ^^ conferred upon it during his occupancy; 
and, by decree of the emperor K'ien Lung, the successor of the 
original Chang-chia *Hut*ukht*u removed his residence from Dolon 
Nor to this place? Here the ceremony of drawing lots from the 
golden urn is performed in the case of all such ^^hut^ukht^u as do 
not fall within the jurisdiction of the Tibetan government; and 
State services are performed under the direction of the Metropo- 
litan, who is said to chang Mao ^ JK;, or wield supreme religious 
sway. The principal ^hut^ukJu^u of the metropolitan organization 
are enumerated below, in the order assigned to them by Decree 
inA.D. 1786: 

599.— MiNCHUB ^HUT^UEHT^U Ift |% W P^ ■ ]£ ■• 

600.— Galdan SibSt^u <Hut'ukht<u f&Wl ^ISkV^ U 
1^ ■ IS ■• 

601 .— Chiluitg ^Hut'ukht^u 8| ^ 19^ ■ }£ B* 
^n*» The foregoing all take rank in precedence of the tsung 
k^an-pu Mimi ^ OT abbots-in-chief of the imperial lamaseries. 
Eight other dignitaries of the same class, headed by the Tungkhor 
JH ^ m ^Hut^ukht^u, are enumerated as dwelling at or near 
Peking, beside two at Dolon Nor. (-^ Jft ^ j*, B. 52, p. 25). 
The remaining ranks of the Lamaist hierarchy are as follows : 



114 part xii. — tibet and the lamaist hierarchy. 

602.— Chang Yin Dzassak Ta Lama ^ EO IL H j£ :^ 
^J ^. — Grand Chancellor of the Lamaseries (with seal of office). 

603.— Fu Chang Yin Dzassak Ta Lama gij i^ Ep f L 
H jE :^ 5B Ijflf.— Vice-Chancellor (as above). 

604. — Dzassak Lama JL SI iS !!ip!l 8R- — Rulers or Superiors 
of lamaseries. N.B, — Dzassak signifies a ruler or chieftain {see 
Part. XI, No. 537). 

605. — Da Lama j^ ^ |j|^. — Prior of a lamasery. This 
dignitary is invested with the control over the management and 
services of the monastery to which he belongs, subject to the 
commands of the dzassak lama of the locality. 

606.— Fu Da Lama g!| g| i| ^.—Vice-Prior. 
K ! 607. — HiE^ San Lama ^ ^ IU S^. — Lamaist clergy 

(without special office, but ranking above the grades mentioned 
below). 

608.— Te-mu-ch^i ^ ^ 5|p.— [Mong. Z^wicA'i].- Steward 
of a lamasery. The dimcliH lama, subject to the authority of the 
prior (see above) attends to all the secular a flairs of the monas- 
tery. Also written ^ /fC ^. 

609. — K^h-sze-kwei |gf Jg ^. — [Mong. Gishlmi or 
CHhhui], — Precentor. Conducts the choral services. 

61 0.— Keh-lung II H.— Gileng (Gylong). Priest of 
the first order. 

611. — Pan-ti JBE ^. — Bandi. Priest of the second order. 

61 2.— Sha-pi 0^ >i:>.— Shabi. Novice. 



APPENDIX. 



SECTION I.-GHINESE OFFICIAX HAKKS. 

The present work would be incomplete without some general 
ontline, at least, of the system under which the ranks of the 
Chinese official administration are organized. The bureaucracy 
which forms the most active and important element in the national 
life of China is a subject, indeed, not easily to be dealt witli in a 
narrow compass. As the outcome of the history of two thousand 
years, and inspired with traditions descending from periods of 
fabulous antiquity, the huge fabric which is revered as Uio 
depositary of all honour and all authority may well be thought 
capable of defying attempts at analysis on any but the broadest 
scale. Such particulars, at the same time, as are needed for a 
general comprehension of the methods pursued in the ez^isting 
organization, the results of which it has been sought to elucidate 
in the preceding sections of this work, may nevertheless be briefly 
assembled. The Chinese official hierarchy, as it is found esta- 
blished in the Ta TsHng Hxoei Tien or Collected Institutes of the 
Empire, is in all its leading features a continuation of the system 
gradually established under the Ming dynasty, whose tenui*e of 
power was marked, in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries of our 
era, by the introduction of the principle of universal competition 
for literary degrees as the means of obtaining access to rank and 
office, and by the mapping out of the territories of the Empire in 
the divisions which still, for the most part, subsist. In Part IX 
of the present work, the method by which advancement is obtained 
in the various degrees at the official Examinations is categorically 
set forth ; and it now remains to elucidate, with the help of the 
details afforded by the Institutes, the system of classification 
ordained for the ranks of the public service. 

Under the head of s/ie tain ft |^ or the "official career,*' it 
is laid down that the privilege of cli^u ahen ti] ^ or " advancement'* 



116 SECTION I. — CHINESE OFFICIAL RANKS. 

— in- other words, of public employ — may be obtained from eight 
different starting-points, which may be enumerated as follows, 
with references appended to those passages in the body of the 
present work in which they have been severally dealt with: 

i. Tsin She ^ i. — Metropolitan Graduate. (See Part IX, 
No. 473). 

ii. Ka Jen jjjk A» — Provincial Graduate. (See Part IX, 
No. 472). 

iii. Kung SMng ^ ^. — Senior Licentiate. (See Part IX, 
No. 471). 

iv. Yin ShSng Jg ^. — Honorary Licentiate. 

The holder of a certificate granted in consideration of services 
rendered to, or suffering undergone on behalf of, the State by a 
progenitor of the person thus distinguished. According to the 
circumstances of the case, the holder of such a certificate is termed 
either ngSn yin shSng jg, jS £ or nan yin sliSng 11 ^ ^ (see 
Part VIII, No. 455). 

V. Kieti Shing ^ ^. — Collegian of the Imperial Academy 
(see Part II, No. 247). Distinguished as Ngin Sheng ,@, ^, 
receiving the degree after an examination, and Li ShSng ^ ^, 
obtaining the same privilege by purchase, according to the now 
almost invariable usage. 

vi. ShSng Yoan ^ g.— Licentiate. (See Part IX, No 469). 

vii. Kwan Hioh ShSng '^ ^ ^. — Pupil of the Banner Schools 
pertaining to the Manchu military organization, or of the schools 

■ 

established for the benefit of imperial clansmen. 

viii. lA j[. — Government Clerk. (See Part VIII, No. 456, 
Note). 

The two higher classes of graduates, the Uin-she and kil-jSn, 
are collectively designated as k*o Ida ch'u shSn f| 7 Hi ^ (see 
Part IX, No. 467), and these, with the two next following classes, 
take rank in what is ofiicially designated the chSng t^u ]f« ^ or 
"proper path," i.e, the duly constituted avenue of advancement. 
By courtesy, also, the remaining classes, candidates from which 



SBCnOi!? K — CSIXBB OFflCUL KA:nE& 117 



obUin emploTmoit thioogh the splem otpao iii {K j|| or ^^recouK 
mcfidjitioDy"" L€L, sekdion br eompetefil »athorin\ mfe iiko 
reoognued as baving entered the poblie serriee on m similar 
fooliiig. A sabsidiaij means of obtaining rank and offiee> tbe 
Han gku JS 4ft ^^ pnichase-sTstem, wbicb has no\r almo^ bope« 
lesslv oTershadowed the ^' proper path/* althongh recogniaed in 
the Institates and periodicallT resorted to since the days of the 
Ming dynasty, owes the prodigious derelopment it has now amved 
at to the necessities imposed on the Grovemment by the first war 
with Great Britain and, a few years later, by the oatbreak of the 
Taiping rebellion. The year 1M3 saw the introduction of a sale 
of official titles, to a limited extent, which famished a precedent 
for the extension of the system thronghout die Empire by a Decree 
dated December 13th, 1850, sanctioning proposals to this effect on 
the part of the Board of Revenue.* Immense sums of money 
have been obtained, since that period, by the sale of patents of 
rank or of steps of advancement in actual employ; and alUiough, 
as a result of this policy, the Empire has been flooded with hosts 
of titular officials, beyond all proportion to the needs of the public 
service, it is undeniable that in some respects advantage has 
accrued from it to the public interest. The purchase-system, 
whilst admitting thousands of corrupt and incapable persons to 
official positions, has at the same time opened avenues of advance* 
ment to a class which is unfettered by literary traditions and 
prejudices, and has tended to weaken the hold of the narrow 
maxims of antiquity upon the conduct of public affairs. 

In continuance of the regulations enacted under the Ming 
dynasty, the existing system classifies all civil and military offices 
under nine degrees of rank, or, more properly, under eighteen, 
inasmuch as each rank or class— p^m a,— is divided into principal, 
chSng j£, and secondary, ts^ung |£. To these must bo added a 
nineteenth, or supplementary, class, embracing some of the lowest 
offices, to which the name of wei juh liu ^ A j% (^*^» **the 



* Ck'ow Manff She Li fl§ ffilft fft^ Memorials and Regulation! of the Board 
of Bevenuei 1850. 



118 SECTION I. — CHINESE OFFICIAL RANKS. 

stream-not-yet-entered") is assigned. A distinction, something 
analogous to which may be discovered in the Russian institution 
of the tclnriy is drawn between rank, the p^in ^ as above mentioned, 
with its accompanying qffiee, or chili ]||, and the actaal post or 
official charge, jen ^, to which appointment may be obtained. 
Although the three conditions are coordinated, in theory, by a 
series of minute regulations, rank and official employ are practically 
distinct and may be held irrespectively one of the other. The 
rank prescribed by regulation for the incumbent of each separate 
office is indicated as concisely as possible, in the body of the 
present work, by combinations such as 1 a, 1 b, and so forth, for 
the ^* principal" or "secondary" degrees of each of the nine 
classes. For the nineteenth or supplementary class referred to 
above, the equivalent "unclassed" has been adopted. 

Once invested with office in any degree of rank, as the result 
of competition or purchase, a Chinese official is placed upon the 
list of candidates for employment in the category to which he has 
been admitted, unless, indeed, as now habitually occurs, he has 
purchased a simple brevet — hien ^ — without pretensions to official 
employ. Whether admitted to his official position by competition 
or by purchase, the candidate is required to seek presentation in 
imperial audience, yin hien ^\ ^, before his claim for employment 
is recognized by the Board of Civil Office or of War as the case 
may be. This formality having been accomplished, the candidate 
takes his turn in the periodical "drawings" which are held in 
the course of each month at the offices of the Board, when the 
province of the empire in which feach individual among the succes- 
sive batches of candidates shall serve is determined by lot. When 
nominated in this wise to a provincial staff, the candidate, be he 
District Magistrate, Sub-Prefect, or Prefect by rank, on presenting 
his credentials to the local government, is enrolled upon the list 
of "expectants," the Iiow-pu pan ^ ^ JfiE, and resigns himself to 
a period of unattached service which may last for a considerable 
number of years. During this period of expectancy, however, a 
variety of forms of temporary employment, in connection with the 
judicial or revenue administration or upon special missions, are 



SECTION I. — CHINESE OFFICIAL RAfTKS. 119 

aecessible to the class of unattached officials, who discharge the 
duties confided to them in this manner under the generic designa- 
tion of wei yilan ^ ^ or delegates. From this expectant stage, 
the duration of which may be abridged by purchase or by recom- 
mendations on account of special services, the candidate at length 
emerges into substantive employ, which is prefaced by a year of 
probation — die yung {( ^ — made obligatory in all ranks from 
that of Intendant of Circuit (Taotai) downwards. Above the 
rank of Taotai, beyond which the operation of purchase scarcely 
extends, the system of "expectancy" ceases to operate, officials of 
the higher grades being either in continuous active employ or in 
retirement. This last-named condition is frequently brought about 
by means of a striking peculiarity of the Chinese system, in 
accordance with which every official is liable to be withdrawn 
from active service by the death of either of his parents. On the 
occurrence of such an event he is required by a stringent regula- 
tion to retire at once for the observance of the mourning rites — 
ting yeo "J* j| — during a period of nominally three years, in reality 
twenty-seven months. On the part of Manchu officials, the national 
custom restricts this period of mourning to one hundred days. 

Among the many devices which have been introduced in the 
Chinese system, with indifferent success, to provide a check upon 
corruption and misconduct, two may be especially noticed here. 
One of these is the rule prohibiting civil employes of whatever 
degree, with the exception of the local directors of instruction, 
from holding office in their native provinces ; and another is the 
practice of vacating office by the junior of two relatives who may 
be brought into contact with each other, within certain prescribed 
limits, in the same provincial area. This is designated hwd pi ^ 
^ or "respectful withdrawal" in the presence of a superior. 
When to these checks upon the tenure of office is added the 
virtually uncontrolled power which is wielded by the provincial 
governor over his subordinates of the class of ti-fang kwan ^ jl^f 
§, or "local authorities," i.«., the Prefects, Sub-Prefects, and 
Magistrates or Assistant Magistrates of various degrees, in the 
exercise of his functions of "impeachment" or "denunication" — 



120 SBCTIOIT I.— K3HmESB OFFICIAL RANKS. 

ts^an hSh jff^ ^ — as a result of which wholesale removals or 
degradatious continually occur, it will be seen that the position of 
a Chinese official^ especially in. the lower ranks, is at all times 
eminently insecure. 

With the foregoing particulars respecting the structure of 
the public service in China, the indications embodied in the several 
parts of the present work may be found the more readily avail- 
able. For a host of questions relating to minor details, such as 
cannot fail to suggest themselves to the student's mind, there 
can be no escape from the necessity of consulting the stores of 
information classified in the Ta IVing Hwei Tien and its vast 
appendices. 



SECTION II. — THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF DISTINCTIVE, &C. 121 



SECTION II.-7THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF DISTINCTIVE 

COLLOCATION OF CHARACTERS. 



An element of Chinese composition, due in part to the structure 
of the language itself, and in part to the rigorous formality of 
its written style, is the "elevation" of characters by different 
degrees as a means of indicating respect or reverence in varying 
gradations of importance. This graphic expedient takes the place, 
in fact, of the employment of either capital letters or a more 
conspicuous form of type in alphabetic languages, for the repre- 
sentation of honoured names or ideas; and, whilst its significance 
is infinitely more extended than any of the devices in vogue for 
the expression of respect, either at present or in past times, in 
Western countries, the system is applied under circumstances and 
subject to rules which cannot be safely ignored by any student of 
the language. 

The canon according to which the elevation of the written 
character is regulated is laid down with much minuteness in the 
K'o Ch'ang T'iao Li l^^iSk W? or Rules for the Literary Ex- 
aminations; but it is needless to undertake, for the purposes of 
the present work, any more than a condensed analysis of these 
prescriptions. The principle upon which the system is based 
may be most readily explained by premising that, as the ordinary 
method of writing in Chinese consists in the arrangement of 
characters, one after the other, in vertical columns, each column 
being, under ordinary circumstances, complete from top to bottom, 
respect is indicated by the elevation of certain characters to the 
top of the column next ensuing after the context, or to still- higher 
positions above the general level, as the case may be. Passing 
over, for the moment, the most ordinary token of respect or 
courtesy — that of position two spaces above the general upper plane 
— ithe official system of elevation is found to be divided into three 



122 



SECTION II. — THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF 



categories, indicative of as many degrees of respect or veneration. 
The three categories thus formed are distinguished as those of 
"single," "double," and "three-fold" elevation, these terms 
denoting the height above the ordinary level of the column to 
which the character is raised. Respect for the person and 
attributes of the sovereign and religious veneration for super- 
natural powers may thus be indicated, as also the sentiments of 
the same nature which are cherished on the part of imperial 
personages themselves with reference to their ancestors or elders 
and to the powers of Nature and the deities whom they worship. 
The several categories, collectively designated as t^ai sieh f§ ^ or 
t'ai t^ow f§ ^, may be described as follows : 

I. — Tan T'ai H |g. — Single Elevation. 

The raising of the character by one space above the general 
level is employed in referring to the abodes of Majesty, the Imperial 
Courty the attributes of government, proceedings by which the 
sovereign is addressed, and supernatural powers or beings of a 
secondary order of importance, together with the places at which 
their worship is conducted. The following examples are selected 
for the purpose of illustrating each of these subdivisions of the 
present category, the syllable representing the character elevated 
being printed in small capitals : 



i. Tlie abodes of Majesty: 



Ch^ao 


m 


K'UBH 


m 


King She 


:%Gi 


KUNG 


fr 


KuNG men 


§P1 


Tien T4ng 


Sst mi 


Tien She 


Km 


Tan Pi 


»m 


h'PMQ Ch^fin 


UM 


ShSng King 


iSi^, 



The Court. 

The Imperial palace. 

The Imperial capital. 

The Palace. 

The Palace portals. 

The Halls of the Palace. 
{ The Examinations held in the Palace 
t (see Part IX, No. 467). 

The Throne and its approaches. 

The Dwelling-places of Majesty. 

The capital situated in Manchuria. 



DISTDIOTIVB COLIOCATION OF CHABACTEBS. 123 

TszE Kin Ch*6nff «ii«-f^'^® ^^ prohibited City (the 

I. Impenal preeincts). 
TuAJsr-ming Yiian Q §9 H The Scuniaer Palace. 

ii. Attributes of government: 
KwoH Kia iM The State. 

KwohT4 Hfil I"'^® coBBtStution, or dignity, of 

I i}ie State. 
KwoH K'o B ^ The revenue. 

KuNG Ling ^ ^ The laws. 

iii. Proceedings addressed to the Sovereign: 
TsiK jm To offer, present. 

Tsm Knng jg 3| To make tribute-offering. 

KuNa Wuh ^ f§i Articles of tribute. 

T^i Pao ffi a&l /^^ report (in a certain prescribed 

I form). 
Tsow ^ To memorialize, report to the Throne. 

4(*« With reference to the character tsow^ it should be noted 
that, when used in combination with the .character lo^n H, form- 
ing a compound signifying " to report for the; Sovereign's informa- 
tion," its position is a matter of some uncertainty. The character 
whi being naturally raised by two spaces (se^ Shwang T'ai^ below,) 
the tsow which precedes it is seen by some Writers to be singly 
elevated, as usual, whilst others leave it Undistinguished in the 
column {cMh sieh ^ jg). The following examples, taken from 
different memorials in Peking Gazettes publisted in close succes- 
sion, will serve to illustrate both this anomaly in actual practice 
and also the system of elevation itself: 

« ^ ^ M m 



When used in connection with the character mingy to form 
the compound verb tsow ming ^ 58> signifying "to make report 
to the Throne," no elevation is given to the character* 



124 



SBCTIOl? U.— THE CHINBSB SYSTEM OF 



She Ying Etmg 
NiEN Hiang 



iv. References to Supernatural Powers: 
SnfiN H The gods or spirits. 

SHftN Che hien yeo JUiilifil ^® ""^"'^^^ interposition of the 

i. gods. 

EiAKO Sh^ {C H The God of the River. 

Hwo ShSn Miao !K || JM Temple of the God of Fire. 

It E « 1^* (imperial) Temple of Season- 

i able Response to Prayer. 
^ ^ To offer incense. 

It should be farther noted that in all reproductions of or 
quotations from imperial decrees of a reigning sovereign, the text 
of the decree is raised by one place in the document in which 
it is embodied. For the text of decrees of deceased Emperors, 
see below. 

11. Shwang T^ai C Ii^.— Double Elevation. 
This distinction is allotted to characters which refer to the 
person^ aUributeSf or actions of the reigning sovereign or his con- 
sort, as will be seen from the following examples : 

H. M. the Emperor, 
do. do. 

do. do. 

His Majesty. 
H. M. the Empress. 
The imperial (sacred) person. 
The celestial countenance. 

{The celestial favour, — His Ma- 
jesty's grace. 
An Imperial decree. 
Imperial instructions. 
His Majesty's assent. 
His Majesty's perusal. 

{An expression of the imperial will 
— a rescript or edict 
{The Vermilion Pencil — equivalent 
to the ^^sign manual." 



Ta Hwang T! 


:fcaft 


Hwang Ti 


a« 


Hwang Shano 


a± 


Shang 


± 


Hwang How 


aii 


Sb&NG EtlNG 


mm 


T*ienY«n 


Jim 


T<ienNo£n 


%B 


Shang Y6 


±m 


SiiNSHK 


M^ 


YttlflN 


*« 


Ye Las 


«IK 



Cms 



ChuPih 






P'iChun 


tt« 


MiNO 

Chao Eien 
Pi Kikn 

PiT&'ZB 




Em 


m 


KmKTKN 
K'm P'AT 
K'm Ch'ai 
P'ai Ch'u 


mn, 

mm 

ftH 


W ANO MllTQ 


£* 



{ 



DISTmCTIVS COLLOCATION OF CHABACTEB8. 125 

{Assent, or ratification, by the sign 
manual. 
His Majesty's commands. 
His Majesty's information. 
To summon to audience. 
To have audience. 
To have audience on departure. 
To have audience (when coming 

from a distance). 
As above. 

Imperially appointed. 
An Imperial commissioner or envoy. 
To appoint. 
j The so verei^'s mandate ({.a.^death- 
( warrant). 

By means of this double elevation of the character, the same 
effect is arrived at in Chinese as is produced in Western languages 
by prefixing honorific epithets to the title employed. Thus hwang 
shang ^ J^, written simply in the ordinary column (as is the 
case in decrees issued in the names of the Empresses now acting 
as Regents), must be translated simply as '^ the Emperor;" but 
Hwang Shang^ elevated according to rule, is fully equivalent to 
"His Majesty the Emperor." 

An application of the same system, practically established, 
although not recognized as yet by any formal canon, is employed 
for the purpose of designating with a proper degree of respect the 
countries with which China is now in diplomatic relation. Thus, 
Ying Kwoh ^ gj, set forth in the body of the column, may mean 
England, English, British; but Ying Kwoh or Ta Ying Kwoh J^ 
^ Bl elevated two places above the line, in correspondence with 
Ta TsHng Kwoh ;/l; jH H^ the designation of the Chinese Empire, 
conveys the meaning of Great Britain as a sovereign state, or 
"the British Oovemment" 

It is important to observe that the double elevation of the 
characters set forth above, and others of the same class, is confined 
to references to the reigning Sovereign or his consort, on the part 



126 SBCTION II. — ^THB CHINES^ STSTEK OF 

of those from whom a token of respect is due. Sach characters, 
when used in decrees of the Emperor himself, with reference to 
his own person or acts, or in decrees issued by the Empresses 
Regent, are not exalted; but when emplojed in decrees with 
reference to his Majesty's predecessors on the throne (to whom 
reverence is due even from the Emperor himself) they are elevated 
three spaces, in conformity with the principle upon which the 
following and last remaining category is based. 

The character KHn 0C is not elevated in the combination 
K^iii Ts^ze £k ][{;> which is appended with the signification ^^rever- 
ently this [received] " at the conclusion of all rescripts or decrees 
when copied out by the clerks of the Grand Council of State. 
The phrase forms no part of the decree itself, and should not bo 
translated *' Bespect this ! " as is often erroneously done. 

III. San T ^ai H il&- — Threefold Elevation. 

The respect which is due from the sovereign himself toward 
his ancestors or predecessors of the Imperial line, and their places 
of sepulture^ his guardians during minority, and the powers of 
nature and other objects of imperial worship, together with the 
temples or altars at which this worship is celebrated, is typified by 
the exaltation of characters to the third degree above the general 
plane. The following are examples of this form of usage : 

i. Imperial ^Ancestry and Places of Sepulture: 
LlEH Tsu yj Jjj^ The earliest Imperial ancestors. 

LiEH TsuNG JfJ ^ The Imperial ancestors. 

Sh^ng H His Sacred Majesty. 

Hwang K^ao ^ ^ [My] Imperial father. 

iTo " ascend upon the dragon to be 
a guest on high" (said on the oc- 
casion of an Emperor's decease). 

T'Ai Shang Hwang ± ± 1 I ^'' ^T^ ^^^ ^""P"™" ""^^ ^"^ 

I abdicated the Throne. 

Hwang T^ai How ^ ic i§ H. M. the Empress Dowager. 

TszE KuNG ^$ ^ The Imperial sarcophagus. 

Ling Ts^in ^ f^ The Imperial mausoleum. 



DISTINCTIVE COLliOOATION OF CHARACTERS. 127 

HwEi LiNa ;§ ^ I ^^^^ ^^ ^"® ^^ ^^^ Imperial 

I mausolea (see Part I, No. 130). 

ii. The Powera of Nature and Places of Warship: 
T^iEN 35 Heaven. 

Ti ^ Earth. 

The five Temples at which imperial 
■rr mc j« i-iu J sacrifices are offered to Heaven, 

^^ ** ' Earth, the bun, the Moon, and the 

Spirits of the Land and Grain. 
T^Ai MiAO -j^ ^ The Imperial Ancestral Temple. 

The Temple of the Great Exalted 

Ta Kao Tien + ^ B < ^""^ ^^^^ ""^'^^ "^^""^ ""^ '"'"'''^'P 

^ m a« j fQj. ^YiQ divinities of the Taoist 

pantheon). 

^*^f All those characters, having reference to the Emperor's 
person, acts, etc., which, when used in connection with a living 
Sovereign, are doubly elevated, are honoured with tJireefold 
elevation when used with reference to a deceased sovereign. 



RESPECTFUL ELEVATION IN CORRESPONDENCE. 

Distinct from the official categories of elevation, and yet 
partaking of the same nature with these, is the system pursued 
in forms of courtesy in correspondence, whether public or private, 
between individuals. Respect is shewn in correspondence of this 
kind by elevating the name or attributes of the person addressed 
to the second space above the general level of the column {shwang 
t'ai). Persons of rank superior to the writer are similarly 
honoured when referred to in correspondence. 

A practice has grown up in the semi-official correspondence 
between the Chinese Foreign Office and the representatives of 
foreign Powers, in view of the constant occurrence of passages 
requiring respectful elevation, in accordance with which all 
references to the individual addressed, on either side, are merely 
raised to the head of the column (pHng t^ai 2|i J§). The following 
is an example of this method ; — 



128 SECTION IL — THE CHINESE STSTEM OF DISTINCTIVE &C. 



M 


K 


* 


m 


^ 


m 


li 


± 


m 


m 


— ' 


A 


p. 


^ 


m 


m 


m 


ffr 


z: 


» 


5* 


^ 


il 




m 


5* 


* 
m 









Both in this style and in that of ordinary correspondence, all 
references to the person or attributes of a Sovereign necessitate 
elevation in accordance with the usual rules. 

In the issue of Proclamations, characters referring to the 
imperial person, court, etc., are similarly elevated in accordance 
with the rules set forth above. Beferences to superior authorities 
are dignified by elevation to the head of the column (p^ing t^ai 

An additional token of respect for individuals of superior 
rank is found in the practice of leaving a blank space, equivalent 
to one character, immediately following the name of the official 
referred to, when this is raised, with its accompanying title, to 
the head of the column. In cases where respect in a modified 
degree may be due to any official person, whose name is not 
entitled however to actual elevation, the desired result is obtained 
by leaving a blank space above the first character of his official 
title in the body of the column. 

In printed books, where it is important to economize space, 
the degree of "elevation" to which a character is entitled is fre- 
quently indicated by a blank space extending over a corresponding 
number of characters within the column. The courtesy of 
"elevation" it may also be noted in conclusion, is not extended 
to the Sovereigns of dynasties preceding that which is actually 
upon the Throne. 



SECTION III.— CHINESE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 129 



SECTION IIL-CHINESE RENDERINGS OF 

EUROPEAN TITLES* 



L — ^Titles of Sovereigns and Bulers.* 

Queen of Great Britain and Ireland.— :7a Ywg [KwoK\ 
Ta Knn Chu :fc ^ [g] :fc S ±- (In the Treaty of Nanking, 
1842, and the T^aty of Tientsin, 1858, the term Ta Ying Kan 
Chu :fi^1S i ^^ employed as the equivalent of Her Majesty's 
title; and this precedent, as introdaced in the rendering of the 
Treaty of Nanking, has been followed in the translation of the 
words ^^King'' or ^^ Queen" in the majority of the treaties 
negotiated with European Powers. In order to bring the title of 
Her Majesty more into harmony with that of the Emperor of 
China — described as Ta TsHng Ta Hwang-ti :kfll:kdi ft — ^® 
phrase was slightly altered in the rendering of the Convention of 
Peking, 1860, thenceforward standing as it is given above, i.6., 
with the addition of the word Ta or ^^ Great" to the characters 
Ktln Chu). 

Empress of India. — Yin-tu Haw Ti PPft j§ ft. (Creden- 
tials of Ewoh Sung-tao, Envoy Extraordinary to Great Britain, 
October, 1876). 

EiiPEROR OF the French. — Ta Fah Kwoh Ta Hwang-ti ^ 
life ■ A fi ft* (French Treaty of Tientsin, 1858). 

President of the United States. — Ta Met Kwoh Ta PSh- 
U-nih'^t'ien'tSh ^HHi^fdiiS^tt. (Additional Articles 
signed at Washington, 1868. The rendering of "President" by 
the phonetic compound given above was originally adopted at the 
negotiation of the first United States' Treaiy with China in 1844, 
and it has continued subsequently in use as the recognized equi- 
valent for the title of the elected Rulers of republican — min chu 

* These are invariably elevated by two spaces above the general level (skwang 
tai). See Pftrt II, arUe. 



130 SECTION m.— CHINESE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 

J5 i — communities. The designation selected for the United 
States, in the Treaty of 1844, was Holi Chung Kwoh ^ ^ gj, — 
a term adopted with the view of expressing the Federal character 
of the United States' aiSministration ; and in the Treaty of Tien- 
tsin, in 1858, the rendering was expanded into the following 
characters: Ta A^mei-li-kia Holt Chung Kwoh ;K; 3S % 3 S 
^ fk W' ^"4^ unwieldy compound has now, however, been 
abandoned in favour of the designation employed in 1868). 

Czar of Russia. — Ta Ngo-lo-aze Kwoh Ta Hwang-ti :^ ^ 
li ^ B :fc S: ^* (Treaty of Peking, 1860. In the translation 
of the Treaty signed at Tientsin by Count Futiatin, in 1858, the 
twm employed is Teze Chwan Chu ^ 4^ £9 by which, apparently, 
"Autocrat^' is meant to be rendered. In the concluding article 
of the same Treaty the expression Siting Chu Hwang-ti £ ^ S 
^ — Sacred Lord and Emperor — is applied to the sovereigns of 
both the contracting Powers). 

German Emperor. — Ta Teh Kwoh Ta Hwang-ti :K; ^ B 
^ ^ ^. (Employed in correspondence since the assumption of 
the above title by the King of Prussia. The character T4h ^, 
adopted as the national designation for Germany, is an abbrevia- 
tion of TSh'i^he ^ ^ i^, employed as the phonetic rendering of 
the word DetUsch (German) in the Treaty signed at Tientsin in 
1861. In this instrument, the King of Prussia is designated as 
Ta Pu Kwoh Ta Kun Chu^^%:)^1^ i). 

Emperor-King of Austria-Hungary. — Ta Ngao-aze Ma- 

km Kwoh Ta Hwang Shang :fc|i*fJiftlH:*;l-t' (Treaty of 
1869. In this instrument, the compound "Ma-kia" is employed 
as an equivalent of " Magyar-orszdg," or Hungary). 

King of Denmark.— Ta Tan KwohTa Kan Chu :fzitWi 
*S ±- (Treaty of 1863). 

King of the Belgians.— Ta Pi Kwoh Ta Kan Chu ^ flj 
B ^ S £• (Treaty of 1865. In this instrument, Pi^lUshe 
vHi ^ JHf ^^ adopted as the rendering of Beige or Belgique). 

King of the Netherlands.— Ta Ho KwoJi Ta Kun Chu 
:fc % B ifc S £• (Treaty of 1863. In this instnuneBt, the 



SECTION III. — CHINESE RENDEBINOS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 131 

older designation Ho-lan ^ ||f, formerly in use as the equivalent 
of " Holland," was superseded by the character given above). 

KiiJg of Sweden and Norway. — Ta Jui-tien Kwoh No-wei 

Kwoh Ta ^«n aw ^ § H H J5 IS a * ^ i- (Treaty of 
1847). 

Queen [or King] of Spain. — Ta JUi-sze-pa-ni-a Kwoh Ta 
Kun C/m :fc' H JB B ;e 35 H :^ g ±. (Treaty of 1864. 
According to this instrument, the name Lu-sung g 5|5, from 
LuQon, the native designation of the Philippine Islands, which 
is commonly applied to Spain itself by the Chinese, should be 
abandoned). 

King of Italy.— Ta 1 Kwoh Ta KUn Chu^H/^Jgi :fcg i- 
(Treaty of 1866). 

Mikado of Japan. — No title for either of the sovereigns of 
the two contracting Powers is employed in the Treaty concluded 
between Japan and China in 1871. The Treaty runs in the name 
of the two countries, Ta TsHng Kwoh ::X; JH BJ and Ta Jih-pin 
Kwoh :;K; B ^ B* The equality of the two Powers is fully expressed 
in the position of the characters and in other needful respects). 

President of Peru. — Ta Pi Kwoh Ta Peh-li-sze'tHen-Uh ^ 
IKB:fcf6aM35S- (Treaty of 1874. In this instrument, Pi-lu 
^ ^ are the characters employed to represent the word Peru). 

11. Designations of Governments, Departments of State, 
and Public Functionaries. 

The Government (head of the State). — Ch^ao THng, f| ®; 
or Kwoh Kia B ^.* 

The Government (Ministers of State collectively. — Ch^ao I 

* It should be noted also that the word Kwoh B alone is not unfrequently 
used in the sense of " Goyernment/' in which case it is elevated (tan fai) by one 
space above the general column level — See Part II, ante. Thus, in the combina- 
tion Ting Kn>oh ^ ■, elevation as above stated would convey the meaning 
^'British Government;" whereas, when employed without elevation, the same 
characters would signify ^* England" (or Great Britain), *' British" or "English," 
without reference to the soyereign or the government 



132 SBCTION III.— CHINESE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 

Ta Ch'hi t8i%^^\ or, Piy^g K'nan Ta Ch'hi J|l:feS- ^^y 
T'ing Ch'iu g g. 

The Imperial Parliament (of Great Britain and Ireland).— 

/ a% Kxooh Hum li ift B #• 
The Upper House Shang T^ang 

The Lower House Eia T^ang 

Member of Parliament Kwoh Hwei Ts^an I 
The Privy Council Chung Koh 

Privy Councillor Chung Koh Ts^an I 

Cabinet 
Treasury 
Home Office 
Foreign Office 
Colonial Office 
War Office 



± 



Admiralty 

India Office 

Board of Trade 
Post Office 



Shu Mill Yuan 
Tu Che Yarn 
Nui Ching Yamin 
Wax Chhig Yamin 
Fan ChSvg YamSn 
Ping ChSng Yarn/n 

{Shuei She Ping Ching 
Yam4n 

( Tsung Li Yin~tu Ching 
\ Wuh YamSn 

Shnng Ching Yamin 
Yeo Ching Yamin 



^^^ 



Local Government Board Hu Cliifng Yamin 
Office of Works Kung Citing Yamin 

High Court of Judicature T'ung Fah Sze 

First Lord of the 






TrlJ^'ryCP^^^^^^ ^^n Show Siang flgJgKt* 



Cabinet Minister Ch^tng Siang 

Chancellor of Exchequer Tu Che Y&an She 
Lord Chancellor La Fah Ta Hioh She 

Judge Nieh Sze 

Under Secretary of State ^M Li Ta Ch'in 



Clerk of a Department SeeXwan^'^^otTeungJPanig^^ 






SECTION III. — CHIKBSE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 133 



Chancellor of University Chang YUan Hioh She 
Lord Lieutenant 



Lord Mayor 

Alderman 

Justice of the Peace 

Barrister 

Police Magistrate 

Police 



Tsieh Tu she 0£^ 

Chih Nien Show She Shin K'i || :^ #$i^^ 

Shin KH 

Chang Fah Sliin She 

La She 

Pu Wuft Che Swei 

(Pu Yih or 
\ Ch'a Kiel Ping 






III. Diplomatic and Consular Titles. 



Ambassador 

Envoy and Minister 
Plenipotentiary* 

Minister Resident 

Charge d' Affaires 



} 



Secretary of Legation 



Chinese Secretary 

Consnl-General 

Consul 

Vice-Oonsol 

Interpreter 

Consular Assistant 

Student Interpreter 



f T'ow ting KHn Ch'ai 
I Ta Ch'Sn 

Urh tSng KHn Ch'ai 
Ta Ch'en 

fSan tSng ICin Ch^ai 
\ Ta Ch'Sn 

Shu KHn Ch'ai Ta Ch'in 

Ts^an-tsan $9 (in dif- 
ferent classes, as 1st 
Secretary, T^ow teng 

Ts'an^tsan M ^ ^ 9t, 
^ and so on). 

Han Wuh Ta^an-tsan^ 
Tsung Ling She Kwan 
Ling She Kwan 
Fu Ling She Kwan 
Fan Yi/i Kioan 
Fu Fan Yik Kwan 
Fan Yih Hioh ShSng 






AS 






* The fuU title assigned to Her Britannic Majesty's Minister Plenipotentiary 

inChinaisasfoUows: * iS^ «k H S fj + * ffi !£ fx » ;/t 6- The 

ordinary designation employed in conversation and correspondence is chu Una 

ta oh e/i it 3§C :;^ E- The expressions kung she ii^ ^y and she chin ^ Eg, 
heretofore often erroneously used in correspondence, have been formally aban- 
doned by the Chinese government. 

t This rendering is adopted in lieu of the expression Han Win Cheng She 

SI 3t iE ffi> formerly employed m the equivalent of " Chinese Secretary," 



134 SECTION ni. — CHINESE BENDERIHGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 



jjVban- 



British Supreme 
Court (Shanghai) 

Chief Judge of \ ^r ic ci 

oupreme Court j ^ 

Deputy Chief Judge Fu Nieh^sze 

Law Secretary Sze^li Hieh-shSn Kwan 



cli^a She YamSn fiJSf'ffi^W 



^m^ 



19:% PJ 



IV. Indian and Colonial Titles. 
Viceroy of India < 



Yin-tu Til Kien Tswh Tu PPSftlttiUt 
Ta Ch'Sfi 



Commissioner of a \ rr i' m j-itc^ 



Tmng-tuh 
Hieh4i Ta Ch'4n 
I Cheng Kuh 
Ting Li Kuh 
Fu Chhig Sze 
Ngan^ch'a Sze 
Fu Nieh Sze 









Province 

Governor of a Colony 

Lieutenant-Governor 

Executive Council 

Legislative Council 

Colonial Secretary 

Chief Justice 

Puisne Judge 

Registrar-General 
of Hongkong 

Harbour Master 

Superintendent of Police 5«n Pu Kwan 

V. Military and Naval Titles: 
a. Army. 

Commander-in-chief, \Ping Ma Yuan Shwai or JcMICfib; or 
- -^'"-'-^ ^--^"^ f King Lioh %^ ^^ '^^^ ' 



}■ Hwa Min ChSng Wuh Sze ^JglgfciJr^ 
Ch'wan ChSng Ting JlSttJi 



or Field Marshal 
General 

Lieutenant-General 
Major-General 
Brigade-General 
Colonel 



Tsiang Kiln jflFJS 

T'ow'teng TH-tuh Kiln-m^^^^^^lgif^ 
TH'tuh Knn-mSn ||§ 5 f^ 

Tmng^ping ^£^ 

Fu-tsiang gjjff 



♦ The foregoing titles, from "Executive Council" downwards, are taken from 
a list officially published by the government of Hongkong, in Notification No. 210 
of December 28th, 1874. The word cJi'u /£, it may be noted, would be prefer- 
able, in substitution for kilh ^, in the rendering of " Council." 



SXOTIOK m.— CfHINESfi BENDSBIKOS OF SUROPBAK TITCB8. 185 

Lientenant-Colonel Ts^an-tsiahg ^JK 

Major Yeo'ki fj^^ 

Captain Tu-sze |P^ 

Lieutenant . Show^pei i^H 

Sub-lieutenant Ts^ien^tvung if|| 

Sergeant Pa-'tsung IQH 

Corporal Wautvei f/^,^ 

Private Ping^ting Jg^f 

Cavalry soldier Ma Ping JB||^ 

Artillery „ P'ao Ping ^^ 

Infantry „ Pu Ping ^|^ 

Engineer Km ^ung Ping IRXI? 

Military Secretariat; & ) ^. „ , ^, 

Military Secretary f ^'""S^ ^"* <^*'" SSA 

Adjutant Ft'A Chang Hg 

Aide-de-camp CAMnjf JTiXn ij^jv 

Surgeon /^w^an ||<g» 

Commissariat, and 1 ^ . ^, . 

Commissaiy / ^'^''9 T'at ^^ 

b. Navy. 

Commander-in-chief Shuei-^ske T'ung Ling ;j^mKfi| 

Admiral / T'ow-Ung Shuei-she Ti^tuh M^il:U%!fH 

\ KUn-mSn [SIK* 

Vice-Admiral (Urh^tSng Shui^she Ti^tuh nflf^fiPJUl 

( KUn-^mifii [Sn 

Rear- Admiral (San-tSng Shuei-she Ti^tuh Hft^Jtttiilf 

Commodore Shuei-she Tsung^t'ung ;jt6V||!||| 

Post-captain (senior) Tmng-^Ping mSi 

do. (junior) Fu-tdang mm 

Commander Ts'an-tsiang ^^ 

Surgeon IKwan jg>^ 

Lieutenant-commanding YeO'ki MWt 

• .The ordinary colloquial designation for an Admiral is Shuei-sh<, rutuh. 
The title £iin MH is employed only in correspondence. 



ids sBcmoir m.-^-ORijrBBx xsNDSsxikn of xmK^ sah mm. 



Lieutenant (ainior) 


Tu'8ze 


mn 


do. (junior) 


Shaw'pei 


^m 


Sub-lieutenaai 


Ts^ien-isung 


^m 


Engineer Offioer 


Sze Lun Kwm 


nnt 


Midshipman 


Eioh Shhig 


m^ 


Warrant Offioer 


Tauten FSng 


m« 


Petty Offiear 


Lififf'-ts^ui 


mm 


Seaman 


P'ao Show 


m^ 


Marine 


Pu Ping 


** 


Secretary to an Admiral Ying Wuh Ch^u 


«»« 


Flag LieoteiMint 


Chung KUn 


+:» 


Surveying Offroer 


Ts'ih^liang Kwcm 


Mfttr 



KBLLT k WAL8B, UMTISD, PEIKTSBB, SHAKaHAX. 



INDEX OF CHINESE CHAEACTEES. 



— BADICAL 1. 

■^ H*|373,iii, Hj||283; 
= ^472;HK86; 
Ha 136; Hat 136; 

jft79;H^l«0«C 
517;HJ»«rM182,x, 

H M « 414; ± IB 
K86. 



T S » 379. 

;p X A fl' 23, 24. 



T 

iu. 

IS IS ^10, 39; ill S 455; 
igg^454;-KS9{583; 
i£ 11^^28, 454 ;i!| 
«j!E®387. 

o&-% i^\i^ 288. 

I RADICAL 2. 
4* +«2;4»^135; + tt 

147 ; ift K H 148 ; (f* 



± 



kiu 



3l 



wu 



fT«272; + U;^^ 

456; 4» it :* * 456; 
+ 2g 274; + H it 
272 ; rf. II 273, 453 ; 
*f* ^ 576. 

'^ RADICAL 3. 



chu i^l;i^65,166;i 
Igt 166; i 0227, 292. 



Za RADICAL 5. 

:ft. PI S * 348; :ft. fi 
A 456;^ 6 517. 

J RADICAL 6. 



y« «a3E48. 

H RADICAL* 7, 

"^ i:p291;-^477;- 
& * A 456. 



S# 200, 231; SHU 
±211;£tiE265; 

£i«342;3LM^£ 
189, 342. 



138 



INBBZ OF CHIHBSB CHARACTBBS. 



king 



RADICAL 8. 



^, ^ 339. 




8%n 




\ RADICAL 9. 



ling 



«||S t 356. 



rf» if SI 207 J if « US 456 
i^WHSLt^ 456. 

^«!rt«362j>^:^ft301. 




cfcih i^ ^ M 379. 



peh 
tso 



m 



the 



she 



1? 5$ 569. 
>^ 289. 

#^BHE515;fll!^}|| 

St 557. 

ffi 455 ; f6 ^ 532, 563 ; 
(6 « m 373, iii. 

«tl5l97;tE5|322;ffi 
15: 288; B m 387, 
429, 544. 

^|ttpS85:f#j^ff 

g96;#lr>l«l;f# 
iai86;#g|206;f# 

Hl^ ± 204; f^ ^ 
205; ft 18 ^±203. 

^ n 468. 




M^iT ^i%S411. 




ch'toan. ft |t 477. 

*•««» ^ ^ 334. 

iS ft ^3 492; Itm 493; 
ft jE 394 ; ft t 495. 

S ft K ^471. 



JL RADICAL 10- 



^ 



*«>««<» 3fc«^#230;3feil;*:* 

456. 



« 



w. j£ 5i l!5 i 53 ; ^ ft :S 
512. 



Jioui g| 455. 



P3 



nu* 



7^ RADICAL 11. 

^83;^iiil§83; 
ft|gl34;ftgi^± 

143;ftSf#fl^± 
144;feS|irS151i 



raOBX OF OHIHXen OEABiLCTBBS. 



18» 



147 ; ft 5lh SI 1& 508 ; 
ft «| 83, 379; ft :^ E 
93;ft««5f62;ft|| 
483; ft JK: 16 1^ 483 ; 
«ll«^482. 

««w^ ffi K 274. 

A RADICAL 12. 
-t 

pah Aa[379;;\p«J|A466. 

*tmj ^ 21, 455 ; ^ i 12 ; ^ 

+ ^ » 387. 



:^ ^ 153, et seq.; jf; ^ 
247; pf; ^ 188. 

^S|J156;£^Ji280; 
:S ^ W it » 343; jg 
ll^@Jitl|344. 



liu 



J9L 



*«35;J(tJ|212,253; 
H jg 146, 341, 254; 
4k A 294. 



kim II 455 ; ^ ^ 339. 
RADICAL 14. 





iman M9L^ 112. 

JJ RADICAL 18. 

^387. 



ch! iW SP 273 ; fij ^ 273. 

JO 

««*« M A ^84. 






SI] 




1»5l;^Ei07;fl5r«Ef^ 

«S403;fr«[S405; 

m»433; nn^ 

401 ; Hr IR 564. 

SII«187;glJA334;giJ 
SC ^ 340 ; lU H ^ 
471; glja^t 58; 
glj ii H f@ 384; glj 
||{ H 370, 381, 427 ; 
glj JH 442 ; glj 3^ 442 ; 
glj I? 448 ; glj HJ 492 ; 
glj^ ^336; gH ^ 
472;glJlB164;g||g 
■& 338 ; glj m 378 ; glj 
m 306-; glj i ^ 480 ; 

glj ^t 480; glj IK « 
480;g|jJt^|Ll]£ 
:X: i«j l« 603 ; glj ^ Hi 

Wl 606 ; glj gS :g 536 ; 
glj JNf :S 552. 



;fy RADICAL 19. 
^» |&»256. 



fidtl 



15 455. 



140 



INDEX OF CHIKIBSS CHABACTEBS. 




yung M ^^9 ; 465. 



Uumj 3^ M ^66. 




Wan Si ^ 550. 
hun ® If ffi M 387. 



iS 



nan 



1i 



^ RADICAL 20. 



-a 



Q^ 36,379; Q^^ 

m37;€i^«m38. 

{i RADICAL 21. 

-f* RADICAL 24. 

.Wfc +At272;qi|®i[5]8. 

t.*e» ^ ^335; ^5^447 ;=f- 

II 447. 

pL ^MBM 388. 









»:*:E56i;iawt5t 

573 ; ia a ^ W 540. 

llf4b#*El52;iflS 

88;* 1)1247; if* 
M259. 

If i 240, 252. 
f* RADICAL 25. 



-^ » 517. 
P RADICAL 26. 

fP l!r « IR 382; EP » « 
5?, 385; fpjgtsgi. 




Jtinj ^ 232. 



j^ /^ S" 182, ii; 




4C a 585. 



cho ^mB9i511;^;g1|} 
577; $. ^ If fUM^ 594. 

^k iai»*Jiil36;KI? 
136; IS at K5 175, 245; 
ft 439 ; ia •& 442 ; 18 
^428;iaiK352;JS; 



ngih 







«hoio 



P RADICAL 27. 



JE # It 518. 
J^ RADICAL 28. 

^ {R 37, 382, 383, 384, 
543;^»295;«i3^ 
443 ; 3R {» 443; ^ HT 
443 ; « K :fc E 558. 

% RADICAL 29. 
li^ S 150, 483, 487. 



INDEX OP CHINMB CHAKACrTERS. 



141 



t'at 

yeo 



% 



sze 



P BADICAL 80. 

^ iS 538 ; ^ it 550. 

$#II5161;^|f1fl99; 

»iafel87,274;^ 
**& + A225;;e# 
«^«-? 223; ^3g 
294. See 2£. 

3 439; gJH 282, 284 J 
SI§ 152, 166, 343; 
^1152;^iS^ 

343, 344; 3 fl^ 33; 
^E 171; ^ I E 
422 ; ^ a 305 ; g |5f 
11182, iii; ^ HI 306; 
nm$S^ 176; ^ IK 
246; fl^ 170,302; 

R)^279;^|gjg2% 
.i|224;^|jfl68;g 
II|250;SIJJ167. 

i^h # W tt Ejf 425. 



§ # i|S 373. 






ehao 








It 



:fc g 585. 

^»282;^^f^481; 

1^ Ji ± ffl # 477. 

£ ^ 153; |g ^ 456; 
fi S 287, 345. 



1^ 

•hu 
'ho 



'ha 



■^if« 374; If II 1(3^ 
585; If IJISSB 589. 

■ 

*Hi^iJ4;ft^®ja 
3E 17; ftS^JiJE 
173; %iW^^ Mm 
174; ft ^!|t 521, 525. 

»&S3£582;I^Pi|| 
#533. 




eMh 




yOan ^ ^ ^ 164. 

s/iao P^ 439. 

KM 

'^ «l«||684;!Ba|585. 



«M;f:95iO;||f^^ 

# G 596. 



ea«g JS'j5r#564. 

»'«»«? lar^t 4#E570; isf J: 

568. 

««|i$517;|$nf8gp« 

11314; l$1i«£i| 
512;l|flirii!}iC.611. 

*ltffi^279;||«t 
496. 

m W :ll}- il P$ ■ 587, 
600;|!Hlr||567;|!g 
S567. 






<^n 



P 



ka 



142 



n 



SMe 



INDEX OF CHINBSB CHARACTBES. 








wei 



± 



JH RADICAL 31. 

|J5^ 614; 18^548. 
Bill 379; Hill ^^ 

20 ; a jisr a i 13. 



B£f|215. 



yi«.» m RQ a 88 ; n i^ SI A 

IE 416 ; H Jg 585, 



g^ 436,548; g^lit 
437 ; B ift H ^ 438. 

i RADICAL 32. 

± t 328 ; ± ;l5f W fg 
328;±g329;±|R 

^511; ±m^^ 
5-^0; ±j»HfFfi5517. 



ft'au ^ ^ 588. 



tJ^g fe & 469. 







IB « 374. ii. 
± RADICAL 33. 

&ng 5ft ^ 439, 452. 






to 



fari art 344. 

a «iHM357;J«P5l| 
3S9 ; « 1^ J» 371 ; J8 
ii « 506. 

?S tt 162; ^115+ 64; 
^ i l|p 65, 165. 

^ #1|182, xvi. 






;^ RADICAL 36. 

«> «| 879 ;«» 11483 ; ^ 
£«'&486;^IH:« 
©487;^^^^ 
449 ; ^ ^ }C «| 450. 
«»SSIl&M6;«»Ji508. 

«J19; |;#tl&598. 

^ Radical 37. 
:*; fl «l 162 ; :fc ^, ffi 

162 ; :*; ^ Ji 162 ; :fc 

^Jg 162; rfc^a? 
162;:^i8iat479;:fc 

l&l* 188;. :km± 

135;:^:^289;:^g 
396;:^a443;^^ 

472 ; :^ i ^ 479 ; :«: 

S 5Sf 195 ; :^ 31 # JBI 
196;:^a#iJ?j|pi07; 



iNDBX or casmtsB ohibactbbs. 



143 



t*ai 





flng 





wei 



232;:fc^^232;:^ 
ff A250;:*;f|j|ft232. 

35 III if » 557. 



*Slil37;*Jil38 

«#229;t*247; 
i:«K 268; i;!^ 
281. 

M^ M'M 565. 

H a ^ 22 ; ^ g ;i| 
I|27;$g.j(|3it28; 
1^ a ^ 88 ; *1t 233; 

456 ; $ H ;X; * 456. 



Uow H ^ iS 1^^' 



;^ RADICA L 88. 
/« iB *. 5, 6. 



*±*66; 
31^ 102; H 
m 355 ; ^Ji 
390, 432 ; -^ 







«404. 



p-m jjj[ 7. 
pin 



■y* BADICAL 39. 
tsze ^ 455. 

?L 

^'ung F^ 9 214. 




Wao tSK118;^]g|i|119; 

478. 





/ao/^ 



» »#fiI5 456;jg| A456. 



mm 258, 304; |p|^ 257; 
#1 K 323 ; 4fi ^ 323 ; 
^ j^ 323. 

*^ BADICAL 40, 

'9't446;*3*JiJ446;«3i 
|$g439; <^281. 

Sr«^^334;^||5g 
557 ; ^ A 456. 

^m29;^Afl5F55;^ 

J|l58;^,^^iie99; 

^fe232;^?&a564. 

« * « 373. 



-tJ- 



ngan 



tsung 




ning 



»«<»» 1lr»ft84;'|f.|S847, 



144 



INDKX or CBENBSK CHABACTBB8. 



ting 




8uan 



il£ gij in « 332 ; ^ 

e|128; J£}$582. 



r JK A 456. 



n 331 ; JteiB 456 ; 
ItaiAS 436 ; 1[ $il W 

^ m 315. 

«»136;g/t221;g 
K 226 ; ;& :fc 225 ; ar 



Jcung 








;r ^4B]35;^ 11538. 



ch'a. gfF|gJH?595;^B& 
HIOSII 349 ; ^ n^ 18 

527. 

«m^363;«i||^ 
364; ft £4.57. 

^t* JRADICAL 41. 
Z # ^ 198, 234. 

it 

^9 ^456; »» 456. 

uSng )» SI 25 to 28, 367, 426, 
456, 557. 




'J 



siao 



4 



Si «««490. 



>^^ 3ADICAL 42. 

>J«%»133;>J,^« 
418;*J>^j||200. 



:hao *p^ 162 ; tp^i^ 162 ; 

'>^ (6 162 ; >> fl H 

162 ; fj? SI 3g 162 ; iJ? 
^ S 162 ; 4|^ 1$ 140 
4? 1i 141 ; il? » 142 
0? fll 233 ; >> If 222 
fj> ^ 222, 294 ; fl? fj 
JI«250;iJ?^294;>> 
Jj!f 294. 

thanir fq 41^ 160. 

ill RADICAL 46. 
lU 

shan III # 491. 

^«j #!SCl1ffi«460. 



c/iott; 



A«< 



«iin 



(^< RADICAL 47. 
jH1272,284;iW^J^285; 

m n 286 ; m^m 

286 ; !Hi 1^ 285. 

^11274; JSS^Ji 273; JSS 
m 293 J JS as 348. 

X RADICAL 48. 



X 

i^n« X tt 138- 



iKOK ov cHimBfiS' cn^RAaneasai 




tao 



pa 






145 



2fe ^ US 161; £ IS fim 

185;/fc^glJ«lllA 
187; 2fe;ef#gE 198, 

234;^3&ff*l®9; 
4«?»ffitt861;2fe 

ft29l;£^«tSr«E 
li!ffi402;£$i[J^ 

+ *225;2E;ei6|ij 

264; ^>&K^270; 

««rJ|.|l:^349;^ 

«iEar«^223;2£ 

«.JE- 504; 4:^11 

ft 496; 2£;&rlltt 

505;2£«ft||499; 
£«&l&498;£« 

W « 497; ^ ;& MJI 
507;2£^JiJ| 506. 



g< RADICAL 49. 

a W If 628 ; B # 512; 
B ■# 465; a^p 
565 ; B Jg.ff- 587. 

r|j feADICA L 50. 

«ftiS^^275;$if|# 
^2; ;iir«i||#533. 



c'Vo»j flj ^£ 9. 




pang 



«j»*E 561, 564, 565; 

f* RADICAL 5^: 
•« ^ JE 180; 236. 







Vu 



*W«|290; jj5f^339, 
368; J(SF272,281j ;fip 
S 66, 340, 369. 

iij||617,596;j$||'if 
»*B5S6;J»:^« 
297; jS|||297. 



rtnj Jg 272. 

fi aW±210,473;|l|flJ 
11210. 






Zin 




«5: ai«294; Altf 276. 

St, n x 303^ a ^ -a' «7. 



ji ^ 470; sum So. 470- 
iJL RADICAL 54. 



fing |g |IJ 196. 

^ RADICAL 57. 

jiarjr48a 

;f RADICAL 60. 



igA:f:Si06; ag 

564. 



v« tt|-Mr:X:S 103; i||tj# 

« 104; »m^j| 




mt 








how 




146 



INSIX OV CHmiSE CHAB1CTBB8. 



105;|ip£189;tt|£ 
«HB271. 







M at 31 305 ; at IS 9C Ift 
305 ; at M 306; at fj 
m « 306. 




cvSis at ft ^^56. 
tfh* ^ 7t^ H ^^^• 



i^v RADICAL 61. 



tf^ 



r -tgais*. 



fA 



fc'io t^ ^ ■ 556. 

SI 

■ ^ JBS^471;lli455; 
f.ttj»455;lSi:467. 

hung ^ A 456. 



IS B H 130 ; lit « 557. 



S 




Ain ft ^ ^ 81. 



u »g| 126; Big 11127. 




mu 



*•<»? JK S 9 '^^• 




:^ RADICAL 62. 



tSi 18 5$ 579. 




^ RADICAL 63. 



hu, ]^ % 154. 




fomg § ^ 481. 

■^ RADICAL 64. 

if 

cfti fL§!|*510; }L#!|# 

5il;fLS$ilfF% 

517 ; ft SI ^ 537 ; ft, 

»&«i:>531;afPft* 

564, 586 J }L 1 }£ l«l 
8^604. 

ta Jrtt375. 

It 

p=< It i^^:^ ^312. 

cV^git^l!|5456;3|^l[^lrigfc 
-^^272. 

pa IE H 448. 

'a ^m&47i. 

eft" ®W^327;Sltffi3 
333. 

e][e ^ IS is ^ 330. 

S * S E 266. 

l^n «gS276;«tt469. 

^ lifiEmi!)283;|gfi274. 



IKDSX OF CHOnSl CHASACT1B8. 



147 




^ Sa«182,xv. 




show a 456. 



^1^ 



£189;Sfl|^75; 

m^m^j^mm 602. 




?an ll«476. 




« HIB 150,217; Jgfit 
485 ; H iH 182, xvi; H 
^440;Ji^440;|| 
#:>Ln348;Ji|f^ 
n347;S#||K323. 
H fl 309 ; ii g 439 

? «K274;a|^274;a| 
3t274;a|g439. 

m m 329. 

J^ RADICAL. 66 

.7^ IR Si 150, 483, 487. 
ioi Bfc±«i«328. 



^ JKl$303;tfc||305;» 
•g 472, 303—306. 




5)at 




mtti 



1=/ «:«r456. 




ao 



m 



san 



ttW*393jttff512. 



«t|210;«!W284;tfc 

ft:fcE9*- 

^<;tt«firn5. 

;^ RADICAL 67. 

tSr 3SC*JR135;UtS323; 

i|^182,xviii;^JK 
11273. 

>5r RADICAL 70. 

& *f6 275; J5r^t|150; 
* ft 492. 




Hi IR379. 



RADICAL 72. 



ev?»9 lg!124:g|fttl25. 
^j, ^j|Sf289;l)Q|l9lf^580.* 

cAao US W 19! 117; BH ifiji B 

512. 
wnj il; K 120. 




ch'o^ d $ H 88. 



148 



iHmx OF eHmn ohasacubs. 



RADICAL 73. 



Bg 4&1A. 

ttSI78. 
^ RADICAL 74. 

" «i!t473;im^*456. 
;t; RADICAL 75. 

e» *tlit!|#510,519;tt 




r»«j )KS2,10;}KWI|116; 

m^ 135; mmm 

583 ; 3K H ^ 365. 



^ iEt«Jftl89. 



3P, S 512. 

^t Kf 45A; t JB a 609; 
# K 610. 



nai 




panflf tff BR ^"7^- 





ngan 



m » 468. 



£ i;g }$ !N Ml 593. 



^ flltB57l. 



yoh I!lflll59j!||^177, 



S* 1t»209;4i|«321, 



ftll:fc*456. 

^ RADICAL 76, 



w« fir 35 11260. 




ywfiflf 





Tiivow St 4P 'ft ^^' ' 

Jh RADICAL 77- 

jg 281, 289 ; iEft 379; 
jE 6 379 ; jE IE 379 ; 
aE« 8.79; jE*t 
479 ; jE HJ 492. 

^ ^ m S 347, 406 ; ^ W 
«ltli348;^a«f354. 



« 



^ ^^JBJ35;|$J8if£ 
^ 182, xi; It-t K 
87;|CJB|t»||3182, 

xvii ; IS m « 273. 



592. 




8Ut 



INEKEX OF 



OKABACZBBS. 



149 



jt RADICAL 79. 

J^J RADICAL 81. 

pi Jfc532; Jfcfi5l57. 
^ RADICAL 83. 

min J5 "pp 153. 

;}C RADICAL 85. 

439; JlCtt^ 435; 
iCmm^ 282. 

s-wn- p\ 439. 

690;a?^ir^589;a? 

81 516. 

fto^ j!Jii818;JiJ^326,439; 
?i?]ltilirii|g«326; 
Rr fe J9F 318. 

;um ff 516. 

cS7 Ji&+341jjg_j||.21l4. 



f«? «R121;«]|tR122. 

9l§t 

«»»? IB iff 1601. 



hao f&ff#513. 

AiT j»iP88;JtKflift282; 

JIIBII£$324;^^ 

327. 
ai ^ 505. 



yen 




shuh ^ A 456. 




hwo fg ^ 564, 589. 

i&g «S3182;fS^^3^ 
524, 562. 

ts?o ?fgi«S827;?f g439. 

han ]§| ^^ 379. 

e7 »li60];.ifji^i|ii|591. 

v^ Ji 4fc 376, 377, 378. 
^ RADICAL 86. 



tou 
u 



529; ,iifl[#614;.^ 
513;.it*^||J|6 

4» K :^ E 553. 



150 



INDBZ 01 CHINB8B CHASACTEB8. 



cC US » 296 ; H « 296. 

%fc ^ M IB H 548. 

y^g Sii^ 80; SliflS 273; 
ji 379, 489; nil 410, 
452. 

Jt^ RADICAL 87. 




t«>o't "JS S( 454. 



>r BADICAL 91. 

m B 578. 

4=- RADICAL 93. 




tieh 



muh Ig^ 284. 




;>« JP ^ 156. 

;^ RADICAL 94. 

Hit 

« RADICAL 96. 



ivmg I]7,46etseq.;3EKl]; 
Iiff31;I:^E152. 

Bmm 586. 



9 $ 1 55; 9ff [^ 183; 




It 



282; S^^ ^282; 
S 9 €11 548; 115111 
pi M 548. 



hien, H IP dt 182, iz. 





ywh S iSI 55. 

4fe RADICAL 100. 

aheng ^ 1 469. 



BB RADICAL 102. 



¥ 




liu 



Wa f Jl 383; ^ 547; ^ Jf 
581. 



1^455. 
e 11 210. 

182, v. 

ll«IBi$418. 
Q RADICAL 106. 

6 m 595. 
■g ^ 337. 

*l;a±l;^;g 

2;a:k^3;SJt& 
4;l«10;S^ll. 




fei 



pah 




hiJbang 



INDEX OP CHINBSB CHARACTERS. 



151 



JDl RADICAL 109. 



9h4ng Si ^ 366. 




M 

^ 9 509 ; |g ;g 535. 

S25lj 119263,264. 
g ^ 280 ; g tf 324, 
860,361; HElff 484; 

g RADICAL 109. 

Ii«272;li^ffl272, 

chik 284. 

aiang m B 135. 



^f«»182. iy; «a| 
274; tffM273, 439; 

#l|277;§4|t# 
3a3;*||Jt278j# 

m H 279. 





<u7i 




^Ml 






# « I 47. 

^ RADICAL 111. 

ftlJfip281;^W284;^ 
K289;,^^300;^ 

Jt*484. 

.)5 RADICAL 112. 



<<'«« ti^$j$69. 





<M» 




IIPJ 

t8ze 



^ RADICAL 113. 

^W^^; iPi>t9IS415; 
»t^*«jE238;ip|i 
^ ;! it S 239. 

11243. 




-<J> 



^ SS249;gJB^|| 
©424. 

A'> )iB # 16. 

" ll^3E46; jji^ 155. 
^ RADICAL 115. 




»itt f|:J' 469. 



f4 

*><, ^?467;^|iS5 510; 

^^^^«J»:lfeE555. 

shue. W^^X-ffi 314; ift 
^^*ffi316. 



yV RADICAL 116. 

**«»? $• M 60. 

jfe RADICAL 117. 




hang * ]§( 133, 385, 517; ^t 

X 9 ■ 3£ H 598. 




fimg Ht^ 468. 



152 



INDEZ Of CHUnUlK 0HA£AJCT1IBS. 



jfy RADICAL 118. 



ii ^ E 575. 





pa S/:i^^l8V,§$:^l81; 






* S 541; <a? :K 19 « 

#,542;ta|H?S 
:^e248;^^||y 

*E261. 
^RADICAL 119. 




y^h #J(IBS«|5 324. 




U^ tt^566;%|t278;;e 

283. 
^ RADICAL 120. 




i» f^^fiF 188. 




&<«« e^ 472; iSMI 295; 
ill m 55, 295. 

^t^h ^ ji 439. 
ofo 3^11 »f 523. 



twan 



ISI$70. 



^;;: H 11208. 





»^ UtW ^52. 



1 

/«» H m 477. 




ch'an 8 IP @ 568; 



hZ II i 42 ; IK ^ 44 ; Hi 
272, 289; S^ 291. 

^g ««*e63;|»»272, 
273 ; « :^ 441 ; « ^ 

152 ; It E 186 ; tfttf 

420, 437 ; « ]^ 408 ; 
|B|gl50, 216;||S 

ff^^^:fcE562; 

152 ; « H 218. 
't'^ ^ ^ i(fc ft Sf Ji 458. 




«o ^ ^ 557. 
c^fc iiSfe^73;||Ji325. 

^^ mm^ 30. 

Pl^ RADICAL 122. 



"^ J&El73,237;«fgl74j 

«iRm« 101. 

^ RABrcAL m. 



^' 



"•J 8 ^ fN^ 512, 



INDEX 01* CHIKISII CHABAOTBBS. 



153 




han Vi Vf' ^ 201. 




ling |»i|459. 

:^ RADICAL 125. 




182, xix. 
!^ RADICAL 128. 





RADICAL 129. 
^ RADICAL 132. 



^ *^ 276;JjJ-^276. 
1^ RADICAL 134. 





WU 



la $ A 472 ; H ^ 473. 
^ RADICAL 136. 



H ^ 178. 

jjNp RADICAL 140. 

if ^ 329. 



«>ow ^ 9 $ 514. 



ffi 



mtoo 





ch*a i|^ j$ 72. 
chwang ffi jR I 51. 



II 



wan 




{on 




if 

/aw 



Sftlii;%^Wmi32. 

Sf|275; SSM^ 
276 ; Ji -g 275. 



«a Sl^^l'^' 



®»455;»|g455. 




8U 





ytw 



^!^ il 564; 811587. 
Jig RADICAL 141. 




fe» ^tt«413. 
ff RADICAL 144. 



king 



It jfe 259 ; fj ^ 458. 



^ ^ ^ fi 346. 




^ fj!f564;f(|j$439, 327; 

mmigt 518. 

:^ RADICAL 145. 
i « » 71. 



.154 



JKDBZ or CHnCUI 0HA1SACTXB8. 



^ RADICAL 146. 

^ .Ii«f2;l«f.iri57;15 
Jg i^ 4# 525. 




aT a a 473. 

:^ BADICAL 147. 

100; 1^9^91. 



»^ ft 1130; ft 11499. 

mi 

1^ 11^280. 

^ RADICAL 148. 

S j|P:3C472. 



RADICAL 149. 



U tf IS 164. 




^ m II 306. 
*oo IS 'fif 466. 




?«"» I»«lt489. 



jR If 242. 




PJ 





m 398; SHiHiJS 397. 



' Chan mV-M 220;;^ 



nip: -221. 




^ tt%34;S.9«|396; 



K W 198. 



h^g g| S 498. 



If 

*'<«? 4ff * 199. 

]g RADICAL 261. 



t^ Sffca54S6jSft^SU 
456; 

^ RADICAL 168. 

Iw I519E#«5 108. 

^ RADICAL 154. 

M 

yOan ^ ^ ^ 164. 



*«^ H ^ 471 ; Jt te 473. 



^ )K ifif 282 ; JK J» 291. 



« JliB5;itA«. 




INDEX OF CHINISB1 CSASACTEBS. 



156 




uze g ©: :^ ^ 456. 



U'ing H 456. 




t»an 1^ j§ ^ 244; K ^ 226. 
^ BADICAL. 156 

'ch'ao j^ §, 454. 

$ RADICAL 159. 
|g ^ 182, xiii. 

11 

^i'ing li:^$i^^ 454. 

w 

hwei t|[ !|# 522. 




^ RADICAL 160. 





nung 



p»^ 1^ ^ :^ E 556, 560, 
M KADICAL 161. 



9k n 154. 

^ RADICAL 162. 



«•««» 1 i& ^ 190; Jl H ^ ^: 

191 ; lift ^glljjg 192; 



^ 
>' 





tain 



yeo 



JiW:^El52;lift 
^«a|i93;li^|| 

^27.9;j|iftgg|g 
194; 1^283; ji$ 

:^*466;i^:A:* 

456. 

±473; jiiffi^ 
477 ; 1 ± R ^ 476. 




yun 








ta 



»444;*g^444;^ 

iff 444 ;^4Jt 376-378, 
626. 



^^277; '311^307;^ 
glJ308;Jgf5 310;g| 
}|!r.327. 

Ji280;Jt-A280;Jig( 

rI 500 ; jt ije.501 ; Jt 

JE 502 ; Jt t 603. 

^*534; ^ !g«fl|||| 
585 ;^ Ig flft 606 ; 
J$ 575. 

^ RADICAL 163. 



yih g, d|: 289. 

IB 

lang B + 163; ||5 jj ]f|f 572. 

m 

*«n a5aE18;f|5i41;||5g 

43; IP f- 281. 

pi a5^160,273;a5ggl61, 




156 



INDEX OF OHnniSI OSABAOTEBS. 



a ]$ 167. 



ho'oh lis Hi! ^510. 

no ^m 538. 



TO 




« ■547j^fc^532; 

fU tS 517, 

t« »E^74;|BJ||380; 

184;|pg|445;|QS^ 
445; 185^^ 189; 15 
^fi 298; US $298; 
n & 456. 

^Sv9 II SC 467 ; 1$ ^ 45. 

f^9!IKiR£50 

g, EADICAL 166. 



ch'ung :£Sg||<8|472. 

^ RADICAL 167. 




557. 

fh^ |»B^925;i^M439; 
H^441. 




..an? ^ ft 379; ii 6 379;^ 
«t 379 ; ^ M 379. 



ruh i|ili|^128. 



& ^l|ii$110;^ltlll 



RADICAL 168. 



c/^«3;S^40;^A32;ft'g 
ohar,^ fl^'t338;;g'gfl 

g B 339. 
P^ RADICAL 169. 




«« iE*G585;^)R589. 




^ «-&190;«jBjr68. 






^ it 395, 544; ^ff^m 
607. 




(•"iiaw is W l53. 



^ SI S ft 182, vii. 



Zh |iH'g320. 

JS SI^^E473. 



®^135;H»143, 




fcoh 



INDEX OF CHINESE CHABACTEBS. 



157 



ilZ H :^ ft 317; BS m 324. 




Shan tn H; ^97. 



i» 



J^ |J BADIOAL 170. 



fi^ Kf li 423, 430 ; jSjf «gp jjl 
372. 



512;|i^U^550;|l^ 
G«513;|J^BI!&j^ 
H? 513 ; il^ i» ^ 1$ 

373. y.;nit^mt 

525. 
/« F»^469;|l|a^471. 

vfiTu K ft 269 ; K ^ 270. 

m 

Ung m 18 H^ 6$ 419. 




'n:^ ^ [^ 439. 




tut H^ 439. 

H RADICAL 173. 

Kftll3;l|||»455. 



a/»n 




w»s ft 1& i^ 267. 




RADICAL 180. 



Man? f^ ^ ^ 412. 





RADICAL 181. 

mi ' 

s^n «35lF339;JK|tl|5I52. 

15 «il95:^E559;|afl|391, 
546, 434 ; ^ ^ 439 ; 

m ^ I9r ^ ;^ e 92. 





ngih 



et a* 190. 

« S» 15 ; « Wit 588 ; 
1i^^^45];|Si^ 

A » 525. 

® ff E 574. 
:^ RADICAL 184. 

M 

fan IK IR ig 182, viii. 



m 

8hih 




yang 



« W I? 394. 

"if RADICAL 185. 

.U •& iff 281 ; -g- JBR 289. 
j^ RADICAL 187. 




"»» 



imT Jif 392,544jJtU|Jg 
458. 




/» S9 »^ 15. 

S etJiJsi82,xvi;ja 



158 



IKDIZ or CHINB8E' CHABA0TBB8. 



H 182, xvi; e g5 417, 
419, 425 ; ft i{ :^ E 
565. 



i^i lif IV il^^ss; £15^456. 



I* ^ 389, 545, 431 ;: 
383. 





hiao 





n 



y^ ISF S 3-19. 



v» » it « A fl 182, XX. 
*^ RADICAL 188. 



rt II til 135. 



mtng 



,% BADICAL 196. 
in 3t 236. 



ml 



31 

'>u^1r filll ^ 231. 

^ BADICAL 197. 



:^«3i];»^:Jt« 

313 ;m^'M 280. 
RADICAL 198. 




ven 



i-K Jl A II 393; H in 472. 
H RADICAL 201. 



fcKHMtj |ll'?29-;ffftg61; 
3ia:564;||.g|^458. 



H RADICAL 20a. 



M 



mi a « 374. 
^ RADICAL 210. 



Wi ^^^M 374 iii* 




SHAKGHAI: 
Prtuiedi by KIellt fr. Walsh, Ldotbd. 



V
Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "The Chinese Government: A Manual of Chinese Titles, Categorically Arranged ..."

See other formats
